HomeMy WebLinkAbout81-98 RESOLUTION•
RESOLUTION NO 81
98
A RESOLUTION AWARDING A CONTRA
ELECTRIC, IN THE AMOUNT OF $143,583,
CONTINGENCY AMOUNT OF $160,000 FO
TO THE HAMESTRING SEWER PUMP STA
OF A BUDGET ADJUSTMENT IN THE AM
AND APPROVAL OF EXPENDITURES UP
OFF SITE ESCROW ACCOUNTS TO G
PROJECT COSTS.
•
•
CT TO JACKSON
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF
ARKANSAS*
Section L. The City Council hereby awards a contra
of $143,583, approves a project contingency amount of $
Hamestring Sewer Pump Station; and authonzes the Mayor and
A copy of the contract is attached hereto marked Exhibit "A"
Section 9 The City Council hereby approves a b
$120,000 increasing Fixed Assets, Acct. No. 4470 9470 5801 0
Sewer Improvements, Acct. No. 4470 9470 5815 00, Project
adjustment is attached hereto and made a part hereof.
Section 3 The City Council hereby approves exp
escrow accounts to go toward the project costs.
PASSED AND APPROVED this 16_" day of Jun_
APPROVED.
By
ATTEST:
By:`�; A: /4"/,;fieei i�
Heather Woodruff, City lerk
�i•
PLUS A PROJECT
IMPROVEMENTS
ION; APPROVAL
UNT OF $120,000;
TO $50,00 FROM
TOWARD THE
HE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE,
t to Jackson Electric, in the amount
60,000 for improvements to the
City Clerk to execute said contract
d made a part hereof.
dget adjustment in the amount of
, Project No. 96040 20, decreasing
96048 20. A copy of the budget
ditures up to $50,00 from off site
1998.
F ed H
a, Mayor
rt
.
-
•
-."
•
DOCUMENT 00500
CONTRACT
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into on the 14M day of J'ti n e
1928 , by and between Jackson Electric Co Inc herein called the Contractor, and the City of
Fayetteville, Arkansas, hereinafter called the Owner:
WITNESSETH:
That the Contractor, for the consideration hereinafter fully set out, hereby agrees with the Owner as
follows:
1. That the Contractor shall furnish all the materials, and perbrm all of the work in manner and
form as provided by the following enumerated Drawings, Specifications, and Documents, which
are attached hereto and made a part hereof, as if fully contained herein and are entitled
Hamestring Creek Lift Station , dated April, 1997.
Advertisement for Bids
Instructions to Bidders
Bid and acceptance thereof
Performance Bond
Payment Bond
General Conditions
Sup lemental Conditions
Spe ifications
Dra ings (See Sheet Index below)
SHEET INDEX
Sheet No. Desch
1 Cover
2 Lift Stati n Piping Plans and Sections
3 Lift Stati n Structural Plans and Sections
4 Details
5 Electrical
2. That the Owner hereby agrees to pay to the Contractor
Agreement, subject to additions and deductions as prov
lawful money of the United States, the amount of:
for the faithful performance of this
ded in the Specifications or Bid, in
One Hundred Forty Three Thousand, Five Hundred Eighty Three Dollars ($143,583.00).
3. The Work will be substantially completed within 112 d ys after the date when the Contract
Time commences to run as provided in Notice to Procee , and completed and ready for final
payment in accordance with the General Conditions wi in 126 days after the date when the
Contract Time commences to run.
FY972102
00500 - 1
4. Liquidated Damages: Owner and Contractor recognize that time is of the essence of this
Agreement and the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the
times specified in above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the General
Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving the
actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of
requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay
(but not as a penalty) Contractor shall pay Owner Two hundred Dollars ($200 00) for each
day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3 for Substantial Completion, if
Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time
specified in Paragraph 3 above for final payment or any proper extension thereof granted by
Owner, Contractor shall pay Owner Two hundred Dollars ($200.00) for each day that expires
after the time specified in Paragraph 3 for completion and readiness for final payment.
5. That within 30 days of receipt of an approved payment request, the Owner shall make partial
payments to the Contractor on the basis of a duly certified and approved estimate of work
performed during the preceding calendar month by the Contractor, LESS the retainage
provided in the General Conditions, which is to be withheld by the Owner until all work
within a particular part has been performed strictly in accordance with this Agreement and
until such work has been accepted by the Owner.
6. That upon submission by the Contractor of evidence satisfactory to the Owner that all
payrolls, material bills, and other costs incurred by the Contractor in connection with the
construction of the work have been paid in full, final payment on account of this Agreement
shall be made within 60 days after the completion by the Contractor of all work covered by
this Agreement and the acceptance of such work by the Owner.
It is further mutually agreed between the parties hereto that if, at any time after the execution
of this Agreement and the Surety Bond hereto attached for its faithful performance and
payment, the Owner shall deem the Surety or Sureties upon such bond to be unsatisfactory or
if, for any reason such bond ceases to be adequate to cover the performance of the work, the
Contractor shall, at his expense, within 5 days after the receipt of notice from the Owner,
furnish an additional bond or bonds in such form and amount and with such Surety or
Sureties as shall be satisfactory to the Owner. In such event, no further payment to the
Contractor shall be deemed to be due under this Agreement until such new or additional
security for the faithful performance of the work shall be furnished in manner and form
satisfactory to the Owner.
8. No additional work or extras shall be done unless the same shall be duly authorized by
appropriate action by the Owner in writing.
FY972L02 00500-2
•
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement on the day and date
first above written, in three (3) counterparts, each of which shall, without proof or accounting for
the other counterpart be deemed an original Contract.
JAekson1 Ekke4ilc ln
a, LJa•
JACKSON ELECTRIC CO, INC.
CONTRACTOR
SEAL•
-+r 01,9 Ilz
WITNESSES:
IspfiS
^ e 'w'
ATTEST:
gocicoon)
tlerk
Approved as to form:2
FY972102
•
•
Title
CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS
OWNER
By
Attorney for Owner
Fred Hanna, Mayor
00500 - 3
•
•
City of Fayetteville. Arkansas
Budget Adjustment Form
•
Budget Year
1998
Department: Sales Tax Capital Improvement Fund
Division:
Program:
Date Requested
06/02/98
Adjustment #
Project or Item Requested:
Additional funding is requested for the construction of a sewer
pump station on Hamestring Creek.
Project or Item Deleted:
None. A portion of the funding for the request is from the
Highway 16 West Sewer Force Main, project number 96048.
Justification of this Increase:
The sewer pump station on Hamestring creek is a cost share
between the City and developers and the project is ready to
proceed.
Justification of this Decrease:
The Highway 16 West Sewer Main project has $480,000
remaining after approval of this request.
Account Name
Fixed Assets
•
Increase Expen e (Decrease Revenue)
Amount , Account Number
120,000
4470 9470
Project Number
5801 00• :>.96040N<20:.•
4.
Decrease Expense (Increase Revenue)
Account Name Amount
Sewer Improvements -. 120,000
Account Number
4470 9470 -_,�, s 5815
R uest
d e Co din
De
en t Director
Admin. Sery es Dire .Q'► Date
Mayor Date
Blue Copy: Budget & Research Fellow Copy
Requeste •
Posted to General Ledger
Posted to Project Accounting
Entered in Category Log
C. 1.-1PPI988UD B:!.-IDJ,N:!.1/ES. if W-/
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C. Qv -11 21' €' U
. sty
PROJECT MANUAL
HAMESTRING CREEK
LIFT STATION
CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS
APRIL, 1997
MCE PROJECT NO.
FY972102
If gap.j.Ertna‘•
M4er ARIV N.- `;':.
Celebrating 30 Years of Designing Arkansr r. � ,
P
No 3132 X11
•
PROJECT MANUAL
HAMESTRING CREEK
LIFT STATION
FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS
APRIL, 1997
MCE PROJECT NO.
FY972102
Prepared By:
McClelland Consulting Engineers, Inc.
1810 North College
P.O. Box 1229
Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701
(501) 443-2377
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
C. Protect all work against damage due to dirt, water, chemicals, frost, heat, handling,
theft, and etc. Keep openings in conduit and equipment closed with suitable plugs
or caps during installation.
D. Provide necessary warning devices, barricades, or coverings required for safety
around exposed "live" parts or high temperature surfaces.
3.08 CHASES AND OPENINGS:
A. Provide any necessary cutting or drilling for required openings, and patch and
refinish as directed.
3.09 PAINTING:
A. Paint all exposed conduit and equipment outside for uniform appearance or
identification as directed
B. Touch-up scratches in factory finished surfaces with an approved paint to match
the surface.
3.10 TESTING AND ADJUSTING:
A. Test the.. completed electrical systems and prove free from short circuits, poor
connections, and improper grounding.
Maintain on the premises a first class voltmeter, ammeter, milli -ohmmeter, and
meggar insulation tester in proper calibration and provide test: measurements as
required.
1. Meggar all 600 volt rated wiring at 1000 volts minimum before applying
power. Prove resistance in excess of 10 megohms.
2. Test metal conduit and grounds for continuity and prove resistance less
than one ohm to farthest outlet from system ground.
3. Test system ground to earth per the NEC.
C. Align, adjust, calibrate, and test all systems to assure safe and proper operation.
D. Verify proper taps on motors and transformers for rated performance.
3.11 POST CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS:
A. Deliver special tools, and other products necessary for proper operation and
maintenance of the electrical systems
16010-7
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
B. Deliver spare parts as called for under other Electrical Sections contained herein
or on the Drawings.
C. Submit Project Record Documents indicating all changes from the Contract
Documents made during construction.
D. Submit Certificates of Final Inspections from the Administrative Authority.
E Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals covering all phases of equipment
and systems provided. Include complete spare parts data with current prices and
sources of supply Include copy of manufacturing data sheets and shop drawings
required in pre -construction submittals.
F. Submit extended warranties in excess of the standard one year warranty where
required by other Electrical Sections contained herein orr on the Drawings.
3.12 INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER.
A. Provide competent instruction to Owner's personnel covering operation and
maintenance of all electrical systems. Provide specialized instruction by
manufacturer's technical representatives when required.
3.13 GENERAL WARRANTY:
Warrant the electrical installation against defects in products and/or workmanship
fora period of one (1) year from the date of substantial. completion.
Provide all labor, replacement parts, services, transportation, and Incidental costs
necessary for the proper operation of all electrical systems dunng the warranty
period.
Make good any damage to the grounds or other equipment resulting from defects
in products and/or workmanship during the warranty period.
END OF SECTION
•
16010-8
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
RACEWAYS
SECTION 16110
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Conduit and fittings
B. Wireways
C. Sleeves
D. Seals
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements
B. Section 16120 Wires and Cables
C. Section 16190 Supporting Devices
D. Section 16195 Electrical Identification
E Section 16450 Grounding
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit Manufacturer's data sheets on each manufactured assembly such as
special fittings, modular seals, fire -stop material, and etc.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE"
A. Use only materials that are UL listed for the application and that bear the UL label.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS:
A. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC):
1. Heavy wall steel pipe, hot dipped galvanized inside and out, and with ends
factory threaded prior to galvanizing (except at terminations).
16110 -1
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR .
2. Use only steel or malleable iron fittings.
3. Use box connectors with "biting" type locknuts. Use insulated bushings
where wire is larger than #8 AWG Provide approved watertight hubs in wet
locations.
4. Use threaded couplings or approved unions.
5. Use factory elbows, long sweep where possible. Provide watertight "LB"
fittings with gasketed covers where required.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) will not be allowed.
C. Non-metallic Conduit (NMC) will not be allowed.
D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC):
1. Electroplated steel tubing with extruded PVC jacket equal to "sealtight."
2. Use steel or malleable iron LFMC box connectors with insulated throats and
a threaded grounding cone.
E Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) will not be allowed.
2.02 WIREWAYS:
A. Provide wireways properly sized to accommodate the conductors or as shown on
the Drawings.
•
Provide wireways of code gauge steel with baked enamel finish. Furnish all
necessary hardware and accessories.
2.03 SLEEVES:
•
A. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves sized to accommodate the
outside dimension of conduit.
B. Provide integral waterstop collar on sleeves in wet well walls.
2.04 SEALS.
A. Where conduit penetrates outside walls or slabs, make watertight with oakum and
sealant or provide modular rubber seal designed for the purpose.
B. Where sealing fittings are required, provide explosion proof type meeting Class I
groups A and B requirements equal to Appleton type EYS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
16110-2•
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
3.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS:
A. Use RMC for the following applications:
1. Above or below grade and exposed outdoors
2. Wet locations
B. Use LFMC for the final connection to motors, transformers and other adjustable or
vibrating equipment exposed in finished areas or installed in wet or damp
locations.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Size raceways for the number, AWG, and type of conductors to be installed
therein in accordance with the NEC, but no smaller than 3/4".
B. Install conduit in standard 10 foot lengths except where a shorter section is
required. Make required field cuts square and ream until all burrs are removed.
Field cut threads required for RMC shall be coated with a high zinc dust content
galvanizing repair compound with high electrical conductivity
C. Make field bends in RMC with an approved bending machine or device, and make
free from kinks, dents, or flattened surfaces .Do not exceed 90° in any individual
bend nor exceed 360° of total bends or elbows in any one conduit run.
D. Provide sleeves for conduit through concrete walls prior to laying up or pouring.
Make wall sleeves flush with wall.
E The Drawings indicate diagramatically branch circuits and feeders required. Install
conduit runs to accommodate the wiring requirements.
3.03 EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEMS:
A. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide empty conduit of types as specified
herein for future Installation of wire or cable.
B. Leave fish wire or rope in conduit with proper labels attached.
END OF SECTION
16110 - 3
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
WIRES AND CABLES
SECTION 16120
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Power wiring and connectors, 600 volts or less
B. Control and signal winng and connectors
C. Miscellaneous matenals
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements
B. Section 16110 Raceways
C. Section 16190 Supporting Devices
D. Section 16195 Electncal Identification
E Section 16450 Grounding
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit Manufacturer's data sheets for each type of wiring connector proposed for
use.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 POWER WIRING AND CONNECTORS:
A. Use single conductor annealed copper with 600 volt code type THHN or dual rated
THHN/THWN insulation unless noted otherwise. Use type XHHW stranded
copper wire for isolated power systems when indicated.
B. Minimum wire size is #12 AWG. Where developed distance from panelboard to
first outlet exceeds 65 feet, increase minimum size to #10 AWG.
C. #12 and #10 AWG wire used for lighting, receptacles, and other non -vibrating
equipment may be solid conductor. All other wiring including wiring connecting to
motors, transformers, and special grounding systems shall be stranded conductor.
16120-1
•
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
D. Make splices required in #12 and #10 AWG solid conductor wire with insulated
"Scotchlok" connectors.
F.
G.
Make splices in all wire required to be stranded with approved crimp -on or .bolted
pressure connectors with snap -on or bolt -on insulated caps.
The voltage and temperature ratings of the connector insulator shall be at least
equal to that required of the conductor insulation.
Furnish wire with color coding conforming to the following:
250V or Less 480V/277V
Conductor
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral
Ground
Black
Red
Blue
White
Green
Brown
Orange
Yellow
Gray
Green
Color coding may be solid or striped -colored insulation. Colored plastic tape may
be used at terminations on #8 AWG and larger conductors with black Insulation,
2.02 CONTROL AND SIGNAL WIRING AND CONNECTORS:.
A. Use stranded annealed copper conductors with insulation suitable for the purpose.
B. For applications, 50 volts and greater, use #14 AWG minimum size conductor with
600 volt insulation and approved for the application.
C. For power limited wiring and less than 50 volts, use #18 AWG minimum size
conductor except for multi -conductor cable recommended or required by the
system manufacturer.
Make splices required in #14 through #10 AWG wire with Insulated "Scotchlok"
connectors.
E Make slices required in #16 AWG and smaller wire with insulated crimp -on
terminals ,screw connected to numbered terminal strips, or use approved cable
connectors.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Where required, use wire lubricating compound suitable for the wire insulation and
16120 - 2
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
conduit and that does not harden nor become adhesive. Do not use on wiring for
isolated power systems.
B. Use plastic tape that is flame retardant and cold and weather resistant equal to
Scotch #33.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Thoroughly clean conduit prior to pulling -in wires. Do not install wire until the
raceway can be maintained in a dry condition.
Use non-metallic pulling ropes attached to the conductors by means of woven
basket grips or pulling eyes. Pull all conductors for a conduit run in together in
such a manner as to avoid damage to the conductors, insulation, or conduit.
C. Neatly train and nest multiple conductors and cables in boxes and enclosures and
hold in place with "tie -wraps." Where conductors terminate in panelboards,
arrange conductors to be perpendicular or parallel to circuit breaker line-up.
Make splices and terminations mechanically and electrically secure. Splices shall
only be made in a suitable accessible function box.
Where multiple paralleled conductor make -ups are indicated on the Drawings for
large feeders, the conductors shall be identical in length, gauge, code type, and
etc., and shall be terminated exactly alike
END OF SECTION
16120 - 3
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
BOXES AND ENCLOSURES
SECTION 16130
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Junction and pull boxes
B. Outlet boxes
C. Enclosures
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements
B. Section 16110 Raceways
C. Section 16140 Wiring Devices
D. Section 16190 Supporting Devices
E Section 16195 Electrical Identification
F. Section 16450: Grounding
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit Manufacturer's data sheets on special enclosures.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES:
A. Provide cast metal type FS or FD boxes with watertight gasketed covers.
2.02 OUTLET BOXES:
A. Provide cast metal type FS or FD boxes with gasketed covers and watertight flip
lids as required by device.
2.03 ENCLOSURES:
16130 - 1
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
A. Provide code gauge steel enclosures with baked enamel finish as manufactured
by Hoffman to facilitate the installation of multiple components such as small motor
starters, contactors, equipment controls, and etc.
B. Fumish with hinged door and captive fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Properly size boxes in accordance with the NEC to accommodate the number and
size of conductors and conduits entering the boxes.
Size enclosures to adequately accommodate the equipment with space for wiring
and maintenance.
C. Provide junction or pull boxes to facilitate pulling or splicing of conductors so that
no one conduit run will exceed the allowable bends of 360°.
D. All boxes shall be accessible at all times.
E Close any unused knockouts or openings in boxes or enclosures with suitable
caps or covers.
END OF SECTION
16130 - 2
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
SECTION 16170
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Fused and non-fused disconnect switches
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements
B. Section 16190 Supporting Devices
C. Section 16195 Electrical Identification
D. Section 16450 Grounding
E Section 16476 Fuses
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit Manufacturer's data sheets on each type of disconnect switch proposed for
use.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
A. For applications requiring 30-1200 amperes rating or for any two or three pole
application, provide NEMA type "HD" (heavy duty) horsepower rated disconnects
with enclosures suitable for the applications, such as NEMA 3R for outdoor
installations.
1. Provide interlock to prevent door operating with switch in "ON" position.
2. Furnish with grounding block
3. Provide for padlocking switch in "OFF" position.
4. Furnish with terminals UL listed for 75°C. wires.
5. Provide Class R, J, or L fuse provisions as applicable for fusible switches.
Provide feature to reject Class H fuses.
6. Furnish with factory baked enamel finish.
B. For fractional horsepower 120 volt motors with integral overload protection, as well
16170-1
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
as other 120 volt equipment protected at 20 amperes or less, use specification
grade single pole switch in outlet box with minimum ratings as follows:
1. Horsepower rated for one horsepower
2. 120/277 AC volts
3. 20 amperes
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
Provide disconnect switch for each fixed appliance or motor load indicated on the
Drawings or required by the NEC. Install switch in sight of and within 50 feet
maximum of equipment it serves.
B. Generally, install 30 ampere or more rated switches with the top 5 feet above
grade.
C. Install 20 ampere rated switches with center 4 feet above grade.
END OF SECTION
16170 - 2
•
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
SUPPORTING DEVICES
SECTION 16190
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Anchors
B. Hangers and supports
C. Concrete bases
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010 General Electncal Requirements
B. Section 16110 Raceways
C. Section 16130 Boxes and Enclosures
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit for approval Contractor's shop drawings indicating shape and dimensions
of concrete bases when necessary for clarity and coordination with other trades.
PART2-PRODUCTS:
2.01 ANCHORS:
A. Size anchors for minimum safety factor of two times recommended load. Use only
corrosion resistant materials.
B. In new concrete, use malleable iron inserts set prior to pouring concrete.
C. In existing concrete or solid masonry, use Phillips "Redhead" expansion shields or
Elcen self drilling expansion shields. Use power driven fasteners only for light
loads and with specific approval.
D. In sheet metal, use self tapping sheet metal screws or machine bolts with washers
and nuts.
2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
16190-1
LJ
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
A. Support individualconduits with malleable iron one -hole conduit clamps, steel
two -hole pipe straps, or split ring steel conduit clamps. Wire, perforated iron strap,
or steel one -hole clamps will not be acceptable.
B. For free standing boxes and enclosures, provide steel angle frame constructed to
prevent any strain on conduits entering box.
D. Provide strain relief cord grips with aluminum fittings, stainless steel mesh, and
liquid tight for insulated cables. Grips shall be equal to kellems and sized for cord it
is being applied to.
2.03 CONCRETE BASES:
A. Provide concrete bases for all exterior equipment mounted on grade. Use proper
cement/sand mix to achieve strength of 3000 psi after 28 days.
B. Provide steel reinforcing bars as required and provide proper ties and support
during pouring.
C. Provide properly sized anchor bolts held in position with templates. Where anchor
bolts cannot be held in sufficient alignment, provide adjustable bolts in pipe
sleeves. .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install anchors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations but sized•to
accommodate at least twice the actual load. Oversized holes that may weaken the
installation will not be acceptable.
I
I
I
C
C
1,
B. Support all boxes and equipment enclosures directly by steel angle frame
independently of the conduit. 0
C. Support conduit independently by the building structure at intervals complying with
the NEC. Do not support conduit from piping, ductwork, or suspended ceiling
hangers.
D. Support conduit without sagging to provide drainage of condensation. I
E. Permanently and securely support conduit, boxes, and enclosures before installing
any wiring.
I
16190 2 ,
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
F. Establish sizes of concrete bases required to accommodate equipment.
' Generally, make bases extend 3" larger than equipment on all sides. Trowel finish
and rub smooth. Form edges with 3/4" chamfer.
END OF SECTION
I
C
U
I
I
I
C
C
I
I
I
I
16190-3
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 16195
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Equipment nameplates
B. Name tags
C. Circuit directories
D. Utility marker tape
E. Self -adhering labels
F. Wire markers
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit for approval, Manufacturer's data sheets on each manufactured identifying
device.
B. Submit for approval, a schedule of nameplates to be affixed to each item.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Approved manufacturers are Seton and Brady.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 NAMEPLATES:
A. Identify each major component and controller as it is named on the Drawings with
engraved nameplates made from laminated plastic sheets equal to Seton Style
2060.
1. Furnish with white letters on black background except for other color coded
requirements.
16195-1
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
2. Provide appropriate size nameplates with information easily readable.
Generally, furnish . 3/4" high nameplates with 3/8" letters for major
equipment such as switchboards, panelboards, transformers; and 1/2" high
nameplates with 1/4" letters for minor equipment such as disconnect
switches, contactors, starters, emergency power receptacles and etc.
2.02 NAMETAGS:
A. Identify each outlet box of empty conduit system by affixing a write -on vinyl name
tag equal to Seton Style PTOB to each end of pull wire installed in each conduit.
Indicate purpose of empty outlet box such as "telephone" with location of pull wire
termination such as "main terminal board."
B. Identify conductors terminated in junction box or outlet box intended for future
connection. Provide write -on vinyl name tags indicating panelboard and circuit
number or location of source.
2.03 CIRCUIT DIRECTORIES: '
A. Fill out circuit directory cards for cardholder slots inside panelboard doors. Provide
typewritten directory indicating function and location served for each circuit used.
B. Identify undesignated spare circuit breakers by writing the word "spare" in soft
pencil in the blank for that circuit number. Leave blank the description line for
uninstalled circuit breakers (spaces).
2.04 UTILITY MARKER TAPE: r '
A. For all conduit or direct burial cable installed underground and outside of building,
provide continuous plastic tape directly above underground services. .. '
B. Provide orange or red tape with contrasting letters at regular intervals equal to
Seton No. 210 Series.
C. For multiple underground conduit runs, provide two strips of marking tape; one
over each outside conduit.
2.05 LABELS:
A. Identify each junction box and conduit exposed in equipment rooms or accessible
above lay -in ceilings or behind access doors with permanent self -adhering orange '
labels equal to Seton "Opti-Code.".
16195-2 ,
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
B. Indicate voltage class such as "120/208 volts" or the type of signal cable installed
therein such as "telephone."
2.06 WIRE MARKERS:
A. Provide permanent self adhesive wire markers on each conductor in panelboards
or other equipment enclosures.
B. Indicate the circuit number or terminal number to which the wire is connected.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Attach nameplates with approved adhesive on plastic surfaces and factory baked
enameled surfaces only. Attach nameplates with proper screws on all other
surfaces.
B. Attach name tags to pull wires or conductors with nylon cord or other approved
method.
C. Install typewritten circuit directories in appropriate card.slots.
D. Install continuous strip
of utility
marker tape
12" above conduit
or direct burial cable
it is identifying. Do not
backfill
to grade until
tape installation is
approved.
E. Install identifying labels on conduit where intervals not to exceed 20 feet.
F. Install wire markers so that information is easily visible.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
C
C
16195-3
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICES
SECTION 16421
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Trenching and backfilling
B. Electrical secondary service raceways and wiring, including service to remote
equipment
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements
B. Section 16110 Raceways
C. Section 16120 Wires and Cables
D. Section 16195
E. Section 16450
Electrical Identification
Grounding
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit Shop Drawings of special mounting arrangements and : metering
requirements other than utility company's standard details.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE:
A. For underground raceways for primary and secondary service, as well as for
remote equipment, use rigid metallic conduit (RMC).
1. Provide hot dipped galvanized rigid metal conduit (RMC) for all raceways.
B. For raceways exposed outside, use RMC with threaded ends.
1. Provide malleable iron or steel screw -on fittings and insulated bushings.
2. Provide watertight hubs for all box connectors.
C. For all secondary wiring, use single, annealed, stranded copper conductors with
16421-1
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
600 volt code type dual rated.THHN/THWN insulation.
1. Make terminations in equipment to bolted lugs or use approved crimp -on
connectors bolted to bus bars.
2. Make all required splices with approved crimp -on or bolted pressure
connectors with snap -on or bolt -on insulators.
I
D. Where free standing equipment is used, provide heavy steel angle frame for ,
equipment mounting as required. Paint frame with gray enamel.
E. Provide concrete pads for transformers and other equipment mounted on grade.
Provide concrete bases, including steel reinforcing in accordance with utility
company's standard details or requirements.
PART 3-. EXECUTION
3.01 TRENCHING:
A. Excavate bottoms of trenches to required depth with uniform and solid bearing for
conduit. Do not lay conduit on mud, rocks, or unstable soil. Remove unsuitable
bearing material and backfill to proper depth with sand or other approved material.
B. Excavate trenches to depths that
will provide 4 inches
of
sand under the conduits
and the following minimum cover
above top of conduits
to
finished grade:
1. Secondary conduit or signal
landscaped areas - 2 feet.
2. Secondary conduit or signal
graveled driveways - 3 feet.
3.02 BACKFILLING:
cable service raceways under paved or
cable service raceways under unpaved or
A. Provide minimum of 4 inches of sand in bottom of trench for uniform bearing for
conduit. After conduit has been laid and approved, backfill trench to a depth of
one foot above top of conduit with sand or fine pea gravel. Install continuous strip
of plastic utility marker tape over conduit and sand. Use suitable material for
remaining backfill to finished grade, tamped to 95% compaction.
3.03 INSTALLATION:
A. Do not lay conduit in wet trenches. Keep trenches dry by pumping or other means
until backfilling is completed.
B. If underground splices cannot be avoided, provide approved manhole properly
H
L
I.
1
I
I
LJ
I
I
I
16421-2 '
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
protected and drained.
C. Where multiple parallelled conductor make -ups are indicated on the Drawings,
provide conductors identical in length, gauge, type, etc., and terminate exactly
alike.
D. Clean and swab -out conduit before pulling any wire.
E. Use approved wire lubricating compound when necessary to assist wire pulling.
F. Terminate empty conduit for signal cable to outside building unless shown
otherwise on the Drawings. Install fish wire and cap the open ends of conduit.
END OF SECTION
16421 -3
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR
Section 16424
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Auxiliary Panelboard Protection System
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's data sheets including installation, operation, and
maintenance instructions for equipment.
I B. Submit shop drawings indicating unit dimensions, weight, mounting
requirements, connection details and layout diagrams
C. Submit list of spare parts and source of supply
D. Submit five (5) year on site parts and labor warranty against failure..
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
IA. Comply with UL 1449 Suppression Ratings and ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 and
C62.45-1987 guidelines for category C surges.
' B. Approved manufacturers are Current Technology and Liebert. Unit shall be equal
to Current Technology SF series, model 100.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
' A. Nominal voltage and configuration shall conform to the requirements as shown
' for the panelboard or switchboard.
B. The maximum continuous operating voltage of all components shall not be less
' than 115% of nominal voltage.
C. The units primary protection mode shall be line -to -neutral and secondary
' 16424-1
Li
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
protection mode shall be line to ground and neutral to ground.
D. The tester single impulse surge current capacity shall be no less than 100,000
amps/ protection mode.
E. The suppression rating for each protection mode shall be 800 volts (277 volt
systems) or 400 volts (120 volt systems).
2.02 SUPPRESSION SYSTEM:
A. Unit shall utilize arrays of fused non -liner voltage dependent metal oxide
varistors matched to share surge currents.
B. Unit shall include a UL 1283 high frequency extended range tracking filter to
provide a minimum insertion loss of 34 dB @ 100 KHZ and 54 dB @ 10 MHZ.
C. Utilize copper bus bars and/or #8 AWG copper wire or larger for component
connections. Provide mechanical lugs for each field connection.
D. Provide externally mounted LED visual status indicators of each phase of the
unit. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure of 14 gauge painted steel.
F. TVSS shall be configured for use in Motor Control Center. • ..
PART 3 -EXECUTION:
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Make connections with #6 AWG copper conductors of. minimum length avoiding
unnecessary bends.
END OF SECTION
16424-2
I
C
[I
I
I
Li
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Li
7
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
GROUNDING
SECTION 16450
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Equipment grounding and bonding
B. System grounding
C. Transformer secondary grounding
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements
B.
Section
16110
Raceways
C.
Section
16120
Wires and Cables
D. Section 16130 Boxes and Enclosures
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit certified test report of grounding electrode resistance.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING ELECTRODES:
A. Provide 5/8 inch x 10 feet "copperweld" ground rods and accessories as required
to achieve proper system ground.
2.02 GROUNDING WIRES:
A. Provide insulated grounding conductors and jumpers sized in accordance with the
NEC but no smaller than #12 AWG. Identify with continuous green insulation or
with green tape at each termination.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
16450-1
H
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
A. Bond the entire metal raceway system including conduit, boxes, enclosures,
equipment frames, motor housings, and etc. System to be mechanically and
electrically continuous throughout installation.
B. Bond grounding conductor to conduit at the entrance and exit from that conduit
containing only the grounding conductor.
I
H
I
C. Install
grounding jumper
from
connector bushings to equipment grounding bars.
Bond
grounding bars and
lugs
to housing.
D. Install separate grounding conductor in all raceway systems.
E. Bond the grounding wires to each box and enclosure through which they pass.
F Install grounding electrode in accordance with the NEC. Prior to connecting to
system, measure ground resistance under "normal dry weather" conditions. If the
electrode to ground resistance is . not less than 25 ohms, install additional
grounding electrodes as required by the NEC to achieve specified minimum
resistance.
G. Establish the system ground (grounding bar) at the service entrance. Bond this
bar to all of the following:
1. Metal raceway system.
2. Grounding conductors.
3. The service entrance neutral conductor. Keep neutral conductors isolated
from ground throughout electrical system except at the system ground.
4. The grounding electrode.
5. Domestic water service pipe. Provide grounding jumper across water meter
connections.
H. Ground neutrals derived from dry -type transformers to steel frame domestic cold
water pipe in accordance with the NEC, and bond to the metal raceway system.
Keep neutral conductors isolated from ground throughout the transformer's
secondary distribution system except at the derived source.
END OF SECTION
16450-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
I
I
I
I
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
TRANSFORMERS, DRY TYPE
SECTION 16460
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
IA. Work under this Section includes furnishing and installing transformers and
accessories.
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements
B. Section 16190 Supporting Devices
C. Section 16195 Electrical Identification
ID. Section 16450 Grounding
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit Manufacturer's data. sheets and wiring diagrams for each type of
transformer proposed for use. Submit report on final operating tests.
' PART2-PRODUCTS
' 2.01 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS:
A. Furnish transformers with voltage, phase, and KVA rating as scheduled on the
' Drawings. Provide a minimum of four 2 1/2% full capacity primary taps on 25 KVA
and larger. Transformers shall be UL listed for 115°C. temperature rise above
40°C. ambient, capable of carrying a 15% continuous overload without exceeding
150°C. rise. Insulating materials shall be in accordance with NEMA ST20
standards for a 220°C. UL component recognized insulation system. Coils shall
be of the continuous wound construction and shall be impregnated with
nonhygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. Provide K -rated transformner as called for
on the drawings.
B. Transformer cores shall be constructed of high grade, non -aging silicon steel with
high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic
flux densities shall be kept well below saturation. The core and coil shall be
attached to the enclosure with rubber, vibration adsorbing mounts. There shall be
no metal -to -metal contact between the core, coil, or enclosure; however, the core
16460-1
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
I
shall be visibly
grounded to
the
enclosure by
means of a flexible grounding
conductor sized
in accordance
with
NEMA, IEEE,
and ANSI standards. I
C. Transformers shall be housed in heavy gauge, sheet steel, ventilated enclosure
with ventilating openings designed to prevent accidental access to "live" parts.
The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50°C rise
above a 40°C. ambient. Enclosure shall be finished in gray baked enamel.
Provide ground accessories.
D. Sound levels shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer not to exceed NEMA
specified levels. When required due to resonances, transformers shall be
mounted on rubber pads or vibration isolators as directed. Transformers shall be
equal to Sorgel "Watchdog" as manufactured by Square D.
E. Transformer shall be capable of being mounted in Motor Control Center.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install transformers so that connections are accessible and ventilating openings
are unobstructed.
B. Remove any shipping holddown devices that may prevent the core/coil assembly
from floating free in the resilient mounts.
C. Ground the transformer in strict compliance with the NEC and Section 16450.
D. Select the primary voltage taps that will provide nominal secondary voltage under
light to medium load with consideration to primary voltage extremes measured at
the transformer.
3.02 TESTING:
A. When installation is complete but prior to final acceptance, measure and record
primary and secondary voltage and current for each phase under no load, medium
load, and full load. Submit typed report of the test results.
END OF SECTION
1 .1
I
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Li
IJ
I
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
CIRCUIT BREAKER LIGHTING PANELBOARDS, 240 VAC MAX.
SECTION 16471
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Branch circuit panelboards rated 400 amperes or less
B. Circuit breakers and accessories
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010
' B. Section 16190
C. Section 16195
Electrical Requirements
Supporting Devices
Electrical Identification
D. Section 16450 Grounding
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit Manufacturer's data sheets for each panelboard and each type of circuit
breaker proposed for use. Submit schedule of engraved name plates and
panelboard circuit directories.
' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Approved Manufacturer's are Square D, I.T.E., GE, Challenger and
Cutler -Hammer for comparable and competitive product lines as applicable.
Additions to existing panelboards shall be made with circuit breakers and
' accessories from the same manufacturer as the existing panelboard.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELBOARDS:
A. Furnish with distributed phase sequence type bussing with approved plating.
Provide plug -on or bolt -on circuit breaker connections as scheduled on the
Drawings.
' B. Furnish with wiring terminals UL listed for 75°C and for copper wire.
C. Enclose bus assembly
in galvanized steel
cabinet of
required gauge and gutter
sizes. Paint the outside
of surface mounted
cabinets to
match the fronts.
' 16471-1
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
D. Provide "dead front" construction of code gauge steel with flush doors, concealed
hinges, and flush cylinder tumbler -type locks. Key all panelboard locks in the
building alike and also key like any existing panelboards where possible.
I
I
E. For surface mounted cabinets, provide fronts of same size as the cabinets. '
F. Provide solid neutral terminal block that is isolated from the cabinet unless used for
a service entrance panelboard.
G. Provide a grounding terminal block that is bonded to the cabinet.
H. Furnish panelboards with either a main breaker (MB) or main lugs only (MLO) as
scheduled on the Drawings.
Provide molded case circuit breakers of quick -make, quick -break,
thermal -magnetic type with trip indication and common trip on all multi -pole
breakers. Handle ties on multi -pole breakers will not be accepted. Where
required, provide the following special breakers:
1. UL labeled "SWD" (switching duty) on breakers used for switching.
2. UL Class A ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) types where ground fault
:protection is required.
3. Current limiting types with test button and interrupting rating of 200;000
amperes RMS symmetrical for use as main breaker for series connected
rating applications.
J. Rate each panelboard in accordance with UL Standard 67 for the integrated
equipment short circuit rating indicated on the panel schedules. Where a
Standard MB or MLO is provided, each branch breaker shall have the required
interrupting capacity (AIC). At the Contractor's option, a current limiting type main
breaker may be provided with lower rated AIC branch breakers as long as the UL
recognized combinations of the series connected interrupting ratings meet the
required integrated equipment short circuit rating indicated on the panel schedules.
Ii
I
I
H
I
I
H
I
I
K. Panelboards shall be equal to Square D type NQOD with circuit breaker types
being Q0, Q1, Q2, Q4, IF, IK, or II as applicable.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Support and identify as specified in "Related Work", Paragraph 1.02 contained
herein.
I
I
[7
16471 -2
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
FUSES
SECTION 16476
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Fuses
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010
B. Section 16170
C. Section 16195
General Electrical Requirements
Disconnect Switches
Electrical Identification
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit Manufacturer's data sheets on each type of fuse proposed for use.
Furnish fuse curves when required for coordination.
B. Furnish three (3) spare fuses of each rating and type installed in the work, and
deliver to Owner upon completion of work. See "Post Construction Submittals."
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 FUSES:
A. For mains, feeders and branch circuits 1/10 through 600 amperes ratings, 250
volts or less, provide Class RK1 fuses equal to Bussman type LPN-RK. Provide
approved fuse holders for control wiring and equipment protection.
B. For mains, feeders and branch circuits 1/10 through 600 amperes ratings, 600
volts, provide Class RK1 fuses equal to Bussman type LPS-RK.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install fuses only after equipment is permanently in place, cleaned, tested, and
ready to be energized.
B. Provide properly sized fuses for all applications. Size motor circuit fuses based on
16476-1
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
SECTION 16484
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Freestanding motor control centers.
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16010
B. Section 16190
C. Section 16195
D. Section 16450
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
General Electrical Requirements
Supporting Devices
Electrical Identification
Grounding
A. Submit manufacturer's data sheets and installation information for all equipment
and accessories.
B. Submit wiring diagrams of all power and control wiring connections.
C. Submit shop drawings indicating unit arrangement and layout.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Approved manufacturers are Siemans, Square D (Model 5) and Cutler Hammer
(Unitrol).
B. Comply with UL -845, NEMA ICS -2-322 and the National Electrical Code.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 SERVICE:
A. Motor control centers shall be suitable for operation for 480 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire,
60 hertz grounded service. Control Centers shall be suitable for connection to an
available fault of 25,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
2.02 STRUCTURE:
16484-1
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
I
A. The motor control center enclosure type shall be in accordance with NEMA
standards for Type 3R enclosures.
B. Vertical sections shall support the horizontal and vertical buses, combination
starter units, covers and doors and shall . be designed to allow for easy
rearrangement of units. Vertical sections shall have structural supporting
members formed of a minimum of 13 gauge hot -rolled steel. The entire assembly
shall be constructed and packaged to withstand all stresses induced in transit and
during installation.
C. Motor control centers shall be designed so that matching vertical sections can be
added later without use of transition sections. Removable end closing plates shall
be provided to close off openings on the end of the motor control center line-up. A
removable top plate shall be provided on each vertical section. The design shall
allow use of the standard conduit entrance area without significant sag or
deformation of the top plate.
D. Vertical sections shall be designed to accommodate plug -on units in front -of -board
construction. Vertical sections housing plug -on units shall be 20 inches wide. Unit
mounting area shall be divided into 1/2 space factor divisions, each approximately
6 inches. NEMA Size 1 and 2 combination starter units shall use. only one: space
factor, or 12 inches, of unit mounting space. Vertical sections shall allow for seven
space factors of unit mounting space. Removable blank platesshall: cover all
unused unit mounting spaces. Blank plates shall be flanged on all four sides and
shall be mounted with captive screws.
2.03 WIREWAYS:
A. Horizontal wireways shall be provided at the bottom of each vertical section and
shall be arranged to provide full length continuity throughout the entire assembly.
Covers for all wireways shall be equipped with captive type screws to prevent loss
of hardware during installation. All wireways shall be isolated from the bus bars.
B. A vertical wire trough shall be located on the right-hand side of each vertical
section and shall extend from the top horizontal wireway to the bottom! of the
available unit mounting space. Each vertical wire trough shall be isolated from the
bus bars. A separately hinged door having captive type screws shall cover the
vertical wire trough to provide access to control wiring without disturbing control
units.
2.04 BUS BARS:
A. A continuous main three conductor horizontal bus shall be provided over the full
16484-2
I. I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
length of the control center. All splice connections shall be made with at least two
bolts and shall employ the use of Belleville washers in the connection. Horizontal
bus bars shall be mounted edgewise and supported by insulated bus supports.
For distribution power from the main horizontal bus to each unit compartment, a
three phase vertical bus shall be provided. The vertical bus shall be firmly bolted
to the horizontal bus for permanent contact.
' B. The main horizontal and vertical buses shall be made of copper and the entire
length shall be electrolytically tin plated.
C. Bus supports shall be formed of high strength glass reinforced alkyd material. Bus
supports and insulators shall be red to indicate proximity of energized bus parts.
D. The main horizontal bus rating shall be a minimum of 600 amperes continuous.
Vertical bus rating shall be a minimum of 300 amperes. Continuous current
ratings shall be in accordance with temperature rise specifications set forth by UL,
ANSI and NEMA standards.
' E. A copper ground lug shall be provided in each incoming line vertical section
capable of accepting a #8 to 250 MCM cable. A horizontal and vertical tin plated
copper ground bus shall be provided in each section of the motor control center.
Horizontal ground bus shall run continuously throughout the control center except
where splits are necessary in which case splice bars shall be provided. Ground
bus shall be tin plated copper and have a cross-sectional area equal to 28 percent
of the main horizontal bus cross-sectional area. Vertical ground bus shall run
parallel to the power distribution bus in each vertical section. Design shall be such
that for any plug -on unit the ground bus stab shall make contact with the ground
bus before the power bus contact is made.
F. Insulated horizontal and vertical bus barriers shall be furnished to reduce the
hazard of accidental contact with the bus.
' 2.05 MAIN INCOMING LUG COMPARTMENTS:
A. A front accessible 600 amp main lug compartment shall be provided with suitable
main lugs. The compartment shall be located in the bottom unit space of the
section to accommodate cables entering the motor control center. The main
incoming lug compartment shall be covered by a hinged door for maintenance
access. This door shall be held closed with captive type screws.
2.06 UNITS:
A. Combination starter units shall consist of full voltage magnetic or solid state "soft
start" starters, adjustable magnetic -only circuit breakers and auxiliary control
16484-3
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
devices, as required and/or shown on the one -line and elementary diagrams. All
auxiliary equipment, except that which is specified for mounting on the door, shall
be mounted within the compartment. All units shall be provided with unit doors,
unit support pans, unit saddles and unit disconnect operators as outlined in this
specification. Each unit compartment shall be enclosed and isolated from
adjacent units, buses and wireways except for openings for conductor entrance
into units. Units shall be designed and constructed so that any fault will be
localized within the compartment. All units shall be UL listed for a minimum of
22,000 amperes RMS symmetrical fault current.
B. Plug -on combination starter units of the same NEMA size and branch feeder units
of the same trip size shall be readily interchangeable with each other.
C. Each unit shall have a door securely mounted with concealed -type hinges for unit
maintenance and withdrawal. Doors shall be fastened to the structure so that they
remain in place when a unit is withdrawn and may be closed to cover the unit
space when the unit has been temporarily removed. Each unit door shall be
interlocked with its disconnect mechanism to prevent the door from opening when
the unit is energized. A defeater mechanism shall be provided for defeating this
interlock by authorized personnel. Removable door panels held with captive type
screws shall be provided on starter unit doors for.mounting push buttons, selector
switches or pilot lights. Blank door panels capable of accepting future pilot devices
shall be furnished when pilot devices are not originally specified for starter units.
Each starter unit door .shall house .an external overload reset button for resetting
the overload relay in the event of tripping. •
D. An operator handle shall be supplied for each breaker. This mechanism shall be
engaged with the breaker at all times regardless of unit door. position to prevent
false circuit indication. Each breaker operator handle shall be color coded to
display red in the "ON" position, yellow in the "TRIPPED" position and black in the
"OFF" position. In the tripped position the external operating mechanism will
assume a neutral or horizontal position with at least 40° of movement from the
"ON" position. The operator handle shall have a conventional up/down motion and
shall be designed so that the down position will indicate the unit is "OFF." It shall
be possible to lock this handle in the "OFF" position with up to three padlocks. The
operator handle shall be interlocked with the unit door to prevent switching the unit
to "ON" while the unit door is open. A defeater mechanism shall be provided for
the purpose of defeating this interlock.
E. Magnetic starters shall be furnished in all combination starter units except 100
horsepower starter shall be solid state "soft state" type. Thermal overload: relays
on starters shall be melting alloy type with heater element permanently joined to
the solder pot. Overload heater units shall be provided in each starter unit.
I
I
L
I
I
I
[I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
F. Molded case circuit breakers shall be furnished in all starter and branch feeder
units using circuit breakers as a disconnect means. All circuit breakers will have a
push -to -trip test feature for testing and exercising the circuit breaker trip
mechanism.
2.07 IDENTIFICATION:
A. A control center identification nameplate with factory identification numbers and
characteristics shall be fastened on each section. These nameplates shall have
suitable references to factory records for efficient communication with supplier.
Each control center unit shall also have an engraved bakelite nameplate fastened
to the outside of the unit door.
2.08 WIRING:
IA. The control center wiring shall be NEMA Class I, Type B. Terminal blocks shall be
conventional track mounted solderless box lug type.
IPART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install equipment on concrete pad and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions:
B. Make provisions for easy installation of future vertical sections as shown.
' C. Install power and control wiring as indicated or required.
U
H
CI
D. Size starters for nameplate motor horsepower.
E. Size overload heaters for running overload protection based on nameplate amps,
motor service factor and ambient temperature.
3.02 TESTING:
A. Perform complete operational testing to verify proper operation of all parts of the
system.
IEND OF SECTION
I
16484-5
I
1
I
1
1
1
I
I
I
1 State of Arkansas
2 79th General Assembly
3 Regular Session, 1993
4 By. Senator Keet
5
As Engrossed: 2/10/93
ACT 2911993
A Bill
SENATE BILL 320
6
7 For An Act To Be Entitled
8 "AN ACT TO REQUIRE THE INCLUSION IN ALL BIDS FOR PUBLIC
9 WORKS PROJECTS A SEPARATE PRICE PAY ITEM FOR TRENCH OR
10 EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEMS; TO INVALIDATE BIDS WHICH DO NOT
11 CONTAIN SUCH PROVISIONS; TO DECLARE AN EMERGENCY; AND FOR
12 OTHER PURPOSES."
13
14 Subtitle
15 "AN ACT TO REQUIRE THE INCLUSION IN ALL BIDS FOR PUBLIC
16 WORKS PROJECTS A SEPARATE PRICE PAY ITEM FOR TRENCH OR
17 EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEMS."
18
19 BE IT ENACTED BY THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY OF.THE STATE OF ARKANSAS:
20
21 SECTION 1. Whenever any agency of this state or of any county,
22 municipality, or school district, or other local taxing unit or improvement
23 district enters into a contract covered by the provisions of Arkansas Code 5$
24 22-9-202 - 22-9-204 for the making of repairs or alterations or the erection
25 of buildings or for the making of any other improvements, or for the
26 construction or improvement of highways, roads, streets, sidewalks, curbs,
27 gutters, drainage or sewer projects, or for any other construction project in
28 which the public work or public improvement construction project involves any
29 trench or excavation which equals or exceeds five (5) feet in depth, the
30 agency, county, municipality, school district, local taxing unit or
31 improvement district shall require:
32 (1) the current edition of Occupational Safety and Health
33 Administration Standard for Excavation and Trenches Safety System, 29 CFR
34 1926, Subpart P, be specifically incorporated into the specifications for the
35 project; and
36 (2) the contract bid form to include a separate pay item for
I
vj1276
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
• 16
17
18
19
• 20
21
As Engrossed: 2/10193 SB 320
trench or excavation safety systems and be included in the base bid.
SECTION 2. In the event a contractor fails to complete a separate pay
item in accordance with the applicable provisions of Section 1 of this act,
the agency, county, municipality, school district, local taxing unit or
improvement district shall declare that the bid fails to comply fully with the
provisions of the specifications and bid documents and will be considered
invalid as a non -responsive bid. The owners of the above stated project shall
notify the State Department of Labor (Safety Division) of the award of,a
contract covered by this act.
SECTION 3. All provisions of this act of general and permanent nature
are amendatory to the Arkansas Codeof 1987 Annotated and the Arkansas Code
Revision Commission shall incorporate. the same in the Code.
'
SECTION 4. If any provisions of. this act or the application thereof to
any person or circumstance is held invalid, the invalidity shall not affect
other provisions or applications,of the act which can be given effect without
the invalid provisions or application, and to this end the provisions of this
act are declared to be. severable.
22 SECTION 5...
23 hereby repealed.
All laws and parts of laws in conflict with this act are '
24 '
25 SECTION 6. Emergency. It is hereby found and determined by the
26 Seventy -Ninth General Assembly of the State of Arkansas that the well-being of
27 Arkansas' craft workers are unnecessarily exposed to the hazards of trench
28 excavation and the immediate passage of this act is necessary in order to
29 protect the health and safety,of the Arkansas worker. Therefore, an emergency
30 is hereby declared to exist, and this act being necessary for the immediate
31 preservation of the public peace, health, and safety, shall be in full force
32 and effect from and after its passage and approval.
33 /s/ Senator Keet
' 34
35
36 AF7
3-1- 2 11276
PT
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
Overview Subpart P
Excavations
P-1. What are the most frequently cited serious * 29 CFR 1926.6510)(2) was deleted by 59 FR 40730,
Excavation violations? (January 1, 1990 to dated August 9, 1994 ( publication of final rule Subpart
' April 1, 1996) M of Part 1926 (Fall Protection)).
29 CFR 1926.652(aXl) (Protection in Excavations) P-2. What are some effective control measures that
.651(k)(1) (Inspections) can used for the serious hazards discussed in P-
' .651(X2) (Loose Rock/Soil) 1?
.651(cX2) (Means of Egress)
.651(d) (Vehicular Traffic) A. The competent person should develop
' .651(k)(2) (Inspections) a check list enumerating the items
.651(h)(1) (Water Accumulation) listed in P-1 and use the list to
.651(jXl)(Loose Rock/Soil) identify and correct unsafe or
651(1X2)*(Walkways/Guardrails) unhealthy conditions that exist on a
' .651(e) (Falling Loads) particular worksite.
.651(IX3) (Adjacent Structures)
.651(1X1)*(Walkways/Guardrails) B. All excavations including trenches
' .652(b) (Sloping/Benching Systems) must be shored or sloped that are 5
.651((I)(1)(Adjacent Structures) feet (1.52 m) in depth, or greater
.652(c) (Design/Protective Systems) (1926.652). For excavations less than
.652(g)(2) (Shield Systems Requirements) 5 feet (1.52 m) in depth, the
.652(g)(1) (Shield Systems/General) competent person examines the
.651 (b)(4) (Underground Installations) excavation for potential cave-in
.651(gXl) (Hazardous Atmospheres) hazards and makes a determination if
.651(a) (Surface Encumbrances) protection is needed
.652(a)(2) (Protective Systems) (1926.652(a)(1)).
I
C'
[]
I
I
I P-1
11
L
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
1926 Subpart P - Excavations
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Worker
Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construction Safety
Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655,
657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR
8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or
1-90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable. Section 1926.651
also issued under 29 CFR Part 1911.
SOURCE: 54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, unless
otherwise noted.
[59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994]
1926.650 - Scope, Application, an d
Definitions Applicable to this Subpart.
(a) Scope and application. This subpart applies to
all open excavations made in the earth's surface.
Excavations are defined to include trenches.
(b) Definitions applicable to this subpart
Accepted engineering practices means those
requirements which are compatible with standards of
practice required by a registered professional
engineer.
Alunrinunr Hydraulic Shoring means a
pre-engineered shoring system comprised of
aluminum hydraulic cylinders (crossbraces) used in
conjunction with vertical rails (uprights) or horizontal
rails (wales). Such system is designed specifically to
support the sidewalls of an excavation and prevent
cave-ins.
Bell-bottom pier hole means a type of shaft or
footing excavation, the bottom of which is made larger
than the cross section above to form a belled shape.
Benching (Benching system) means a method
of protecting employees from cave-ins by excavating
the sides of an excavation to form one or a series of
horizontal levels or steps, usually with vertical or
near -vertical surfaces between levels.
Cave-in means the separation of a mass of soil
or rock material from the side of an excavation, or the
loss of soil from under a trench shield or support
system, and its sudden movement into the excavation,
either by falling or sliding, in sufficient quantity so that
it could entrap, bury, or other wise injure and
immobilize a person.
Conrpetentperson means one who is capable of
identifying existing and predictable hazards in the
surroundings, or working conditions which are
unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and
who has authorization to take prompt corrective
measures to eliminate them.
Cross braces mean the horizontal members of a
shoring system installed perpendicular to the sides of
the excavation, the ends of which bear against either
uprights or wales.
Excavation means any man-made cut, cavity,
trench, or depression in an earth surface, formed by
earth removal.
Faces or sides means the vertical or inclined
earth surfaces formed as a result of excavation work.
Failure means the breakage, displacement, or
permanent deformation of a structural member or
connection so as to reduce its structural integrity and
its supportive capabilities..
Hazardous atmosphere means an atmosphere
which by reason of being explosive, flammable,
poisonous, corrosive, oxidizing, irritating, oxygen
deficient, toxic, or otherwise harmful, may cause death,
illness, or injury.
Kickout means the accidental release or failure
of a cross brace.
C
L
1'
H
1
1
1
H
H
I
i
H
7
1
1
P2 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
I
I
I
I
[I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.650(b)
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
Protedive system means a method of protecting
employees from cave-ins, from material that could fall
or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation,
or from the collapse of adjacent structures. Protective
systems include support systems, sloping and benching
systems, shield systems, and other systems that
provide the necessary protection.
Ramp means an inclined walking or working
surface that is used to gain access to one point from
another, and is constructed from earth or from
structural materials such as steel or wood.
Registered Professional Engineer means a
person who is registered as a professional engineer in
the state where the work is to be performed. However,
a professional engineer, registered in any state is
deemed to be a "registered professional engineer"
within the meaning of this standard when approving
designs for "manufactured protective systems" or
"tabulated data" to be used in interstate commerce.
Sheeting means the members of a shoring
system that retain the earth in position and in turn are
supported by other members of the shoring system.
Shield (Shield system) means a structure that is
able to withstand the forces imposed on it by a cave-in
and thereby protect employees within the structure.
Shields can be permanent structures or can be
designed to be portable and moved along as work
progresses. Additionally, shields can be either
premanufactured or job -built in accordance with
1926.652(c)(3) or (cX4). Shields used in trenches are
usually referred to as "trench boxes" or "trench
shields."
Shoring (Shoring srstenr) means a structure
such as a metal hydraulic, mechanical or timber
shoring system that supports the sides of an excavation
and which is designed to prevent cave-ins.
Sides. See "Faces."
Sloping (Sloping system) means a method of
protecting employees from cave-ins by excavating to
form sides of an excavation that are inclined away from
the excavation so as to prevent cave-ins. The angle of
incline required to prevent a cave-in varies with
differences in such factors as the soil type,
P-3
environmental conditions of exposure, and application
of surcharge loads.
Stable rock means natural solid mineral material
that can be excavated with vertical sides and will
remain intact while exposed. Unstable rock is
considered to be stable when the rock material on the
side or sides of the excavation is secured against
caving -in or movement by rock bolts or by another
protective system that has been designed by a
registered professional engineer.
Structural ramp means a ramp built of steel or
wood, usually used for vehicle access. Ramps made of
soil or rock are not considered structural ramps.
Support system means a structure such as
underpinning, bracing, or shoring, which provides
support to an adjacent structure, underground
installation, or the sides of an excavation.
Tabulated data means tables and charts
approved by a registered professional engineer and
used to design and construct a protective system.
Trench (Trench excavation) means a narrow
excavation (in relation to its length) made below the
surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater
than the width, but the width of a trench (measured at
the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet (4.6 m). If
forms or other structures are installed or constructed in
anexcavation so as to reduce the dimension measured
from the forms or structure to the side of the
excavation to 15 feet (4.6 m) or less (measured at the
bottom of the excavation), the excavation is also
considered to be a trench.
Trench box See "Shield."
Trench shield See "Shield."
Uprights means the vertical members of a
trench shoring system placed in contact with the earth
and usually positioned so that individual members do
not contact each other. Uprights placed so that
individual members are closely spaced, in contact with
or interconnected to each other, are often called
"sheeting."
Wales means horizontal members of a shoring
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.650(b)
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
system placed parallel to the excavation face whose
sides bear against the vertical members of the shoring
system or earth.
1926.651- General Requirements.
(a) Surface encumbrances. All surface
encumbrances that are located so as to create a hazard
to employees shall be removed or supported, as
necessary, to safeguard employees.
(b) Underground installations.
(1) The estimated location of utility
installations, such as sewer, telephone, fuel,
electric, water lines, or any other underground
installations that reasonably may be expected to
be encountered during excavation work, shall be
determined prior to opening an excavation.
(2) Utility companies or owners shall be
contacted within established or customary local
response times, advised of the proposed work,
and asked to establish the location of the utility
underground installations prior to the start of
actual excavation. When utility companies or
owners cannot respond to a request to locate
underground utility installations within 24 hours
(unless a longer period is required by state or
local law), or cannot establish the exact location
of these installations,the employer may proceed,
provided the employer does so with caution, and
provided detection equipment or other
acceptable means to locate utility installations
are used.
(3) When excavation operations approach the
estimated location of underground installations,
the exact location of the installations shall be
determined by safe and acceptable means.
(4) While the excavation is open,
underground installations shall be protected,
supported or removed as necessary to safeguard
employees.
(c) Access and egress -
(1) Structural ramps.
(i) Structural ramps that are used
solely by employees as a means of access
or egress from excavations shall be
designed by a competent person.
Structural ramps used for access or
egress of equipment shall be designed by
a competent person qualified in structural
design, and shall be constructed in
accordance with the design.
(ii) Ramps and runways constructed of
two or more structural members shall
have the structural members connected
together to prevent displacement.
(iii) Structural members used for ramps
and runways shall be of uniform
thickness.
(iv) Cleats or other appropriate means
used to connect runway structural
members shall be attached to the bottom
of the runway or shall be attached in a
manner to prevent tripping.
(v) Structural ramps used in lieu of
steps shall be provided with cleats or
other surface treatments o the top surface
to prevent slipping. '
(2) Means of egress from trench
excavations. A stairway, ladder, ramp or other
safe means of egress shall be located in trench
excavations that are 4 feet (1.22 in) or more in
depth so as to require no more than 25 feet
(7.62 m) of lateral travel for employees.
(d) Exposure to vehicular traffic. Employees
exposed to public vehicular traffic shall be provided
with, and shall wear, warning vests or other suitable
garments marked with or made of reflectorized or
high -visibility material.
(c) Exposure to falling loads. No employee shall
be permitted underneath loads handled by lifting or
digging equipment. Employees shall be required to
stand away from any vehicle being loaded or unloaded
to avoid being struck by any spillage or falling
I
El
I
I
El
I
I
El
I
I
I
P-4 I
I
I
I
I
II
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.651(c)
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
materials. Operators may remain in the cabs of
vehicles being loaded or unloaded when the vehicles
are equipped, in accordance with 1926.601(b)(6), to
provide adequate protection for the operator during
loading and unloading operations.
(t) Warning system for mobile equipment. When
mobile equipment is operated adjacent to an
excavation, or when such equipment is required to
approach the edge of an excavation, and the operator
does not have a clear and direct view of the edge of the
excavation, a warning system shall be utilized such as
barricades, hand or mechanical signals, or stop logs. If
possible, the grade should be away from the
excavation.
' (g) Hazardous atmospheres -
(1) Testing and controls. In addition to the
' requirements set forth in subparts D and E of
this part (29 CFR 1926.50 - 1926.107) to
prevent exposure to harmful levels of
' atmospheric contaminants and to assure
acceptable atmospheric conditions, the
following requirements shall apply:
IC') Where oxygen deficiency
(atmospheres containing less than 195
percent oxygen) or a hazardous
' atmosphere exists or could reasonably be
expected to exist, such as in excavations
in landfill areas or excavations in areas
where hazardous substances are stored
' nearby, the atmospheres in the excavation
shall be tested before employees enter
excavations greater than 4 feet (1.22 m)
' in depth.
01) Adequate precautions shall be
taken to prevent employee exposure to
' atmospheres containing less than 19.5
percent oxygen and other hazardous
atmospheres. These precautions include
' providing proper respiratory protection
or ventilation in accordance with subparts
D and E of this part respectively.
(I.iii) Adequate precaution shall be taken
such as providing ventilation, to prevent
employee exposure to an atmosphere
P-5
containing a concentration of a
flammable gas in excess of 20 percent of
the lower flammable limit of the gas.
(iv) When controls are used that are
intended to reduce the level of
atmospheric contaminants to acceptable
levels, testing shall be conducted as often
as necessary to ensure that the
atmosphere remains safe.
(2) Emergency rescue equipment
(i) Emergency rescue equipment, such
as breathing apparatus, a safety harness
and line, or a basket stretcher, shall be
readily available where hazardous
atmospheric conditions exist or may
reasonably be expected to develop during
work in an excavation. This equipment
shall be attended when in use.
(ii) Employees entering bell-bottom
pier holes, or other similar deep and
confined footing excavations, shall wear
a harness with a lifeline securely attached
to it. The lifeline shall be separate from
any line used to handle materials, and
shall be individually attended at all times
while the employee wearing the lifeline is
in the excavation.
(h) Protection from hazards associated with water
accumulation.
(1) Employees shall not work in excavations
in which there is accumulated water, or in
excavations in which water is accumulating,
unless adequate precautions have been taken to
protect employees against the hazards posed by
water accumulation. The precautions necessary
to protect employees adequately vary with each
situation, but could include special support or
shield systems to protect from cave-ins, water
removal to control the level of accumulating
water, or use of a safety harness and lifeline.
(2) If water is controlled or prevented from
accumulating by the use of water removal
equipment, the water removal equipment and
H
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.651(h)(2)
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
operations shall be monitored by a competent
person to ensure proper operation.
(3) If excavation work interrupts the natural
drainage of surface water (such as streams),
diversion ditches, dikes, or other suitable means
shall be used to prevent surface water from
entering the excavation and to provide adequate
drainage of the area adjacent to the excavation.
Excavations subject to runoff from heavy rains
will require an inspection by a competent
person and compliance with paragraphs (h)(1)
and (h)(2) of this section.
(i) Stability of adjacent structures.
(1) Where the stability of adjoining buildings,
walls, or other. structures is endangered by
excavation operations, support systems such as
shoring, bracing, or underpinning shall be
provided to ensure the stability of such
structures for the protection of employees.
(2) Excavation below the level of the base or
footing of any foundation or retaining wall that
could be reasonably expected to pose a hazard
to employees shall not be permitted except
when:
(i) A support system, such as
underpinning, is provided to ensure the
safety of employees and the stability of
the structure; or
(ii) The excavation is in stable rock; or
(iii) A registered professional engineer
has approved the determination that the
structure is sufficiently removed from the
excavation so as to be unaffected by the
excavation activity; or
(iv) A registered professional engineer
has approved the determination that such
excavation work will not pose a hazard to
employees.
(3) Sidewalks, pavements and appurtenant
structure shall not be undermined unless a
support system or another method of protection
is provided to protect employees from the
possible collapse of such structures.
(j) Protection of employees front loose rock or
soil
(1) Adequate protection shall be provided to
protect employees from loose rock or soil that
could pose a hazard by falling or rolling from an
excavation face. Such protection shall consist of
scaling to remove loose material; installation of
protective barricades at intervals as necessary
on the face to stop and contain falling material;
or other means. that provide equivalent
protection.
(2) Employees shall be protected from
excavated or other materials or equipment that
could pose a hazard by falling or rolling into
excavations. Protection shall be provided by
placing and keeping such materials or
equipment at least 2 feet (.61 m) from the edge
of excavations, or by the use of retaining devices
that are sufficient to prevent materials or
equipment from falling or rolling into
excavations, or by a combination of both if
necessary.
(k) Inspections.
(1) Daily inspections of excavations, the
adjacent areas, and protective systems shall be
made by a competent person for evidence of a
situation that could result in possible cave-ins,
indications of failure of protective systems,
hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous
conditions. An inspection shall be conducted by
the competent person prior to the start of work
and as needed throughout the shift. Inspections
shall also be made after every rainstorm or other
hazard increasing occurrence. These inspections
are only required when employee exposure can
be reasonably anticipated.
(2) Where the competent person finds
evidence of a situation that could result in a
possible cave-in, indications of failure of
protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or
other hazardous conditions, exposed employees
shall be removed from the hazardous area until
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
P-6 I
H
H
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.651(k)(2)
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
the necessary precautions have been taken to
ensure their safety.
' (1) Fall protection.
' (1) Walkways shall be provided where
employees or equipment are required or
permitted to cross over excavations. Gurardrails
which comply with 1926.502(b) shall be
' provided where walkways are 6 feet (1.8 m) or
more above lower levels.
' (2) Adequate barrier physical protection shall
be provided at all remotely located excavations.
All wells, pits, shafts, etc., shall be barricaded
or covered. Upon completion of exploration and
' other similar operations, temporary wells, pits,
shafts, etc., shall be backfilled.
' [54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, as amended by 59 FR
40730, Aug 9, 1994]
I
[1
LII
1926.652 - Requirements for Protectiv e
Systems.
(a) Protection of employees in excavations.
(1) Each employee in an excavation shall be
protected from cave-ins by an adequate
protective system designed in accordance with
paragraph (b) or (c) of this section except when:
' (i) Excavations are made entirely in
stable rock; or
(ii) Excavations are less than 5 feet
' (1.52 m) in depth and examination of the
ground by a competent person provides
no indication of a potential cave-in.
(2) Protective systems shall have the capacity
to resist without failure all loads that are
intended or could reasonably be expected to be
' applied or transmitted to the system.
(b) Design of sloping and benching systems. The
1
p-7
slopes and configurations of sloping and benching
systems shall be selected and constructed by the
employer or his designee and shall be in accordance
with the requirements of paragraph (b)(1); or, in the
alternative, paragraph (b)(2); or, in the alternative,
paragraph (b)(3); or, in the alternative, paragraph
(b)(4), as follows:
(1) Option (1) -Allowable configurations
and slopes.
(i) Excavations shall be sloped at an
angle not steeper than one and one-half
horizontal to one vertical (34 degrees
measured from the horizontal), unless the
employer uses one of the other options
listed below.
(ii) Slopes specified in paragraph
(b)(1)(i) of this section, shall be
excavated to form configurations that are
in accordance with the slopes shown for
Type C soil in Appendix B to this
subpart.
(2) Option (2) - Determination of slopes
and configurations using Appendices A and
B. Maximum allowable slopes, and allowable
configurations for sloping and benching
systems, shall be determined in accordance with
the conditions and requirements set forth in
appendices A and B to this subpart
(3) Option (3) - Designs using other
tabulated data.
(i) Designs of sloping or benching
systems shall be selected from and in
accordance with tabulated data, such as
tables and charts.
(ii) The tabulated data shall be in
written form and shall include all of the
following:
(A) Identification . of the
parameters that affect the selection
of a sloping or benching system
drawn from such data;
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.652(b)(3)(ii)(B)
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
(B) Identification of the limits of
use of the data, to include the
magnitude and configuration of
slopes determined to be safe;
(C) Explanatory information as
may be necessary to aid the user in
making a correct selection of a
protective system from the data.
(iii) At least one copy of the tabulated
data which identifies the registered
professional engineer who approved the
data,' shall be maintained at the jobsite
during construction of the protective
system. After that time the data may be
• stored off the jobsite, but a copy of the
data shall be made available to the
• Secretary upon request.
(4) Option (4) - Design by a registered
professional engineer.
(i) Sloping and benching systems not
utilizing Option (1) or Option (2) or
Option (3) under paragraph (b) of this
section shall be approved by a registered
professional engineer.
(ii) Designs shall be in written form
and shall include at least the following:
(A) The magnitude of the slopes
that were determined to be safe for
the particular project;
(B) The configurations that
were determined to be safe for the
particular project;
(C) The identity of the
registered professional engineer
approving the design:
(iii) At least one copy of the design
shall be maintained at the jobsite while
the slope is being constructed. After that
time the design need not be at the jobsite,
but a copy shall be made available to the
Secretary upon request.
(c) Design ofsupport systems, shiehl systems, and
other protective systems. Designs of support systems
, shield systems, and other protective systems shall be
selected and constructed by the employer or his
designee and shall be in accordance with the
requirements of paragraph (c)(l); or, in the alternative,
paragraph (c)(2); or, in the alternative, paragraph
(cx3); or, i the alternative, paragraph (c)(4) as follows:
1
(1) Option (1) - Designs using appendices
A, C and D. Designs for timber shoring in
trenches shall be determined in accordance with
the conditions and requirements set forth in
appendices A and C to this subpart. Designs for
aluminum hydraulic shoring shall be in
accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this
section, but if manufacturer's tabulated data
cannot be utilized, designs shall be in
accordance with appendix D.
(2) Option .(2) - Designs Using
Manufacturer's Tabulated Data.
(1) Design of support systems, shield
systems, or other protective systems that
are drawn from manufacturers tabulated
data shall be in accordance with all
specifications, recommendations, and
limitations issued or made by the
manufacturer.
(ii) Deviation from the specifications,
recommendations, and limitations issued
or made by the manufacturer shall only
be allowed after the manufacturer issues
specific written approval.
(iii) Manufacturers specifications,
recommendations, and limitations, and
manufacturer's approval to deviate from
the specifications, recommendations, and
limitations shall be in written form at the
jobsite during construction of the
protective system. After that time this
data may be stored off the jobsite, but a
copy shall be made available to the
Secretary upon request.
I
7
I
I
H
H
I
I
I
I
I
(3) Option (3) - Designs using other
tabulated data. -
11
L
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.652(c)(3) (i)
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
(B) The identify of the
IC') Designs of support systems, shield registered professional engineer
systems, or other protective systems shall approving the design.
be selected from and be in accordance
with tabulated data, such as tables and (iii) At least one copy of the design
' charts. shall be maintained at the jobsite during
construction of the protective system.
(ii) The tabulated data shall be in After that time, the design may be stored
written form and include all of the off the jobsite, but a copy of the design
' following: shall be made available to the Secretary
upon request
(A) Identification of the
parameters that affect the selection (d) Materials and equipment
of a protective system drawn from
such data; (1) Materials and equipment used for
' protective systems shall be free from damage or
(B) Identification of the limits of defects that might impair their proper function.
use of the data;
(2) Manufactured materials and equipment
1 (C) Explanatory information as used for protective systems shall be used and
may be necessary to aid the user in maintained in a manner that is consistent with
making a correct selection of a the recommendations of the manufacturer, and
t protective system from the data. in a manner that will prevent employee
exposure to hazards.
(ui) At least one copy of the tabulated
data, which identifies the registered (3) When material or equipment that is used
' professional engineer who approved the for protective systems is damaged, a competent
data, shall be maintained at the jobsite person shall examine the material or equipment
during construction of the protective and evaluate its suitability for continued use. If
I system. After that time the data may be the competent person cannot assure the material
stored off the jobsite, but a copy of the or equipment is able to support the intended
data shall be made available to the loads or is otherwise suitable for safe use, then
Secretary upon request. such material or equipment shall be removed
' from service, and shall be evaluated and
(4) Option (4) - Design by a registered approved by a registered professional engineer
professional engineer, before being returned to service.
(i) Support systems, shield systems, (e) Installation and removal of support -
and other protective systems not utilizing
Option 1, Option 2 or Option 3, above, (1) General
shall be approved by a registered
professional engineer. (i) Members of support systems shall
be securely connected together to prevent
' (ii) Designs shall be in written form sliding, falling, kickouts, or other
and shall include the following: predictable failure.
(A) A plan indicating the sizes, (ii) Support systems shall be installed
' types, and configurations of the and removed in a manner that protects
materials to be used in the employees from cave-ins, structural
protective system; and collapses, or from being struck by
P-9
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.652(c)(1)(iii)
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
members of the support system. (g) Shield systems -
(iii) Individual members of support
systems shall not be subjected to loads
exceeding those which those members
were designed to withstand.
(iv) Before temporary removal of
individualmembers begins, additional
precautions shall be taken to ensure the
safety of employees, such as installing
other structural members to carry the
loads imposed on the support system.
(v) Removal shall begin at, and
progress from, the bottom of the
excavation. Members shall be released
slowly so as to note any indication of
possible failure of the remaining
members of the structure or possible
cave-in of the sides of the excavation.
(vi) Backfilling shall progress together
with the removal of support systems from
excavations.
(2) Additional requirements for support
systems for trench excavations.
(i) Excavation of material to a level
no greater than 2 feed (.61 m) below the
bottom of the members of a support
system shall be permitted, but only if the
system is designed to resist the forces
calculated for the full depth of the trench,
and there are no indications while the
trench is open of a possible loss of soil
from behind or below the bottom of the
support system.
(ii) Installation of a support system
shall be closely coordinated with the
excavation of trenches.
(f) Sloping and benching systems. Employees
shall not be permitted to work on the faces of sloped or
benched excavations at levels above other employees
except when employees at the lower levels are
adequately protected from the hazard of falling, rolling,
or sliding material or equipment.
P-10
(1) GeneraL
(i) Shield systems shall not be
subjected to loads exceeding those which
the system was designed to withstand. ,
(II) Shields shall be installed in a
manner to restrict lateral or other
hazardous movement of the shield in the
event of the application of sudden lateral
loads.
(iii) Employees shall be protected from '
the hazard of cave-ins when entering or
exiting the areas protected by shields.
(iv) Employees shall not be allowed in
shields when shields are being installed,
removed, or moved vertically. '
(2) Additional requirement for shield
systems used in trench excavations.
Excavations of earth material to a level not
greater than 2 feet (.61 m) below the bottom of
a shield shall be permitted, but only if the shield
is designed to resist the forces calculated for the
full depth of the trench, and there are no
indications while the trench is open of a possible
loss of soil from behind or below the bottom of
the shield.
I
71
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LI
I
I
I
I
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTI; 1926 Subpart P App A
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
1926 Subpart P App A - S oil Classification
(a) Scope and application -
(1) Scope. This appendix describes a method
of classifying soil and rock deposits based on
site and environmental conditions, and on the
structure and composition of the earth deposits.
The appendix contains definitions, sets forth
requirements, and describes acceptable visual
and manual tests for use in classifying soils.
(2) Application. This appendix applies when
a sloping or benching system is designed
in accordance with the requirements set forth in
1926,652(b)(2) as a method of protection for
employees from cave-ins. This appendix also applies
when timber shoring for excavations is designed as a
method of protection from cave-ins in accordance with
appendix C to subpart P of part 1926, and when
aluminum hydraulic shoring is designed in accordance
with appendix D. This Appendix also applies if other
protective systems are designed and selected for use
from data prepared in accordance with the
requirements set forth in 1926.652(c), and the use of
the data is predicated on the use of the soil
classification system set forth in this appendix.
(b) Definitions. The definitions and examples given
below are based on, in whole or in part, the following;
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
Standards D653-85 and D2488; The Unified Soils
Classification System; The U.S. Department of
Agriculture (USDA) Textural Classification Scheme;
and The National Bureau of Standards Report
BSS -121.
Cemented soil means a soil in which the
particles are held together by a chemical agent, such as
calcium carbonate, such that a hand -size sample cannot
be crushed into powder or individual soil particles by
finger pressure.
Cohesive soil means clay (fine grained soil), or
soil with a high clay content, which has cohesive
strength. Cohesive soil does not crumble, can be
excavated with vertical sideslopes, and is plastic when
P-11
moist. Cohesive soil is hard to break up when dry, and
exhibits significant
cohesion when submerged. Cohesive soils include
clayey silt, sandy clay, silty clay, clay and organic clay.
Dry soil means soil that does not exhibit visible
signs of moisture content.
Fissured means a soil material that has a
tendency to break along definite planes of fracture with
little resistance, or a material that exhibits open
cracks, such as tension cracks, in an exposed surface.
Granular soil means gravel, sand, or silt (coarse
grained soil) with little or no clay content. Granular
soil has no cohesive strength. Some moist granular
soils exhibit apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot
be molded when moist and crumbles easily when dry.
Layered system means two or more distinctly
different soil or rock types arranged in layers.
Micaceous seams or weakened planes in rock or shale
are considered layered.
Moist soil means a condition in which a soil
looks and feels damp. Moist cohesive soil can easily
be shaped into a ball and rolled into small diameter
threads before crumbling. Moist granular soil that
contains some cohesive material will exhibit signs of
cohesion between particles.
Plastic means a property of a soil which allows
the soil to be deformed or molded without cracking, or
appreciable volume change.
Saturated soil means a soil in which the voids
are filled with water.
Saturation] oes not require flow. Saturation, or
near saturation, is necessary for the proper use of
instruments such as a pocket penetrometenn or sheer
vane.
Soil classification system means, for the
purpose of this subpart, a method of categorizing soil
and rock deposits in a hierarchy of Stable Rock, Type
A, Type B, and Type C, in decreasing order of
stability. The categories are determined based on an
analysis of the properties and performance
characteristics of the deposits and the characteristics of
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App A
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
the deposits and the environmental conditions of
exposure.
• Stable rock means natural solid mineral matter
that can be excavated with vertical sides and remain
intact while exposed.
Submerged soil means soil which is underwater
or is free seeping.
Type A means cohesive soils with an
unconfined, compressive strength of 1.5 ton per square
foot (tsf) (144 kPa) or greater. Examples of cohesive
soils are: clay, silty clay, sandy clay, clay loam and, in
some cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam.
Cemented soils such as caliche and hardpan are also
considered Type A. However, no soil is Type A if:
(i) The soil is fissured; or
(-u') The soil is subject to vibration from
heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects; or
(iii) The soil has been previously disturbed;
(iv) The soil is part of a sloped, layered
system where the layers dip into the excavation
on a slope of, four horizontal to one vertical
(4H:1 V) or greater; or
(v) The material is subject to other factors
that would require it to be classified as a less
stable material.
Type B means:
(i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined
compressive strength greater than 0.5 tsf (48
kPa) but less than 1.5 tsf (144 kPa); or
Wet soil means soil that contains significantly
(ii) Granular cohesionless soils including: more moisture than moist soil, but in such a range of
angular gravel (similar to crushed rock), silt, silt values that cohesive material will slump or begin to
loam, sandy loam and, in some cases, silty clay flow when vibrated. Granular material that would
loam and sandy clay loam, exhibit cohesive properties when moist will lose those
cohesive properties when wet.
(iii) Previously disturbed soils except those
which would otherwise be classed as Type C (c) Requirements -
soil.
(iv) Soil that meets the unconfined
compressive strength or cementation
requirements for Type A, but is fissured or
subject to vibration; or
(v) Dry rock that is not stable; or
(vi) Material that is part of a sloped, layered
system where the layers dip into the excavation
on a slope less steep than four horizontal to one
vertical (4H: IV), but only if the material would
otherwise be classified as Type B.
Type C means:
(i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined
compressive strength of 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) or less;
or
(ii) Granular soils including gravel, sand, and
loamy sand; or
(iii) Submerged soil or soil from which water
is freely seeping; or
(iv) Submerged rock that is not stable, or
(v) Material in a sloped, layered system
where the layers dip into the excavation or a
slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H: IV)
or steeper.
Unconfined compressive strength means the
load per unit area at which a soil will fail in
compression. It can be determined by laboratory
testing, or estimated in the field using a pocket
penetrometer, by thumb penetration tests, and other
methods.
(1) Classrficatian of soil and rock deposits.
P-12
I
I
L_
I
I
11
I
1]
I
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App A
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
I
I
I
Li
I
I
(3) Visual and manual analyses. The visual
' and manual analyses, such as those noted as
being acceptable in paragraph (d) of this
appendix, shall be designed and conducted to
provide sufficient quantitative and qualitative
' information as may be necessary to identify
properly the properties, factors, and conditions
affecting the classification of the deposits.
' (4) Layered systems. In a layered system, the
system shall be classified in accordance with its
weakest layer. However, each layer may be
' classified individually where a more stable layer
lies under a less stable layer.
I(S) Reclassfcation. If, after classifying a
deposit, the properties, factors, or conditions
affecting its classification change in any way, the
' changes shall be evaluated by a competent
person. The deposit shall be reclassified as
necessary to reflect the changed circumstances.
Each soil and rock deposit shall be classified by
a competent person as Stable Rock, Type A,
Type B, or Type C in accordance with the
definitions set forth in paragraph (b) of this
appendix.
(2) Basis ofclassifeation. The classification
of the deposits shall be made based on the
results of at least one visual and at least one
manual analysis. Such analyses shall be
conducted by a competent person using tests
described in paragraph (d) below, or in other
recognized methods of soil classification and
testing such as those adopted by the American
Society for Testing Materials, or the U.S.
Department of Agriculture textural classification
system.
I
H
I
H
(d) Acceptable visual and manual tests. -
(1) Visualtests. Visual analysis is conducted
to determine qualitative information regarding
the excavation site in general, the soil adjacent
to the excavation, the soil forming the sides of
the open excavation, and the soil taken as
samples from excavated material.
(i) Observe samples of soil that are
P-13
excavated and soil in the sides of the
excavation. Estimate the range of particle
sizes and the relative amounts of the
particle sizes. Soil that is primarily
composed of fine-grained material
material is cohesive material. Soil
composed primarily of coarse -grained
sand or gravel is granular material.
(ii) Observe soil as it is excavated.
Soil that remains in clumps when
excavated is cohesive. Soil that breaks up
easily and does not stay in clumps is
granular.
(iii) Observe the side of the opened
excavation and the surface area adjacent
to the excavation. Crack -like openings
such as tension cracks could indicate
fissured material. If chunks of soil spall
off a vertical side, the soil could be
fissured. Small spalls are evidence of
moving ground and are indications of
potentially hazardous situations.
(iv) Observe the area adjacent to the
excavation and the excavation itself for
evidence of existing utility and other
underground structures, and to identify
previously disturbed soil.
(v) Observed the opened side of the
excavation to identify layered systems.
Examine layered systems to identify if the
layers slope toward the excavation.
Estimate the degree of slope of the layers.
(vi) Observe the area adjacent to the
excavation and the sides of the opened
excavation for evidence of surface water,
water seeping from the sides of the
excavation, or the location of the level of
the water table.
(vii) Observe the area adjacent to the
excavation and the area within the
excavation for sources of vibration that
may affect the stability of the excavation
face.
r
r
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App A
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
(2) Manual tests. Manual analysis of soil pressure. This test should be conducted
samples is conducted to determine quantitative on an undisturbed soil sample, such as a
as well as qualitative properties of soil and to large clump of spoil, as soon as
provide more information in order to classify practicable after excavation to keep to a
soil properly. minimum the effects of exposure to
drying influences. If the excavation is
(i) Plasticity. Mold a moist or wet later exposed to wetting influences (rain,
sample of soil into a ball and attempt to flooding), the classification of the soil
roll it into threads as thin as 1/8 -inch in must be changed accordingly.
diameter. Cohesive material can be
successfully rolled into threads without (iv) Other strength tests. Estimates of
crumbling. For example, if at least a two unconfined compressive strength of soils
inch (50 mm) length of 1/8 -inch thread can also be obtained by use of a pocket
can be held on one end without tearing, - penetrometer or by using a hand -operated
the soil is cohesive. shearvane.
C
I
C
C
(u) Dry strength. If the soil is dry and -
(v) Drying test The basic purpose of
crumbles on its own or with moderate
the drying test is to differentiate between
pressure into individual grains or fine
cohesive material with fissures,
powder, it is granulai (any combination
unfissured cohesive material, and
of gravel, sand, or silt). If the soil is dry
granular material. The procedure for the
and falls into clumps which break up into -
drying test involves drying a sample of
smaller clumps, but the smaller clumps
soil that is approximately one inch thick
can only be broken up with difficulty, it
(2.54 cm) and six inches (15,24 cm) in
may be clay in any combination with
diameter until it is thoroughly dry:
gravel, sand or silt. If the dry soil breaks
into clumps which do not break up into
(A) If the sample develops
small clumps and which can only be
cracks as it dries, significant
broken with difficulty, and there is no
fissures are indicated.
visual indication the soil is fissured, the
soil may be considered unfissured.
(B) Samples that dry without
cracking are to be broken by hand.
(iii) Thumb penetration. The thumb
If considerable force is necessary
penetration test can be used to estimate
to break a sample, the soil has
the unconfined compressive strength of -
significant cohesive material
cohesive soils. (This test is based on the
content The soil can be classified
thumb penetration test described in
as an unfissured cohesive material
American Society for Testing and
and the unconfined compressive
Materials (ASTM) Standard designation
strength should be determined.
D2488 - "Standard Recommended
Practice for Description of Soils (Visual
- (C) If a sample breaks easily by
-Manual Procedure).") Type A soils with
hand, it is either a fissured
an unconfined compressive strength of
cohesive material or a granular
1.5 tsf can be readily indented by the
material. To distinguish between
thumb; however, they can be penetrated
the two, pulverize the dried
by the thumb only with very great effort.
clumps of the sample by hand or
Type C soils with an unconfined
by stepping on them. If the clumps
compressive strength of 0.5 tsf can be .
do not pulverize easily, the
easily penetrated several inches by the
material is cohesive with fissures.
thumb, and can be molded by light finger
If they pulverize easily into very
P-14
CI
U
I
[H
L
I
I
rl
1l
I
C
I
J
I
I
H
H
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App B
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
small fragments, the material is
granular.
1926 Subpart P App B - Sloping an d
Benching.
(a) Scope and application. This appendix contains
specifications for sloping and benching when used as
methods of protecting employees working in
excavations from cave-ins. The requirements of this
appendix apply when the design of sloping and
benching protective systems is to be performed in
accordance with the requirements set forth in
1926.652(b)(2).
(b) Definitions.
Actual slope means the slope to which an
excavation face is excavated.
Distress means that the soil is in a condition
where a cave-in is imminent or is likely to occur.
Distress is evidenced by such phenomena as the
development of fissures in the face of or adjacent to an
open excavation; the subsidence of the edge of an
excavation; the slumping of material from the face or
the bulging or heaving of material from the bottom of
an excavation; the spalling of material from the face of
an excavation; and ravelling, i.e., small amounts of
material such as pebbles or little clumps of material
suddenly separating from the face of an excavation and
trickling or rolling down into the excavation.
Maximum allowable slope means the steepest
incline of an excavation face that is acceptable for the
most favorable site conditions as protection against
cave-ins, and is expressed as the ratio of horizontal
distance to vertical rise (H:V).
Short tern, exposure means a period of time
less than or equal to 24 hours that an excavation is
open.
(c) Requirements -
(1) Soil classifuation. Soil and rock deposits
shall be classified in accordance with appendix
P-15
A to subpartP of part 1926.
(2) Maximum allowable slope. The
maximum allowable slope for a soil or rock
deposit shall be determined from Table B -I of
this appendix.
(3) Actual slope.
(1) The actual slope shall not be
steeper than the maximum allowable
slope.
(ii) The actual slope shall be less steep
than the maximum allowable slope, when
there are signs of distress. If that situation
occurs, the slope shall be cut back to an
actual slope which is at least 1/2
horizontal to one vertical (1/2H:1 V) less
steep than the maximum allowable slope.
(iii) When surcharge loads from stored
material or equipment, operating
equipment, or traffic are present, a
competent person shall determine the
degree to which the actual slope must be
reduced below the maximum allowable
slope, and shall assure that such
reduction is achieved. Surcharge loads
from adjacent structures shall be
evaluated in accordance with
1926.651(i).
(4) Configurations. Configurations of
sloping and benching systems shall be in
accordance with Figure B -I.
H
L
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App B
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
TABLE B-1
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SLOPES
SOIL OR ROCK TYPE
STABLE ROCK
TYPE A (2)
TYPE B
TYPE C
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SLOPES (H:V)(1) FOR
EXCAVATIONS LESS THAN 20 FEET DEEP(3)
VERTICAL (90 Deg.)
3/4:1 (53 Deg.)
1:1 (45 Deg.)
1 1/2:1 (34 Deg.)
[[
L
L
LEI
NOTE:
1. Numbers shown in parentheses next to maximum allowable slopes are angles
expressed in degrees from the horizontal. Angles have been rounded off. '
i
2. A short-term maximum allowable slope of 1/2H:1V (63 degrees) is allowed
in excavations in Type A soil that are 12 feed (3.67 m) or less in depth.
Short-term maximum allowable slopes for excavations greater than 12 feet
(3.67 m) in depth shall be 3/4H:1V (53 degrees).
3. Sloping or benching for excavations greater than 20 feet deep shall be
designed by a registered professional engineer.
FigureB-1
Slope Configurations
(All Slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio)
B-1.1 Excavations made in Type A soil.
1. All simple slope excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3/4:1.
L_
L
L
7
Li
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App B
' REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
• Th- -_ _ 7-
20' 1V1 ax.
1
3/4
1
I
Li
I
I
I
I
I
I
H
I
I
SIMPLE SLOPE - GENERAL
Exception: Simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which are 12 feet or less
in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 12:1.
12' Max.
SIMPLE SLOPE - SHORT TERM
2. All benched excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3/4 to I and
maximum bench dimensions as follows:
20' Max.
4 Max.
P-17
H
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App B
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
SIMPLE BENCH
n
20 Max. �� I
Max. i 3/4
4' Max.
MULTIPLE BENCH
3. All excavations 8 feet or less in depth which have unsupported vertically sided lower portions shall have
a maximum vertical side of 3 1/2 feet.
8' Ni ax.
A 1
3/4
3 l/2' IVI ax.
UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION - MAXIMUM 8 FEET IN DEPTH
All excavations more than 8 feet but not more than 12 feet in depth which unsupported vertically sided lower
portions shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and maximum vertical side of 3 1/2 feet.
12' Max. \
312' Max.
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App B
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION - MAXIMUM 12 FEET IN DEPTH
All excavation 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions that are supported or shielded
shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3/4:1. The support or shield sustem must extend at least 18 inches above the
top of the vertical side.
•al side
SUPPORTED OR SHIELDED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION
4. All other simple slope, compound slope, and vertically sided lower portion excavations shall be in
accordance with the other options permitted under sec. 1926.652(b).
B-1.2 Excavations Made in Type B Soil
I. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a miximum allable slope of 1:1.
200 M nx.
P
1
SIMPLE SLOPE
2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a mixmum allable slope of 1:1 and
maximum bench dimensions as follows:
P-19
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH - 1926 Subpart P App B
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
This bench allowed in cohesive soil only.
20' Max.
4'
Max
SINGLE BENCH
This bench allowed in cohesive soil only
20' Max. I
4' '
Mex. 0
---- 4'Max.
I
1
MULTIPLE BENCH
3. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or
supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such excavations shall have a
maximum allowable slope of 1:1.
4 -
Support or shield system
20' Max.
18" Min.
Total height of vertical side
P-20
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App B
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION
4. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in 1926.652(b).
B- 1.3 Excavations Made in Type C Soil
1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1 1/2:1.
20' Max.
1 1/2
SIMPLE
SLOPE
2. All excavation 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or
supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such excavations shall have a
maximum allowable slope of 1 1/2:1.
Support or shield system
20' Max. 1 1/2
18" Min.
Total height of vertical side
VERTIC
AL SIDED LOWER PORTION
3. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in 1926.652(b).
B-1.4 Excavation Made in Layered Soils
1. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth made in layered soils shall have a maximum allowable slope
for each layer as set forth below.
P-21
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App B
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
P• .
C 1
Al
314
COVERA
i
COVERS
P-22
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
1926 Subpart P App C - Timbe r
Shoring for Trenches.
(a) Scope. This appendix contains information that
can be used when timber shoring is provided as a
method of protection from cave-ins in trenches that do
not exceed 20 feet (6.1 m) in depth. This appendix
must be used when design of timber shoring protective
systems is to be performed in accordance with
1926.652(c)(1). Other timber shoring configurations;
other systems of support such as hydraulic and
pneumatic systems; and other protective systems such
as sloping, benching, shielding, and freezing systems
must be designed in accordance with the requirements
set forth in 1926.652(b) and 1926.652(c).
(b) Soil Classification. In order to use the data
presented in this appendix, the soil type or types in
which the excavation is made must first be determined
using the soil classification method set forth in
appendix A of subpart P of this part.
(c) Presentation of Information. Information is
presented in several forms as follows:
(1) Information is presented in tabular form
in Tables C-1.1, C-1.2 and C-1.3, and Tables
C-2.1, C-2.2 and C-2.3 following paragraph (g)
of the appendix. Each table presents the
minimum sizes of timber members to use in a
shoring system, and each table contains data
only for the particular soil type in which the
excavation or portion of the excavation is made.
The data are arranged to allow the user the
flexibility to select from among several
acceptable configurations of members based on
varying the horizontal spacing of the
crossbraces. Stable rock is exempt from shoring
requirements and therefore, no data are
presented for this condition.
(2) Information concerning the basis of the
tabular data and the limitations of the data is
presented in paragraph (d) of this appendix, and
on the tables themselves.
(3) Information explaining the use of thefl
tabulardata is presented in paragraph (e) of this
appendix.
(4) Information illustrating the use of the
tabulardata is presented in paragraph (f) of this
appendix.
(5) Miscellaneous notations regarding Tables
C -1.I through C-1.3 and Tables C-2.1 through
C-2.3 are presented in paragraph (g) of this
Appendix.
(d) Basis and limitations of the data. -
(1) Dimensions oftintber members.
(i) The sizes of the timber members
listed in Tables C-1.1 through C-1.3 are
taken from the National Bureau of
Standards (NBS) report, "Recommended
Technical Provisions for Construction
Practice in Shoring and Sloping of
Trenches and Excavations." In addition,
where NBS did not recommend specific
sizes of members, member sizes are
based on an analysis of the sizes required
for use by existing codes and on
empirical practice.
(ii) The required dimensions of the
members listed in Tables C-1.1 through
C-1.3 refer to actual dimensions and not
nominal dimensions of the timber.
Employers wanting to use nominal size
shoring are directed to Tables C-2.1
through C-2.3, or have this choice under
I926.652(c)(3), and are referred to The
Corps of engineers, The Bureau of
Reclamation or data from other
acceptable sources.
(2) Limitation of application.
(1) It is not intended that the timber
shoring specification apply to every
situation that may be experienced in the
field. These data were developed to apply
to the situations that are most commonly
experienced in current trenching practice.
Shoring systems for use in situations that
H
I
I
C
H
I
I
I
I
C
C
H
I
I
P-24 I
I
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
Arrangement #4
' Space 6X6 crossbraces at 12 feet horizontally
and four feet vertically.
Space I0XI0 wales at four feet vertically.
Space 3X8 uprights at six feet horizontally.
(2) Example 2.
A trench dug in Type B soil is 13 feet deep and
' five feet wide. From Table C-1.2 three acceptable
arrangements of members are listed.
I
I
I
I
I
[1
I
I
I
I
I
Arrangement #1
Space 6X6 crossbraces at six feet horizontally
and five feet vertically.
Space 8X8 wales at five feet vertically.
Space 2X6 uprights at two feet horizontally.
Arrangement #2
Space 6X8 crossbraces at eight feet horizontally
and five feet vertically.
Space 10X10 wales at five feet vertically.
Space 2X6 uprights at two feet horizontally.
Arrangement #3
Space 8X8 crossbraces at 10 feet horizontally
and five feet vertically.
Space 10X12 wales at five feet vertically.
Space 2X6 uprights at two feet vertically.
(3) Example 3.
A trench dug in Type C soil is 13 feet deep and
five feet wide.
From Table C-1.3 two acceptable arrangements
of members can be used.
P-26
Arrangement #1
Space 8X8 crossbraces at six feet horizontally
and five feet vertically.
Space 10X12 wales at five feet vertically.
Position 2X6 uprights as closely together as
possible.
If water must be retained use special tongue and
groove uprights to form tight sheeting.
Arrangement #2
Space 8X10 crossbraces at eight feet
horizontally and five feet vertically.
Space 12X12 wales at five feet vertically.
Position 2X6 uprights in a close sheeting
configuration unless water pressure must be resisted.
Tight sheeting must be used where water must be
retained
(4) Example 4.
A trench dug in Type C soil is 20 feet deep and
11 feet wide. The size and spacing of members for the
section of trench that is over 15 feet in depth is
determined using Table C-1.3. Only one arrangement
of members is provided. Space 8X10 crossbraces at
six feet horizontally and five feet vertically.
Space 12X12 wales at five feet vertically.
Use 3X6 tight sheeting.
Use of Tables C-2.1 through C-2.3 would
follow the same procedures.
(g) Notes for all Tables.
1. Member sizes at spacings other than indicated
are to be determined as specified in 1926.652(c),
"Design of Protective Systems."
2. When conditions are saturated or submerged
use Tight Sheeting. Tight Sheeting refers to the use of
specially -edged timber planks (e.g., tongue and
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
" REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
TABLE C-1.1
TIMBER TRENCH SHORING - - MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS
SOIL TYPE A Pa = 25 x H +72 p sf Q ft Surcharge)
q
'�
DEPTH
CROSS BRACES
UPRIGHTS
OF
HORIZ.
WIDTH
OFTRENCN
VERT.
VERT.
MAXIMUM ALL0WABLEH0tITANTAL SPAONG
(
SPACING
UP TO
UP TO
UPTO
UPTO
IJPTO
3PACINC
SIZE
3PACIN
(FEET)
4
5
6
8
( .J)
4
6
9
12
15
( T)
Ca1Jaax2
UP TO
Not
5
6
4X4
4X4
4X6
6X6
6116
4
Re'd
---
2x6
UP TO
Hot
8
4X4
4X4
4X6
6X6
6X6
4
Re'd
---
2x8
TO
UP TO
10
4X6
4X6
4X6
6116
6116
1
8118
2x6
10
•UPTO
12
4X6
4X6
6X6
6
63(6
8X8
2x6
U6
10
4X4
4X4
4X6
Red
- -
3x8
UP TO
8
4X6
6X6
6X6
6X6
8118
2x6
To
UPTO
10
6X6
6X5
6X6
6118
6118
4
8X10
2x6
15
UP TO
12
6116
6116
6116
6118
6X8
4
101110
4
3x8
. UP TO
15
6
6116
6116
6118
R
6X8
3x6
UP TO
8
6116
6116
6X6
6X8
6X8
8118
3x6
TO
UP TO
10
8118
8118
8118
8X8
81110
4
8X10
4
3x6
20
UP TO
12
8118
-U8--8Y8---S-XS-41O
4
-104E-1
-
OVER
20
SEENOTEI
•Ith doakoregattlezdwLhtbendmgstIxronotItssthm83Upsi.
"Mato& zedmembaso(eq*tleinstmi$hmtybesabsthd&awood.
P-28
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart PApp C
IREGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
I
I
I
I
I
I
[1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLEC-13
TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIRMENTS
SOIL TYPE C P = 80 X H + 72 psf (2 ft. Surcharge)
a
DEPTH
SIZE (ACTUAL) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS**
OF
TRENCH
FEET)
CROSS BRACE
WALES
JPRSGHTS MAX
HOR SPAC.
HOR12
SPACINGUP
(FEET)
WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
VERT.
SPACIN
(FEET)
SIZEVERT.1LOW.
()SPACff1GTEf.T)(SNoth2)
(FEET)
T
4
UP T
6
UP TOUP
9
TCIJP
12
T
15
S
5
UPTO6
6x8
6x8
6x8
8x8
8x8
S
8x10
5
2x6
UP TO 8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
5
10xS2
S
2x6
TO
10
UP TO 1
8x10
8x10
8x10
8x10
10x10
5
L2xl2
5
2x6
NSee
ote 1
10
UPTO6
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
5
10x12
5
2x6
TO
UP TO 8
8x10
8x10
8x10
8x10
10x10
S
t2x12
5
2x6
See
ote 1
15
See
Note I
1SUP
TO 6
8x10
8x10
8x10
8x10
10x10
S
2x12
5
3x6
See
TO
20
See
Note 1
ote 1
OVER
SEE NOTE 1
* Mked oak or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 850 psi
** Manufactured members of equivalent strength may by substituted for wood.
P-30
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App. C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
TABLE C-2.2
TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS
SOIL TYPE B P(a) =45 X H + 72 psf(2 ft. Surcharge)
DEPTH
SIZE (S4S) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS *$
OF
CROSS BRACES
VT
WALES
UPRIGHTS
HORIZ
WIDTHOFTRENCH(FEET)
SIZE
VERT.
MAXIMUMALLOWABLEUORIIONTALSPAaNG
TRENCH
SPACING
SPACING
{ice
��1
SPACING
(Peen
UP TO
UPTO
UPTO
UPTO
UPTO
(FEET)
(FEET)
4
6
9
12
15
CLOSE
2
3
{
6
UP TO
41(6
4X6
43(6
665
63(6
5
6K8
5
311((12
4IU2
5
$TO
416
4X6
6Yb
61(6
616
5
828
5
3Y8
428
TO
UPTO•
10
43(6
426
674
6Yb
628
5
8X10
5
4Y2
10
See
Note 1
UP TO
618
638
5
83(8
5
3X6
4X10
6
10
U $TO
63(8
6503
6388X8
83(8
5
10X10
5
3X6
4K10
TO
U1 TO
10
6X8
6IB
8X8
81(8
8X8
5
10112
5
31(6
41(10
15
See
Note 1
UP TO
618
6Kg
618
61(8
81(8
5
8110
5
474
6
15
$To
61{8
61
61(8
818
8X8
5
10X12
5
4X6
TO
U10T0
83(8
8m
81(8
818
83
5 .
121(12
5
4X6
20
See
Note 1
OVER
SEE NOTE 1 — -- — -
* Douglas fir or equivalent with ablendh g strength not less than 1500 psi.
** Marufaotured member of equivalent strength maybe substituted forwood.
P-32
I
I
III
I
I
I
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
Il
Ii'
1
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App D
' REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
presented in paragraph (g) of this appendix.
' 1926 Subpart P App D - Aluminu m (6) Figures, illustrating typical installations of
Hydraulic Shoring for Trenches hydraulic shoring, are included just prior to the
Tables. The illustrations page is entitled
' "Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring: Typical
(a) Scope. This appendix contains information that Installations."
can be used when aluminum hydraulic shoring is
' provided as a method of protection against cave-ins in (d) Basis and limitations of the data.
trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (6.1m) in depth.
This appendix must be used when design of the (1) Vertical shore rails and horizontal wales
aluminum hydraulic protective system cannot be are those that meet the Section Modulus
performed in accordance with 1926.652(c)(2). requirements in the D-1 Tables. Aluminum
material is 6061-T6 or material of equivalent
(b) Soil Classification. In order to use data strength and properties.
' presented in this appendix, the soil type or types in
which the excavation is made must first be determined (2) Hydraulic cylinders specifications.
using the soil classification method set forth in
appendix A of subpart P of part 1926. (i) 2 -inch cylinders shall be a
' minimum 2 -inch inside diameter with a
(c) Presentation of Information. Information is minimum safe working capacity of no
presented in several forms as follows: less than 18,000 pounds axial
' compressive load at maximum extension.
(1) Information is presented in tabular form Maximum extension is to include full
inTablesD-l.l,D-1.2,D-1.3and D-1.4. Each range of cylinder extensions as
' table presents the maximum vertical and recommended by product manufacturer.
horizontal spacings that may be used with
various aluminum member sizes and various (ii) 3 -inch cylinders shall be a
hydraulic cylinder sizes. Each table contains minimum 3 -inch inside diameter with a
data only for the particular soil type in which the safe working capacity of not less than
excavation or portion of the excavation is made. 30,000 pounds axial compressive load at
Tables D-1.1 and D-1.2 are for vertical shores extensions as recommended by product
in Types A and B soil. Tables D-1.3 and D-1.4 manufacturer.
are for horizontal waler systems in Types B and
C soil. (3) Limitation of application.
' (2) Information concerning the basis of the (i) It is not intended that the aluminum
tabular data and the limitations of the data is hydraulic specification apply to every
presented in paragraph (d) of this appendix. situation that may be experienced in the
field. These data were developed to apply
(3) Information explaining the use of the to the situations that are most commonly
tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of this experienced in current trenching practice.
appendix. Shoring systems for use in situations that
' are not covered by the data in this
(4) Information illustrating the use of the appendix must be otherwise designed as
tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of this specified in 1926.652(c).
' appendix.
(ii) When any of the following
(5) Miscellaneous notations (Footnotes) conditions are present, the members
regarding Table D- 1.1 through D-1.4 arc specified in the Tables are not considered
P-34
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App D
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
cylinder spaced at 10 feet o,c. horizontally.
Both wales are spaced 4 feet o.c. vertically, 3 x
12 timber sheeting is required at close spacing
vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical installation.)
(g) Footnotes, and general notes, for Tables
D-1.1, D-1.2, D -I.3, and D -I.4.
(1) For applications other than those listed in
the tables, refer to 1926.652(c)(2) for use of
manufacturer's tabulated data For trench depths
in excess of 20 feet, refer to 1926.652(c)(2) and
1926.652(c)(3).
(2) 2 inch diameter cylinders, at this width,
shall have structural steel tube (3.5 x 3.5 x
0.1875) oversleeves, or structural oversleeves
of manufacturer's specification, extending the
full, collapsed length.
(3) Hydraulic cylinders capacities.
(i) 2 -inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2 -inch
inside diameter with a safe working capacity of not less
than 18,000 pounds axial compressive load at
maximum extension. Maximum extension is to include
full range of cylinder extensions as recommended by
product manufacturer. (ii) 3 -inch cylinders shall be a
minimum 3 -inch inside diameter with a safe work
capacity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial
compressive load at maximum extension. Maximum
extension is to include full range of cylinder extensions
as recommended by product manufacturer.
(4) All spacing indicated is measured center
to center.
(5) Vertical shoring rails shall have
minimum section modulus of 0.40 inch.
(6) % When vertical shores are used, there must
be a minimum of three shores spaced equally,
horizontally, in a group.
(7) Plywood shall be 1.125 inch thick
softwood or 0.75 inch thick, 14 ply, arctic white
birch (Finland form). Please note that plywood
is not intended as a structural member, but only
for prevention of local raveling (sloughing of the
trench face) between shores.
(8) See appendix C for timber specifications.
(9) Wales are calculated for simple span
conditions.
(10) See appendix D, item (d), for basis and
limitations of the data.
I
I
I
I
I
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
P-36 I
H
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App D
' REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
C
I
I
I
I
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
I
TABLED-i.!
ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING
VERTICAL SHORES
FOR SOIL TYPE A
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
DEPTH
MAXIMUM
MAXIMUM
WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
OF
HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
TRENCH
SPACING
SPACING
UP TO 8
OVER 8 UP
OVER 12 UP
��
TO12
TO 15
(FEET)
(FEET)
OVER
5
8
UP TO
10
OVER
10
8
4
2INCH
2INCH
3INCH
UP TO
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
5
OTE
OVER
15
7
UP TO
20
OVER 20
NOTE (1)
Footnotes to tables, and giera7iioies on hWauhc s onng—are ohm Appendix D, Item (g)
Note (1): See Appendix D, Item (g)(1)
Note (2): See Appendix D, Item (g)(2)
P-38
II
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App D
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
TABLE D - 1.3
ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING
WALER SYSTEMS
FOR SOIL TYPE B
WALES -
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
TIMBER UPRIGHTS
DEPTH
OF
WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET) •
M(aNCENaseacwG
(aNc9Mre R)
TRENCH
(FEET}SPACWG
VERTICA
SPACING
ueeT1
secrwN
MODULUS
pnp11
UPTO8
OVMOUPT012
0V8R12UPT015
S01 12FT.
3FT.
H0FIZ.
CYLwueR
DIAMETER
H0RIZ.
SPACING
CYLINDER
DIAMETER
H0RIZ
SPACING
YLIIDE
DIAMETL
OVER
5
UP TO
4
3.5
8.0
2IN
8.0
N0IN a
8,0
3IN
-
--
3x12
7.0
9.0
2IN
9.0
NOTINf12
9.0
3IN
14.0
12.0
3IN
12.0
3IN
12.0
3IN
10
OVER
10
UPTO
4
3.5
6.0
2 IN
6.0
N0T2)
6.0
3 IN
--
3x12
-
7.0
8.0
3IN
8.0
3IN
8.0
3IN
15
14.0
10:0
3 IN
10.0
3 IN
10.0
3 IN
OVER
15
UP TO
4
3.5
5.5
2IN
5.5
No121
5.5
3IN
3X12
7.0
6.0
3IN
6.0
3IN
6.0
3IN
14.0
9.0
3 W
9.0
3 IN
9.0
3 IN
20
OVER 20
NOTE (1)
I
I
I
C
L
L
I
H
Footnotes to tables, and gertetal Hates an hydrauliG-stlsring, aco feund.in Appendix D, Item (g) ,
Notes (1): See Appendix D, Item (g)(1)
Notes (2): See Appendix D, Item (g,)(2) -
* Consult product manufacturer and/or qualified engineer for Section Modulus of available wales.
I
I
U
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App E
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
1926 Subpart P App E -
Alternatives to Timber Shoring
' � VERTICAL RAIL
18 MAX. 0
w HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
VERTICAL
SPACING
w.y
t1;�<<s l{{
s111L.
•
yI /ii
It
h •i
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH .1926 Subpart P App F
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
The following figures are a graphic summary of
1926 Subpart P App F - the requirements contained in subpart P for
.
excavations 20 feet or less in depth. Protective systems
Selection of Protective Systems for usein excavations more than 20 feet in depth must
be designed by a registered professional engineer in
accordance with sec. 1926.652(b) and (c).
Is the excavation more
than 5 feet in depth?
Is there potential NO YES Is the excavation
for cave-in? entirely in stable rock?
NO Excavation may be
made with
vertical sides.
HypG I Excavation must be
-{I sloped, shored, or
shielded.
or shielding
Go to Figure 2 I - ' Go to Figure 3
FIGURE I - PRELIMINARY DECISIONS
P-44
I
I
I
i
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App F
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
I Sloping selected as the
method ofprotection
ction
Will soil classification
be made in accordance
with 1926.652(b)?
Excavation must comply with
one of the following three
options:
Option 1:
1926.652(b)("2) which
requires Appendices A
and B to be followed
Option 2.
1926.652®(3) which
requires other tabulated
data (see definition) to
be followed.
Option 3.
1926.652(b)(4) which
requires the excavation
to be designed by a
registered professional
engineer.
P-45
Excavations must comply
with 1926.652(b)(1) which
requires a slope ofl 112H:1V
(34 degrees).
FIGURE 2- SLOPING OPTIONS
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App F
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
I
Shoring or shielding se
as the method of prote
Soil classification is required
when shoring or shielding is
used. The excavation must comply
with one of the following four
options:
Option 1
1926.652(c)(1) which re quire s
Appendices A and C to be followed
(e.g. timber shoring).
Option 2
1926.652(c)(2) which requires
manufacturers data to be followed
(e.g. hydraulic shoring, trench
jacks, air shores, shields). .
Option 3
1926.652(c)(3) which re quire s
tabulated data (see definition)
to be followed(a.g. any system
as per the tabulated data).
Option 4
1926.652(c)(4) which rep. Tres
the excavation to be designed
by a registered professional
engineer (e.g. any designed
system).
II
I
C
I
I
LI
I
I
TI
I
I
1
I
L
I
L
L
I]
I
11
I
[I
I
I
I
LI
H
I
H
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH Mcmo
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
June 30, 1995
MEMORANDUM FOR:
REGIONAL
ADMINISTRATORS
FROM: JAMES W. STANLEY,
DEPUTYASSISTANT
SECRETARY
SUBJECT: Suspension of 29 CFR 1926.652
to House Foundation/Basement
Excavations
Action Effective immediately and until further
notice, 29 CFR 1926.652 shall not be applied to
house foundation/basement excavations when all the,
following conditions are present.
The house foundation/basement
excavation is less than seven and
one-half feet in depth or is
benched for at least two (2) feet
horizontally for every five (5) feet
or less of vertical height;
• The minimum horizontal width
(excavation face to
formwork/wall) at the bottom of
the excavation is as wide as
practicable but not less than two
(2) feet;
There is no water, surface tension
cracks, nor other environmental
conditions present that reduce the
stability of the excavation;
There is no heavy equipment
operating in the vicinity that
causes vibration to the excavation
while employees are in the
excavation;
All soil, equipment, and material
surcharge loads are no closer in
distance to the top edge of the
excavation than the excavation is
deep; however, when front end
P-47
loaders are used to dig the
excavations, the soil surcharge
load shall be placed as far back
from the edge of the excavation as
possible, but never closer than
two (2) feet.
Work crews in the excavation are
the minimum number needed to
perform the work; and
The work has been planned and is
carried out in a manner to
minimize the time employees are
in the excavation.
This policy applies to all such house
foundation/basement excavations including those
which become trenches by definition when
formwork, foundations, or walls are constructed.
This policy does not apply to utility excavations
(trenches) where 29 CFR 1926.652 shall remain
applicable.
Background. When promulgated, the regulations
addressing excavations were intended to cover all
excavations. OSHA believed that all the affected
parties had sufficient time during the public
comment period and the informal public hearing (a
period of over one year) to raise any concerns as to
problems that could be caused by the standard. All
problems that were thus identified were resolved
prior to the issuance of the final rule in October
1989. Since publication of the final rule, however,
the issue of basement/foundation excavations has
been identified and questions have been raised
concerning whether or not it is appropriate to apply
the provisions to house foundation/basement
excavations. OSHA believes that since the
application of § 1926.652 to house excavations was
not specifically considered during the rulemaking,
the requirements dealing with cave-in protection
should be suspended until the issue can be fully
evaluated.
State Plans
Regional Administrators shall provide a copy of this
policy to State Designees and encourage the states to
adopt a similar policy.
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App B
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
4v1'
1
Al
3/4
COVERA
COVERB
P-22
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App B
- REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
Ai
AOVERB
C J jI
1 1121/21
AOVERC
j�1--
11/2
BOVERC
2. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in 1926,652(b).
I
P-23
I
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
1926 Subpart P App C - Timbe r
Shoring for Trenches.
(a) Scope This appendix contains information that
can be used when timber shoring is provided as a
method of protection from cave-ins in trenches that do
t not exceed 20 feet (6.1 m) in depth. This appendix
must be used when design of timber shoring protective
systems is to be performed in accordance with
' 1926.652(c)(1). Other timber shoring configurations;
other systems of support such as hydraulic and
pneumatic systems; and other protective systems such
t as sloping, benching, shielding, and freezing systems
must be designed in accordance with the requirements
set forth in 1926.652(b) and 1926.652(c).
(b) Soil Classification. In order to use the data
presented in this appendix, the soil type or types in
which the excavation is made must first be determined
1 using the soil classification method set forth in
appendix A of subpart P of this part.
(c) Presentation of information. Information is
' presented in several forms as follows:
(1) Information is presented in tabular form
' in Tables C-l.l, C -l.2 and C-1.3, and Tables
C-2.1, C-2.2 and C-2.3 following paragraph (g)
of the appendix. Each table presents the
minimum sizes of timber members to use in a
shoring system, and each table contains data
only for the particular soil type in which the
excavation or portion of the excavation is made.
' The data are arranged to allow the user the
flexibility to select from among several
acceptable configurations of members based on
varying the horizontal spacing of the
crossbraces. Stable rock is exempt from shoring
requirements and therefore, no data are
presented for this condition.
(2) Information concerning the basis of the
tabular data and the limitations of the data is
presented in paragraph (d) of this appendix, and
on the tables themselves.
(3) Information explaining the use of the
P-24
tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of this
appendix.
(4) Information illustrating the use of the
tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of this
appendix.
(5) Miscellaneous notations regarding Tables
C-l.l through C-1.3 and Tables C-2.1 through
C-2.3 are presented in paragraph (g) of this
Appendix.
(d) Basis and limitations oft/re data. -
(1) Dimensions of timber members.
(i) The sizes of the timber members
listed in Tables C -Li through C-1.3 are
taken from the National Bureau of
Standards (NBS) report, "Recommended
Technical Provisions for Construction
Practice in Shoring and Sloping of
Trenches and Excavations." In addition,
where NBS did not recommend specific
sizes of members, member sizes are
based on an analysis of the sizes required
for use by existing codes and on
empirical practice.
(ii) The required dimensions of the
members listed in Tables C-l.l through
C- 1.3 refer to actual dimensions and not
nominal dimensions of the timber.
Employers wanting to use nominal size
shoring are directed to Tables C-2.1
through C-2.3, or have this choice under
1926.652(c)(3), and are referred to The
Corps of engineers, The Bureau of
Reclamation or data from other
acceptable sources.
(2) Limitation of application.
(i) It is not intended that the timber
shoring specification apply to every
situation that may be experienced in the
field. These data were developed to apply
to the situations that are most commonly
experienced in current trenching practice.
Shoring systems for use in situations that
Li
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
are not covered by the data in this
appendix must be designed as specified
in 1926.652(c).
(ii) When any of the following
conditions are present, the members
specified in the tables are not considered
adequate. Either an alternate timber
shoring system must be designed or
another type of protective system
designed in accordance with 1926.652.
(A) When loads imposed by structures or by
stored material adjacent to the trench weigh in
excess of the load imposed by a two -foot soil
surcharge. The term "adjacent" as used here
means the area within a horizontal distance from
the edge of the trench equal to the depth of the
trench.
(B) When vertical loads imposed on cross
braces exceed a 240 -pound gravity load
distributed on a one -foot section of the center of
the crossbrace.
(C) When surcharge loads are present from
equipment weighing in excess of 20,000
pounds.
(D) When only the lower portion of a trench
is shored and the remaining portion of the trench
is sloped or benched unless: The sloped portion
is sloped at an angle less steep than three
horizontal to one vertical; or the members are
selected from the tables for use at a depth which
is determined from the top of the overall trench,
and not from the toe of the sloped portion.
(e) Use of Tables. The members of the shoring
system that are to be selected using this information are
the cross braces, the uprights, and the wales, where
wales are required. Minimum sizes of members are
specified for use in different types of soil. There are six
tables of information, two for each soil type. The soil
type must first be determined in accordance with the
soil classification system described in appendix A to
subpart P of part 1926. Using the appropriate table,
the selection of the size and spacing of the members is
then made. The selection is based on the depth and
width of the trench, where the members are to be
installed and, in most instances, the selection is also
based on the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces.
Instances where a choice of horizontal spacing of
crossbracing is available, the horizontal spacing of the
crossbraces must be chosen by the user before the size
of any member can be determined. When the soil type,
the width and depth of the trench, and the horizontal
spacing of the crossbraces are known, the size and
vertical spacing of the crossbraces are known, the size
and vertical spacing of the crossbraces, the size and
vertical spacing of the wales, and the size and
horizontal spacing of the uprights can be read from the
appropriate table.
(1) Examples to Illustrate the Use of Tables C-1.1
through C-1.3.
(1) Example 1.
A trench dug in Type A soil is 13 feet
deep and five feet wide. From Table
C-l.l, for acceptable arrangements of
timber can be used.
Arrangement #I
Space 4X4 crossbraces at six feet horizontally
and four feet vertically.
Wales are not required.
Space 3X8 uprights at six feet horizontally. This
arrangement is commonly called "skip shoring."
Arrangement #2
Space 4X6 crossbraces at eight feet horizontally
and four feet vertically.
Space 8X8 wales at four feet vertically. '
Space 2X6 uprights at four feet horizontally.
Arrangement #3
Space 6X6 crossbraces at 10 feet horizontally
and four feet vertically.
Space 8X10 wales at four feet vertically.
Space 2X6 uprights at five feet horizontally.
P-25
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
' REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
Arrangement #4 Arrangement #1
Space 6X6 crossbraces at 12 feet horizontally Space 8X8 crossbraces at six feet horizontally
and four feet vertically, and five feet vertically.
' Space 10X10 wales at four feet vertically. Space 10X12 wales at five feet vertically.
Space 3X8 uprights at six feet horizontally. Position 2X6 uprights as closely together as
possible.
' (2) Example 2.
If water must be retained use special tongue and
A trench dug in Type B soil is 13 feet deep and groove uprights to form tight sheeting.
five feet wide. From Table C-1.2 three acceptable
arrangements of members are listed. Arrangement #2
Arrangement #1 Space 8X10 crossbraces at eight feet
' horizontally and five feet vertically.
Space 6X6 crossbraces at six feet horizontally
and five feet vertically. Space 12X12 wales at five feet vertically.
Space 8X8 wales at five feet vertically. Position 2X6 uprights in a close sheeting
configuration unless water pressure must be resisted.
Space 2X6 uprights at two feet horizontally. Tight sheeting must be used where water must be
retained.
Arrangement #2
(4) Example 4.
' Space 6X8 crossbraces at eight feet horizontally
and five feet vertically. A trench dug in Type C soil is 20 feet deep and
11 feet wide. The size and spacing of members for the
Space 10X10 wales at five feet vertically. section of trench that is over 15 feet in depth is
determined using Table C- 1.3. Only one arrangement
Space 2X6 uprights at two feet horizontally, of members is provided. Space 8X10 crossbraces at
six feet horizontally and five feet vertically.
' Arrangement #3
Space 12X12 wales at five feet vertically.
Space 8X8 crossbraces at 10 feet horizontally
' and five feet vertically. Use 3X6 tight sheeting.
Space 10X12 wales at five feet vertically. Use of Tables C-2.1 through C-2.3 would
follow the same procedures.
Space 2X6 uprights at two feet vertically.
(g) Notes for all Tables.
(3) Example 3.
1. Member sizes at spacings other than indicated
'
A trench dug in Type C soil is 13 feet deep and are to be determined as specified in 1926.652(c),
five feet wide. "Design of Protective Systems."
' From Table C -l.3 two acceptable arrangements 2. When conditions are saturated or submerged
of members can be used. use Tight Sheeting. Tight Sheeting refers to the use of
specially -edged timber planks (e.g., tongue and
' P-26
L
rn
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
groove) at least three inches thick, steel sheet piling,
or similar construction that when driven or placed in
position provide a tight wall to resist the lateral
pressure of water and to prevent the loss of backfill
material. Close Sheeting refers to the placement of
planks side -by -side allowing as little space as possible
between them.
3. All spacing indicated is measured center to
center.
4. Wales to be installed with greater dimension
horizontal.
5. If the vertical distance from the center of the
lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the trench exceeds
two and one-half feet, uprights shall be firmly
embedded or a mudsill shall be used. Where uprights
are embedded, the vertical distance from the center of
the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the trench shall
not exceed 36 inches. When mudsills are used, the
vertical distance shall not exceed 42 inches. Mudsills
are wales that are installed at the tow of the trench
side.
6. Trench jacks may be used in lieu of or in
combination with timber crossbraces.
7. Placement of crossbraces. When the vertical
spacing of crossbraces is four feet, place the top
crossbrace no more than two feet below the top of the
trench. When the vertical spacing of crossbraces is
five feet, place the top crossbrace no more than 2.5
feet below the top of the trench.
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
I
11
I
I
P-27 I
II
I
I
Ii
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
TABLE C-1.1
TIMBER TRENCH SHORING - - MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS
SOILTYPEA Pa=25xH+72psfQftSurcharge)
c s r
Of
DEPTH
CROSS BRACES
UPRIGHTS
HORIL
WIDTHOPTRENCH
PEEr
W.
MAXIMUM ALL0A'ABLI Ha KIINiTAL SFACHIG
iT.EMDC
SPACING
UPTO UPTO
UPTO
UPTO
UPTO
PACINC
SITE
[VERT.
PACIN
(FEET)
I!
T)
4 6
9
12
15
(TJ
�)
Lase
4
5
6
8
UP TO
Not
5
6
{X4
4x4
4X6
6x6
6x6
4
Re 'd
— —
2x6
UP TO
Not
8
4X4
4X4
4X6
6X6
6x6
4
2x8
TO
UP TO
10
4X6
4X6
4X6
6X6
6X6
8X8
2x6
10
UPTO
12
4X6
4x6
6x6
6
6X6
8x8
2x6
UP TO
Not
10
6
4X4
4x4
4X6
Re dd
---
3x8
UP TO
8
41(6
4X6
6X6
6x6
6X6
8X8
2x6
TO
U 0
10
6X6
6X5
6X6
6X8
6X8
4
8X10
2x6
15
UPTO
12
6X8
6X8
10X!0
3x8
UP TO
15
6
6
R
R
6xg
3x6
UP TO
8
6X6
6X6
6X6
6X8
6X8
4
8X8
3x6
TO
UP TO
10
8X8
8X8
8X8
8X8
BX10
4
8X10
4
3x6
20
UP TD
12
8X8
81(
$X8
8X10
10 -XI
O20R
SEENOTEI
I. Mixed oak or equroalentwith abendingstruhnot lessthan 9)Upsa.
"e lintxaacdmemben of equWalentstrenghmaybe cubstiunzd&wood.
I
l
I
P-28
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
TABLEC-1.2
vIBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMB1
SOILTYPEB Pa=45XH + 72psf(2t.
DEPTH
SIZE (ACTUAL) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS""
OF
TRENCH
(FEET)
CROSS BRACE
HORIZ. WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET) VERT.
WALES
SIZE
(IM
VERT.
SPACING
(FEET)
UPRIGHTS MAX
ALLOWABLE HOR.
SPACING (FEET)
SPACINGUP
(FEED
TC
4
UP TC
6
UP TC
9.
UP TO
12
UP TO
15
SPACING
(FEET)
CLOSE
2
3
5
UP TO 6
4x6
4x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
5
6x8
5
2x6
TO
UP TO 8
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x8
6x8
5
8x10
5
2x6
UP TO 10
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x8
6x8
5
10x10
5
2x6
10
See
Note
10
UP TO 6
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x8
6x8
5
8x8
5
2x6
TO
UP TO 8
6x8
6x8
6x8
8x8
8x8
5
10x10
5
2x6
UP TO 10
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
5
10x12
5
2x6
15
See
Note 1 .
.15
UP TO 6
6x8
6x8
6x8
8x8
8x8
5
8x10
5
3x6
TO
UP TO 8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
5
10x12
5
3x6
Up TO 10
8x10
.8x10
8x10
8x10
8x10
5
12x12
5
3x6
20 ,See
Note!
OVER
SEE NOTE
" Mixed oak or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 850 psi
"'Manufactured members of equivalent strength may by substituted for wood.
P-29
II
I
L
C
C
I
E
LI
I
I
I
I
j
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
I
I
I
I
LI
I
I
Ii
I
L
I
I
L7
H
I
TABLEC-1.3
TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIRIVIENTS *
SOIL TYPE C P = 80 X H + 72 psf (2 fl. Surcharge)
a
DEPTH
SIZE (ACTUAL) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS**
OF
TRENCH
(FEET)
CROSS BRACE
WALES
JPRIGHTS MAX
LOW. HOR SPAC.
2)(FEET)
HORIZ.
PACINGUP
WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
VERT.
(FEET)
r
T
4
TOUP
6
TOUP
9
T
12
UP TOSPACING
15
SE
5
UPTO6
6x8
6x8
6x8
8x8
8x8
5
8x10
5
2x6
UP TO 8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
5
10x12
S
2x6
TO
UP TO 10
8x10
8x10
8x10
8x10
10x10
5
2x12
5
2x6
10
See
Note 1
10
UP TO 6
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
10x12
5
2x6
UP TO 8
8x10
8x10
8x10
8x10
10x10
5
12x12
5
2x6
TO
See
Note 1
15
See
oteI
15
UP TO 6
8x10
8x10
8x10
8x10
10x10
t2x12
S
3x6
See
NoteI
___
_____
__
_____
___________
TO
See
Note I
___
___
___
___
20
See
Note 1
OVER
SEE NOTE 1
* Mixed oak or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 850 psi.
** Iv�nufactured members of equivalent strength may by substituted for wood.
P-30
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
TABLE C-2.1
TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS*
SOIL TYPE A P(a) = 25 X H +1- 72 psf (2 ft. Surcharge)
SIZE (545) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS **
DEPTH
OF
CROSS BRACES . WALES UPRIGHTS
TRENCH
HORIZ.
WTOTHOFTRENCH(FEET
VERT.
SIZE
VERT.
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE HORIIANTALSEACBW
(FAT)
SPACING
uric
urm
uric
urm
urn
SPACING
(114
SPACING
(Fell)
(FEET)
4
6
o
Ir
a
(FEET)
(FEIN)
CLOSE
4
5
6
8
•
UP TO
6
4X4
4X4
4X4
4X4
4X6
4
Not
qd
Hot
P,egd
4X6
5
U aT0
4X4
4x4
4x4
4x6
4x6
4
Regd
F. qd
41.8
TO
Ui0 0
4X6
4x6
4X6
6X6
6X6
4
8x8
4
47.6
10
tip To
4x6
4x6
4x6
6x6
6X6
4
8Y9
4
4Y
b
12
ilPU
6
4X4
4X4
4X4
6X6
67.6
4
Not
R e d
Not
F d
4X10
10
UPTO
4X6
4x6
4X6
6x6
6X6
4
67.8
4
47.6
$
TO
UP TO
6X6
6X6
6x6
67.6
6X6
4
8X8
4
4X8
10
15
UP TO
12
6106
6x6
67.6
63(667.6
4
87.10
4
47.6
47.10
U 6TO
6
6x6
6X6
6X6
6X6
4
6x8
4
3X6
15
$T0
67.6
67.6
63(667.6
6x6
4
87.8
4
335
47.12
TO
UTO
6X6
67.6
6X6
67.6
6S�B
4
8X10
4
3X6
20
10
UPTO
6x6
67.6
6X6
67.8
6x8
4
8X17
4
3Yb
47.12
20OV
SEE NOTE I
* Douglas fir or equivalent with a blending strength not less than 1500 psi. .
** Manufactured members of equivalent strength maybe substituted for wood.
P-31
I
C'
I
ii
Li
I
I
I
I
L
L
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
I
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
TABLE C - 2.2
TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS
SOIL TYPE B P(a) =45 X 11+72 psf (2 ft. Surcharge)
DEPTH
SIZE (S4S) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS **
OF
CROSS BRACES
MT
WALES
UPRIGHTS
HORT
WIDTHOFTRENCH(FEET)
SIZE
VUtT.
MAXIMUMALL0WABLBH0RIZ0NTAL SPACING
TRENCH
SPACING
SPACING
(Faij
(UT)
SPACING
{ 1
(FEET)
TO
UPTO
UPTO
UPTO
UPTO
(FEET)
(FEE)
4
6
9
12
15
CLOSE
2
3
4
6
UP TO
4X6
416
4165
616
616
5
618
5
41112
4112
5
$TO
4X6
4X6
616
616
6X6
5
818
5
318
4X8
TO
UP0T0
4X6
4X6
616
633
628
5
8210
5
418
10
See
Hotel
UP TO
616
6Th
6X6
628
628
5
818
5
326
4X10
6
10
UU $TO
628
628
628
818
818
5
10X10
5
3X6
4X10
TO
U1TO
10
6X8
618
828
818
818
5
10112
5
3X6
4X10
15
See
Hotel
UP TO
6X8
6X8
618
818
5
8110
5
416
b
___
15
UP TO
8
61{86X8
8X8
818
5
10211
5
4166
TO
UPOTO
818
8X8
828
818
818
5
12112
5
4X6
20
Set
Note I
r
SEE NOTE 1
* Douglas fir or equivalent with ablending strength not less than 1500 psi.
** Manufactured members of equivalent strength maybe substituted forwood.
P-32
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
TABLEC-2.3 -. 2.3 '
TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS*
SOIL TYPE C P(a) = 80 X H+ 72 psf (2 ft. Surcharge)
DEPTH
SIZE (S4S) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS**
OF
CROSS BRACES 4 WALES UPRIGHTS
TRENCH
HORIZ.
WIDTHOF TRENCH (FEET)
VEPIT
SIZE
;MT
MAXIMUMAII0P'ABLE H0RIIANTALIPAONG
SPACING
UP To
UPTO
UP TO
UP TO
UP TO
SPACING
SPACING
(FEET)
(FEET)
(FEET)
4
6
9
12.
15
iT}
(IN.)
(FEET)
CLOSE
UPTO
6Xd
6X6
6X6
6X6
8X8
5
8X8
5
3X6
5
UPTO
8
6X6
6X6
6Fb
8X8
8X8
5
10X10
5
3II6
TO
UPTO
6X6
6X6
alb
8X8
8X8
5
IOX12
5
3X6
10
10
set
Note 1
UPTO
6X8
6X8
68
8X8
8X8
5
18X10
S
4X6
10
6
UPTO
8
8X8
828
8X8
1(8
8X8
5
10X10
5
4X6
TO
Set
15
Hotel
See
Note 1
UP TO
8X8
822
8X8
8X10
8X10
5
10102
5
4X6
156
See
TO
Hotel
See
20
Hotel
____
________
_______
See
_____
__
___
___.
___.___
Note i
OR
SEENOTE N- - .._ -
Douglas fir or equivalent with abending strength not less than 1500 psi.
** Manufactured members of equivalent strength maybe substituted for wood.
P-33
I
I
H
I
H
I
I
I
I
C
C
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
IREGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
TABLE C-2.2
' TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS
SOIL TYPE B P(a) = 45 X H + 72 psf (2 ft Surcharge)
I
1 1
I
P
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DEPTH
SIZE (S4S) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS **
OF
CROSS BRACES
VERT
WALES
UPRIGHTS
HORIy
WIDTHOFTREHCH(FEEI)
SIZE
VERT.
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE HORIIANTAL SPACING
TRENCH
SPACING
SPACINGUPTO
(
(IN)
SPACING
T1
(Ff1)
UPTO
UPTO
UPTO
UPTO
(FEET)
(FEETI
1
6
9
12
15
CLOSE
2
3
4
6
6TO
4X6
4X6
4X6
6X6
67.6
5
66X85
37.12
1
4X12
S
$TG
4X6
4X6
6X6
6X6
6X6
5
878
5
3X8
4X8
TO
UP0TO
4X6
47.6
67b
67L
67.8
5
8X10
5
47.8
10
See
Note 1
UP TO
6X6
67.6
6X6
6X8
67.8
5
8X8
5
37.6
47.10
6
10
UP TO
67.8
67.8
6X8
8Xs
87.8
5
10X10
S
37.
47.10
TO
U1 TO
10
6X867.8
81M
87.8
87.8
5
107.12
5
37.6
4X10
15
Sce
Note 1
UP TO
6X8
67.8
67.8
67.8
87.8
5
87.10
5
4Th
6
15
UP TO
8
67.8
6X8
6X8
87.8
87.8
5
107.12
5
47.6
TO
UP O
87.8
87.8
87.8
87.8
87.8
5
127.12
5
47.6
20
Ste
Hole 1
OVER
SEE NOTE 1 - -- - - -
* Douglas fir or equivalent with ablending strength not less than 1500 psi.
** Mairufactured members of equivalent strength maybe substituted forwood.
P-32
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App C
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
TABLE C-2.3
TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS*
SOIL TYPE C P(a) = 80 X H+ 72 psf (2 ft. Surcharge)
DEPTH
SIZE (S4S) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS**
OF
CROSS BRACES H WALES UPRIGHTS
TRENCH
HORIZ.
WIDTH OF TRENCH(FEET)
VUS
SUE
VEiT
MAXIMUMALLO7ABLI HORIIANTAL SPACNG
SPACING
UP
UP TO
UP TO
UP TO
SPACING
SPACING
(FEED(FEET)
FEET
9
12
15
lF>
(IN)
ITT)
CLOSE
UP TO
6316
6116
61{6
68Y2
5
8118
5
3Z6
5
UP To
6Y6
635
6X6
8X8
83B
5
10X10
5
3Y,6
TO
•
UP TO
6X6
6116
8X8
8x8
8118
5
10X17
S
3116
10
10
See
•
Note 1
UP TO
6
6X8
6118
658
81B
8X8
S
101110
5
4x6
10
88
838
8118
BY8
8X8
S
10X10
5
4116
TO8
15
ETTD
833
8118
833
81110
81110
5
101112
5
4116
15
6
See
TO
Hole 1
Ste
20
Note 1
See
Note 1
OVER
SEENOTE 1---
A
* Douglas fir or equivalent with abending strength not less than 1500 psi
** Manufactured members of equivalent strength maybe substituted for wood
P-33
I
[I
I
I
I
I
L
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App D
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
1926 Subpart P App D - Aluminu m
Hydraulic Shoring for Trenches
(a) Scope. This appendix contains information that
can be used when aluminum hydraulic shoring is
provided as a method of protection against cave-ins in
trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (6.1m) in depth.
This appendix must be used when design of the
aluminum hydraulic protective system cannot be
performed in accordance with 1926.652(cX2).
(b) Soil Classification. In order to use data
presented in this appendix, the soil type or types in
which the excavation is made must first be determined
using the soil classification method set forth in
appendix A of subpart P of part 1926.
' (c) Presentation of Information. Information is
presented in several forms as follows:
' (I) Information is presented in tabular form
in TablesD-1.1,D-1.2, D-1.3 and D-1.4. Each
table presents the maximum vertical and
' horizontal spacings that may be used with
various aluminum member sizes and various
hydraulic cylinder sizes. Each table contains
data only for the particular soil type in which the
excavation or portion of the excavation is made.
Tables D-1.1 and D-1.2 are for vertical shores
in Types A and B soil. Tables D-1.3 and D-1.4
' are for horizontal waler systems in Types B and
C soil.
' (2) Information concerning the basis of the
tabular data and the limitations of the data is
presented in paragraph (d) of this appendix.
(3) Information explaining the use of the
tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of this
appendix.
(4) Information illustrating the use of the
tabulardata is presented in paragraph (f) of this
appendix.
(5) Miscellaneous notations (Footnotes)
regarding Table D-1.1 through D-1.4 arc
P-34
presented in paragraph (g) of this appendix.
(6) Figures, illustrating typical installations of
hydraulic shoring, are included just prior to the
Tables. The illustrations page is entitled
"Aluminum Hydraulic. Shoring: Typical
Installations."
(d) Basis and limitations of the data.
(1) Vertical shore rails and horizontal wales
are those that meet the Section Modulus
requirements in the D-1 Tables. Aluminum
material is 6061-T6 or material of equivalent
strength and properties.
(2) Hydraulic cylinders specifications.
(i) 2 -inch cylinders shall be a
minimum 2 -inch inside diameter with a
minimum safe working capacity of no
less than 18,000 pounds axial
compressive load at maximum extension.
Maximum extension is to include full
range of cylinder extensions as
recommended by product manufacturer.
(ii) 3 -inch cylinders shall be a
minimum 3 -inch inside diameter with a
safe working capacity of not less than
30,000 pounds axial compressive load at
extensions as recommended by product
manufacturer.
(3) Limitation of application.
(1) It is not intended that the aluminum
hydraulic specification apply to every
situation that may be experienced in the
field. These data were developed to apply
to the situations that are most commonly
experienced in current trenching practice.
Shoring systems for use in situations that
are not covered by the data in this
appendix must be otherwise designed as
specified in 1926.652(c).
(ii) When any of the following
conditions are present, the members
specified in the Tables are not considered
El
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App D
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
adequate. In this case, an alternative
aluminum hydraulic shoring system or
other type of protective system must be
designed in accordance with 1926.652.
(A) When vertical loads imposed on cross
braces exceed a 100 Pound gravity load
distributed on a one foot section of the center of
the hydraulic cylinder.
(B) When surcharge loads are present from
equipment weighing in excess of 20,000
pounds.
(C) When only the lower portion of a trench
is shored and the remaining portion of the trench
is sloped or benched unless: The sloped portion
is sloped at an angle less steep than three
horizontal to one vertical; or the members are
selected from the tables for use at a depth which
is determined from the top of the overall trench,
and not from the toe of the sloped portion.
(e) Use of Tables D-1.1, D-1.2, D-1.3 and D-1.4.
The members of the shoring system that are to be
selected using this information are the hydraulic
cylinders, and either the vertical shores or the
horizontal wales. When a waler system is used the
vertical timber sheeting to be used is also selected from
these tables. The Tables D-1.1 and D-1.2 for vertical
shores are used in Type A and B soils that do not
require sheeting. Type B soils that may require
sheeting, and Type C soils that always require
sheeting, are found in the horizontal wale Tables D-1.3
and D -1 .4. The soil type must first bedetermined in
accordance with the soil classification system
described in appendix A to subpart P of part 1926.
Using the appropriate table, the selection of the size
and spacing of the members is made. The selection is
based on the depth and width of the trench where the
members are to be installed. In these tables the
vertical spacing is held constant at four feet on center.
The tables show the maximum horizontal spacing of
cylinders allowed for each size of wale in the waler
system tables, and in the vertical shore tables, the
hydraulic cylinder horizontal spacing is the same as the
vertical shore spacing.
(t) Example to Illustrate the Use of//se Tables:
(1) Example 1:
A trench dug in Type A soil is 6 feet deep and 3
feet wide. From Table D- 1.1: Find vertical shores and
2 inch diameter cylinders spaced 8 feet on center (o.c.)
horizontally and 4 feet on center (o.c.) vertically. (See
Figures 1 & 3 for typical installations.)
(2) Example 2:
A trench is dug in Type B soil that does not
require sheeting, 13 feet deep and 5 feet wide. From
Table D-1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch diameter
cylinders spaced 6.5 feet o.c. horizontally and 4 feet
o.c. vertically. (See Figures 1 & 3 for typical
installations.)
(3) A trench is dug in Type B soil that does
not require sheeting, but does experience some
minor raveling of the trench face, the trench is
16 feet deep and 9 feet wide. From Table
D-1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch diameter
cylinder (with special oversleeves as designated
by Footnote #2) spaced 5.5 feet o.c. horizontally
and 4 feet o.c. vertically. Plywood (per Footnote
(g)(7) to the D-1 Table) should be used behind
the shores. (See Figures 2 & 3 for typical
installations.)
(4) Example 4: A trench is dug in previously
disturbed Type B soil, with characteristics of a
Type C soil, and will require sheeting. The
trench is 18 feet deep, and 12 feet wide 8 foot
horizontal spacing between cylinders is desired
for working space. From Table D-1.3: Find
horizontal wale with a section modulus of 14.0
spaced at 4 feet o.c. vertically and 3 inch
diameter cylinder spaced at 9 feet maximum o.c.
horizontally, 3 x 12 timber sheeting is
required at close spacing vertically. (See Figure
4 for typical installation.)
(5) Example 5: A trench is dug in Type C
soil, 9 feet deep and 4 feet wide. Horizontal
cylinder spacing in excess of 6 feet is desired for
working space. From Table D-1.4: Find
horizontal wale with a section modulus of 7.0
and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced at 6.5 feet
o.c. horizontally. Or, find horizontal wale with
a 14.0 section modulus and 3 inch diameter
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
[1
I
[I
I
I
J
P-35 ,
I
I
IH
El
I
I
I
I
I
n
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App D
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
cylinder spaced at 10 feet o.c. horizontally.
Both wales are spaced 4 feet o.c. vertically, 3 x
12 timber sheeting is required at close spacing
vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical installation.)
(g) Footnotes, and general notes, for Tables
D-1.1, D-1.2, D-1.3, and D-1.4.
(1) For applications other than those listed in
the tables, refer to 1926.652(c)(2) for use of
manufacturer's tabulated data. For trench depths
in excess of 20 feet, refer to 1926.652(c)(2) and
1926.652(c)(3).
(2) 2 inch diameter cylinders, at this width,
shall have structural steel tube (3.5 x 3.5 x
0.1875) oversleeves, or structural oversleeves
of manufacturer's specification, extending the
full, collapsed length.
(3) Hydraulic cylinders capacities.
(1) 2 -inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2 -inch
inside diameter with a safe working capacity of not less
than 18,000 pounds axial compressive load at
maximum extension. Maximum extension is to include
full range of cylinder extensions as recommended by
product manufacturer. (ii) 3 -inch cylinders shall be a
minimum 3 -inch inside diameter with a safe work
capacity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial
compressive load at maximum extension. Maximum
extension is to include full range of cylinder extensions
as recommended by product manufacturer.
P-36
(4) All spacing indicated is measured center
to center.
(5) Vertical shoring rails shall have
minimum section modulus of 0.40 inch.
(6) When vertical shores are used, there must
be a minimum of three shores spaced equally,
horizontally, in a group.
(7) Plywood shall be 1.125 inch thick
softwood or 0.75 inch thick, 14 ply, arctic white
birch (Finland form). Please note that plywood
is not intended as a structural member, but only
for prevention of local raveling (sloughing of the
trench face) between shores.
(8) See appendix C for timber specifications.
(9) Wales are calculated for simple span
conditions.
(10) See appendix D, item (d), for basis and
limitations of the data.
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App D
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING
TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS
FlWREND.]
VIXYICALALUAMA.[
HYDRAIUC 9NRN0
(STA)
Iio :+e
,,n:., e, i,iw;
T MAX
P-37
flQWHO.2
VERnCL AjMMM
NYDOAUJC ]RAt
(WITH PLYWOOD)
na INO.4
AURAMIM HIDRAWC 910RNC
WAifl STSIQI
(TYPICAL)
H€ JZDHTAL9
4'
u1TTLill
I
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App D
' REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
I
I
I
I
[l'
I
I
I
[1
I
El
I
I
I
TABLED - 1.1
ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING
VERTICAL SHORES
FOR SOIL TYPE A
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
DEPTH
OF
MAXIMUM
MAXIMUM
WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
TRENCH
HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
SPACING
SPACING
Up TO 8
OVER 8 UP
OVER 12 UP
(FEET)
10 12
T015
(FEET)
(FEET)
OVER
5
8
UP TO
10
OVER
10
8
4
2INCH
2INCH
3INCH
UP TO
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
15
NOTE (2)
OVER
15
7
UP TO
20
OVER 20
NOTE (1)
Footnotes to tables, aMjiS notes on -f yd?au�c s mrmg, are ohm Appendix D, Item (g)
Note (1): See Appendix D, Item (g)(1)
Note (2): See Appendix D, Item (g)(2)
P-38
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App D
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
TABLED • 1.2
ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING
VERTICAL SHORES
FOR SOIL TYPE B
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
DEPTH
MAXIMUM
MAXIMUM
WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
OF
HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
TRENCH
SPACING
SPACING
UP TO g
OVER 8 UP
OVER 12 UP
10 12
10 15
(FEET)
(FEET)
(FEET)
OVER
S
UP TO
8
10
OVER
10
6 S
4
2 INCH
21NCH
3 INCH
UP TO
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
1$
NOTE (2)
OVER
15
5.5
UP TO
20
_
OVER 20
NOTE (1)
Footnotes to tables, an&generalnotesonhydrauEcshoring,areJound4aAppendix D, Item (g)
Note(1): See Appendix D, Item(g)(1)
Note (2): See Appendix D, Item (g)(2)
P-39
H
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App D
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLED - 1.3
ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING
WALER SYSTEMS
FOR SOIL TYPE B
WALES
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
TIMBER UPRIGHTS
DEPTH
OF
TRENCH
(FEET)
YIRTICALSECTION
SPACING
(FEET)
'
MODULUS
t N(3))
WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
MAX.
CENTER) RLX SPnanc
UPT08
OVER8UPTO12
OVER12UPTO15
SOLID
S=
2 PT.
3 Ff.. .
HOFIZ.
SPACUIG
CYLINDER
DIAMETER
HORIZ.
SPACING
CYLINDER
01M4!ThR
HORIZ
SPACING
YLINDE
DIAMETE
OVER
5
UP TO
10
4
3.5
8.0
2IN
8.0
2111
8.0
3IN
-
--
3x12
7.0
9.0
2IN
9.0
2NOIN 2
9.0
3IN
14.0
12.0
3IN
12.0
31N
12.0
3IN
OVER
10
UPTO
15
4
3.5
6.0
2IN
6.0
2111
HOM2)
6.0
3IN
----
3X12
--
7.0
8.0
3IN
8.0
31N
8.0
3IN
14.0
10.0
3 IN
10.0
3 IN
10.0
3IN
OVER
15
UP TO
20
4
3.5
5.5
2IN
5.5
NOTINFY2j
5.5
3IN
3x12
7.0
6.0
3 IN
6.0
3 IN
6.0
3 IN
14.0
9.0
3IN
9.0
31N
9.0
3IN
OVER 20
NOTE (1)
• Footnotes to tables, and-general-notes-on-hy4nulis-shoriflg,-are—fo 1nd-in Appendix D, Item (g)
Notes (1): See Appendix D, Item (g)(1)
Notes (2): See Appendix D, Item (g)(2)
* Consult product manufacturer and/or qualified engineer for Section Modulus of available wales.
I
I
P-40
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App D
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
TABLED - 1.4
ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING
WALER SYSTEMS
FOR SOIL TYPE C
WALES
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
TIMBER UPRIGHTS
DEPTH
•
WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
MAX.HORIZ.SPACING
OF
VERTICAL
SECTfON
(0N CENTER)
TRENCH
SPACING
MODULUS
UP TO 8
OVflS UP TO 12
OVER 12 UP TO 15
/�
(FEET).
(1nT)
(114(3))
SOLID
S1J.T
,
3 ,
NCRIZ.
SPACING
cYLDIDER
HaRIL .
CYLINDER
NGRIZ.
CYLINDER
DIAMETER
SPACING
DIAMETER
SPACING
DIAMETER
OVER
3.5
6.0
2111
6.0
NOTE(2)
6.0
3IN
5
UP TO
4
3X12.
--
---
7.0
6.5
21N
6.5
NUTE(2)
6.5
3IN
10
14.0
10.0
3IN
10.0
3IN
10.0
3IN
OVER
3.5
4.0
2IN
4.0
MOTE(2)
4.0
3IN
7.0
5.5
3IN
5.5
3111
5, 5
3IN
10
4
3X12
----
UP TO
15
14.0
8.0
3IN
8.0
3111
8.0
3IN
OVER
3.5
3.5
21143.5
3.5
3IN
NOTE(2)
15
4
7.0
5.0
3IN
5.0
3IN
5.0
31N
3X12
----
--'
UPTO
14.0
6.0
3IN
6.0
3IN
6.0
3IN
20
•
OVER20
--NOTt(1)
Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are found in Appendix D, Item (g)
Notes (1): See Appendix D, Item(g)(1)
Notes (2): See Appendix D, Item (g)(2)
*Consult product manufacturer and/or qualified engineer for Section Modulus of available wales
P-41 ,
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App E
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
1926 SubpartP App E -
Alternatives to Timber Shoring
VERTICL RAIL
18"MAMAX//t I HYDRAULIC ACYLINDER
VERTICAL
SPACING
4'
2' MAX.
Figure 1. AhSmun Hydraulic Shoring
a 4I
P -a2
I
Figure 3. Trench Jacks (Screw Jacks)
Figure 4. Trench Shields
I
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App E
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
I
L
[Ti
II
L
I
L
1
1
P-43 '
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926 Subpart P App F
REGULATIONS AND PROCEDURES
The following figures are a graphic summary of
the requirements contained in subpart P for
1926 Subpart P App F -
excavations 20 feet or less in depth. Protective systems
Selection of Protective Systems for usein excavations more than 20 feet in depth must
be designed by a registered professional engineer in
accordance with sec. 1926.652(b) and (c).
Is the excavation more
than 5 feet in depth?
Is there potential NO YES Is the excavation
for cave-in? entirely in stable rod??
Excavation may be
made with
vertical sides.
Excavation must be NO
sloped, shored, or
shielded.
or shielding
setectea. so,oc�cu.
Go to Figure 2 Go to Figure 3
FIGURE 1 -PRELIMINARY DECISIONS
P-44
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
' SECTION NO. SECTION TITLE NO. OF PAGES
PART I BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
' 00030 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS ..........................2
00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ......................... 7
00200 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS .............. 1
- WAGE RATES
00300 BID FORM LUMP SUM ............................... 6
00350 BID BOND..........................................2
' - NOTICE OF AWARD ..................................
PART II CONTRACT FORMS
' 00500 CONTRACT ......................................... 3
00600-1 PERFORMANCE BOND ............................... 2
00600-2 PAYMENT BOND....................................2
- CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT ..........................1
NOTICROC E TO PEED ............................. . . 1
PART III CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS .............................. 34
00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ...................... 3
01009 SUMMARY OF WORK ............... 2
01210 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ......... . . . . . 1
PART IV SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 2 SITE WORK
02020 Demolition and Removal of Facilities ...................... 2
' 02225 Trench Excavation, Backfill, and Compacting ..... . . . : . 8
02625 Ceramic Epoxy -Lined Ductile Iron Pipe & Fittings . . . . . 5
02632 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe & Fittings - Sewer .. . . . . . . . ... 2
02727 Manhole Construction ..................................4
02730 Sewage Collection System ...............................6
02731 Sewage Force Main....................................4
'
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
03210 Reinforcing Steel......................................4
' 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete..................................25
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
'
09900 Painting....................................11
Paint System Data Sheet
Color Selection Chart
'
DIVISION it EQUIPMENT
11311 Submersible Wastewater Pumps .......................... 8
' 11312 Control Panel ......................................... 3
' Table of Contents (Cont'd)
El
E
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
15101 Manually Operated Valves .............................. .
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
16010
General Electrical Requirements ..........................
'
16110
Raceways ............................................
16120
Wires and Cables ......................................
16130
Boxes and Enclosures
'
16170
Disconnect Switches . ..................................
16190
Supporting Devices ....................................
16195
Electrical Identification ............................ . . .
'
16421
Underground Electrical Services .................... .. .
16424
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor .......................
16450
Grounding ...........................................
16460
Transformers, DryType.................................
16471
Circuit Breaker Lighting Panelboards, 240 VAC .............
'
16476
Fuses ...............................................
16484
Motor Control Centers ..................................
El
CI
I
I
I
I
I
APPENDIX
OSHA Standard for Excavation and Trenches
Safety Program
7
8
3
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
2
' FY972102
I
I
r!
I
I
DOCUMENT 00030
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
Bids: Feburary 12, 1998
PROJECT: HAMESTRING CREEK LIFT STATION
City of Fayetteville Bid No. 98-7
MCE Project No.: FY972102
McClelland Consulting Engineers, Inc.
1810 North College
P.O. Box 1229
Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701
Phone: (501) 443-2377
City of Fayetteville, Arkansas will receive sealed bids on a General Contract, Hamestring Creek
Lift Station.
IBids shall be on a lump sum price
' City of Fayetteville, Arkansas will receive Bids until 2:00 p.m. Local Time on February 12, 1998
at City Hall, Fayetteville, Arkansas. Bids received after this time will not be accepted. Bids will
be opened and publicly read aloud immediately after specified closing time. All interested parties
' are invited to attend.
Bidding Documents may be examined at the offices of the Engineer and at:
' ABC Plans Room F.W. Dodge Reports Construction Market Data
Ozark Floor Co. 5100 East Skelly P.O. Box 1109 (72203)
' 928 North College Suite 1010 1501 N. Pierce, Suite 101
Fayetteville, AR Tulsa, OK 74135 Little Rock, AR 72207
Copies of the Bidding documents may be obtained at the Engineer's office in accordance with the
Instructions to Bidders upon depositing the sum of $150.00 for each set of documents. Return of
documents is not required, and amount paid for documents is not refundable. Partial sets are not
available.
' Each Bid must be submitted on the prescribed form and accompanied by a certified check or bid
bond executed on the prescribed form, payable to the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas in an amount
not less than 5 percent of the amount bid.
I
FY972102 00030-I
For information concerning the proposed work, contact Joe Tarvin, P.E., at the Engineers office.
The attention of the Bidder is directed to the applicable federal and state requirements and conditions
of employment to be observed and minimum wage rates to be paid under this contract.
The Owner reserves the right to waive irregularities and to reject bids and to postpone the award of
the Contract for a period of time which shall not exceed beyond 90 days from the bid opening date.
CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS
Fred Hanna. Mayor
DOCUMENT 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PARAGRAPH NO./TITLE PAGE NO.
1. FORMAT..................................................................1
2. SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE ................................................ 1
3. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT ................................... 1
4. QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTORS ......................................... 1
5. DOCUMENT INTERPRETATION .............................................. 1
6. BIDDER'S UNDERSTANDING ................................................ 2
7. PROJECT MANUAL AND DRAWINGS.........................................2
8. TYPE OF BID.............................................................. 3
9. TRENCH AND EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEM................................3
10. PREPARATION OF BIDS....................................................3
11. STATE AND LOCAL SALES AND USE TAXES..................................4
12. SUBMISSION OF BIDS ...................................................... 4
13. TELEGRAPHIC OR WRITTEN MODIFICATION OF BID .......................... 4
14. WITHDRAWAL OF BID ..................................................... 4
15. BID SECURITY.............................................................5
16. RETURN OF BID SECURITY ................................................. 5
17. AWARD OF CONTRACT ..................................................... 5
18. BASIS OF AWARD.......................................................... 6
19. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT.................................................6
20. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS.....................................6
21. FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT AND FURNISH BOND ...................... 7
22. PERFORMANCE OF WORK BY CONTRACTOR.................................7
23. TIME OF COMPLETION.....................................................7
24. PROVIDING REQUIRED INSURANCE.........................................7
1
U
I
DOCUMENT 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. FORMAT
' The Contract Documents are divided into Parts, Divisions, and Sections in keeping with
accepted industry practice in order to separate categories of subject matter for convenient
reference thereto. Generally, there has been no attempt to divide the Specification Sections
into work performed by the various building trades, work by separate subcontractors, or work
required for separate facilities in the Project.
2. SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE
' "Command" type sentences are used in Contract Documents. These refer to and are directed
to the Contractor.
3. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT
' A general description of the Work to be done is contained in the ADVERTISEMENT FOR
BIDS. The scope is indicated on the accompanying Drawings and specified in applicable
' parts of these Contract Documents.
4. QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTORS
The prospective bidders must meet the statutorily prescribed requirements before Award of
Contract by the Owner.
' Before a Contract will be awarded for the work contemplated herein, the Owner will conduct
such investigation as is necessary to determine the performance record and ability of the
' apparent low Bidder to perform the size and type of work specified under this Contract. Upon
request, the Bidder shall submit such information as deemed necessary by the Owner to
evaluate the Bidder's qualifications.
5. DOCUMENT INTERPRETATION
' The Contract Documents governing the Work proposed herein consist of the Drawings and
all material bound herewith. These Contract Documents are intended to be mutually
' cooperative and to provide all details reasonably required for the execution of the proposed
Work. Any person contemplating the submission of a Bid shall have thoroughly examined
all of the various parts of these Documents, and should there be any doubt as to the meaning
' or intent of said Contract Documents, the Bidder should request of the Engineer, in writing
(received by the Engineer at least 5 working days prior to bid opening) an interpretation
thereof.
IFY972102
00100-1
I
IAny interpretation or change in said Contract Documents will be made only in writing, in the
form of Addenda to the Documents which will be furnished to all Bidders receiving a set of
the Documents. Bidders shall submit with their Bids, or indicate receipt, of all Addenda. The
Owner or Engineer will not be responsible for any other explanation or interpretations of said
Documents not issued in writing by Addendum.
' 6. BIDDER'S UNDERSTANDING
' Each Bidder must inform himself of the conditions relating to the execution of the Work, and
it is assumed that he will inspect the site and make himself thoroughly familiar with all the
' Contract Documents. Failure to do so will not relieve the successful Bidder of his obligation
to enter into a Contract and complete the contemplated Work in strict accordance with the
Contract Documents. It shall be the Bidder's obligation to verify for himself and to his
complete satisfaction all information concerning site and subsurface conditions.
Information derived from topographic maps, or from Drawings showing location of utilities
' and structures will not in any way relieve the Contractor from any risk, or from properly
examining the site and making such additional investigations as he may elect, or from
properly fulfilling all the terms of the Contract Documents.
' Each Bidder shall inform himself of, and the Bidder awarded a Contract shall comply with,
federal, state, and local laws, statutes, and ordinances relative to the execution of the Work.
This requirement includes, but is not limited to, applicable regulations concerning minimum
wage rates, nondiscrimination in the employment of labor, protection of public and employee
safety and health, environmental protection, the protection of natural resources, fire
protection, burning and nonbuming requirements, permits, fees, contractor's license,
nonresident contractorsnotice and bond requirements, and similar subjects.
' 7. PROJECT MANUAL AND DRAWINGS
No return of Drawings is required and no refund will be made.
The successful bidder will be furnished three sets of Documents without charge. Any
additional copies required will be furnished to the Contractor at $150.00 per set. Partial sets
will not be available.
8. TYPE OF BID
A single lump sum price shall be submitted in the appropriate place on the bid. The total
amount to be paid the Contractor shall be the amount of the lump sum bid as adjusted for
additions or deletions resulting from or change orders during construction. The bidder shall
furnish a breakdown of his lump sum bid as stated in the bid.
I
IFY972102 00100-2
I
9. TRENCH AND EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEM
IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACT 291 OF 1993, BIDDERS MUST PROVIDE A SEPARATE
PRICE FOR TRENCH AND EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAMS IN THE SPACE
' PROVIDED ON THE BID FORM. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL SUBJECT THE BIDDER
TO DISQUALIFICATION.
' 10. PREPARATION OF BIDS
All blank spaces on the Bid Form must be filled in, preferably in BLACK ink, in both words
' and figures where required. No changes shall be made in the phraseology of the forms.
Written amounts shall govern in cases of discrepancy between the amounts stated in writing
and the amounts stated in figures. In case of discrepancy between unit prices and totals, unit
prices will prevail.
Any Bid shall be deemed informal which contains material omissions, or irregularities, or in
'
which any of the prices are obviously unbalanced, or which in any manner shall fail to
conform to the conditions of the published ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS.
Only one bid from any individual, firm, partnership, or corporation, under the same or
different names, will be considered. Should it appear to the Owner that any Bidder is
interested in more than one bid for Work contemplated, all bids in which such Bidder is
interested will be rejected. The Bidder shall sign his Bid Form on the blank space provided
therefor. If Bidder is a corporation, the legal name of the corporation shall be set forth above,
t together with the signature of the officer or officers authorized to sign Contracts on behalf of
the corporation. If Bidder is a partnership or sole proprietorship, the true name of the firm
shall be set forth above, together with the signature of the sole proprietor, partner or partners
' authorized to sign Contracts in behalf of the firm. If signature is by an agent, other than an
officer of a corporation or a member of a partnership or sole proprietor, a notarized power -of-
attorney must be on file with the Owner prior to opening of bids or submitted with the Bid.
11. STATE AND LOCAL SALES AND USE TAXES
Unless the Supplementary Conditions contains a statement that the Owner is exempt from
state sales tax on materials incorporated into the Work due to the qualification of the Work
under this Contract, all state and local sales and use taxes, as required by the laws and statutes
of the state and its political subdivisions, shall be paid by the Contractor. Prices quoted in the
Bid shall include all nonexempt sales and use taxes, unless provision is made in the Bid Form
I
to separately itemize the tax.
I
FY972102 00100 - 3
I
I
' 12. SUBMISSION OF BIDS
All Bids must be submitted, not later than the time prescribed, at the place, and in the manner
' set forth in the ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS. Bids must be made on the Bid Form
provided herein. Each Bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope, so marked as to indicate
its contents without being opened, and addressed in conformance with the instructions in the
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS.
' 13. TELEGRAPHIC OR WRITTEN MODIFICATION OF BID
Any Bidder may modify his bid by telegraphic or written communication at any time prior
to the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids, provided such communication is received
by the Owner prior to the closing time. The telegraphic or written communication should not
reveal the bid price; it shall, however, state the addition or subtraction or other modification
so that the final prices or terms will not be known by the Owner until the sealed bid is opened.
14. WITHDRAWAL OF BID
' Any Bid may be withdrawn prior to the scheduled time for the opening of bids either by
telegraphic or written request, or in person. No Bid may be withdrawn after the time
scheduled for opening of Bids, unless the time specified in Item, AWARD OF CONTRACT,
of these INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS shall have elapsed.
' 15. BID SECURITY
' Bids must be accompanied by cash, a certified check, or cashier's check drawn on a bank in
good standing, or a bid bond issued by a Surety authorized to issue such bonds in the State
where the Work is located, in the amount of 5 percent of the total amount of the Bid
submitted. This bid security shall be given as a guarantee that the Bidder will not withdraw
his Bid for a period of 90 days after bid opening, and that if awarded the Contract, the
successful Bidder will execute the attached Contract and furnish properly executed
Performance and Payment Bonds, each in the full amount of the Contract price within the
time specified.
The Attorney -in -Fact (Resident Agent) who executes this bond in behalf of the Surety must
attach a notarized copy of his power -of -attorney as evidence of his authority to bind the
Surety on the date of execution of the bond.
All bid bonds and Contract bonds shall be executed by a LICENSED RESIDENT AGENT
' of the surety having his place of business in the STATE OF ARKANSAS and in all ways
complying with the laws of the State of Arkansas.
H
FY972102 00100-4
I
I
The mere countersigning of a bond will not be sufficient. If the Bidder elects to furnish
' a Bid Bond, he shall use the Bid Bond form bound herewith, or one conforming substantially
thereto in form and content.
' 16. RETURN OF BID SECURITY
Within 15 days after the award of the Contract, the Owner will return the bid securities to all
Bidders whose Bids are not to be further considered in awarding the Contract. Retained bid
securities will be held until the Contract has been finally executed, after which all bid
securities, other than Bidders' bonds and any guarantees which have been forfeited, will be
'
returned to the respective Bidders whose Bids they accompanied.
' 17. AWARD OF CONTRACT
Within 90 calendar days after the opening of Bids, unless otherwise stated in the
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS or SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS of these Documents,
the Owner will accept one of the Bids or will act in accordance with BASIS OF AWARD,
below. The acceptance of the Bid will be by written notice of award, mailed or delivered to
the office designated on the Bid Form. In the event of failure of the lowest responsible and
responsive qualified Bidder to sign and return the Contract with acceptable Performance and
Payment Bonds, as prescribed herein, the Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest
' responsible and responsive qualified Bidder. Such award, if made, will be made within 90
days after the opening of Bids.
18. BASIS OF AWARD
If, at the time this Contract is to be awarded, the Total Base Bid of the lowest acceptable Bid
exceeds the funds then estimated by the Owner as available, the Owner may reject all bids or
take such other action as best serves the Owner's interest.Basis of award will be as stated in
the bid.
19. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
The successful Bidder shall, within 15 consecutive days after receiving notice of award, sign
and deliver to the Owner the Contract hereto attached together with the acceptable bonds as
required in these Documents. Within 15 consecutive days after receiving the signed Contract
with acceptable bonds from the successful Bidder, the Owner's authorized agent will sign the
Contract. Signature by both parties constitutes execution of the Contract.
The successful bidder shall conform to the Rules and Regulations of Arkansas Department
of Finance and Administration concerning nonresident contractor's notice and bond
requirements.
I
IFY972102 00100-5
U
I
I
I
I
I
I
LI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
20. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS
The successful Bidder shall file with the Owner a Performance Bond and Payment Bond on
the form bound herewith, each in the full amount of the Contract Price in accordance with the
requirements of the State of Arkansas as applicable, as security for the faithful performance
of the Contract and the payment of all persons supplying labor and materials for the
construction of the Work, and to cover all guarantees against defective workmanship or
materials, or both, for a period of 1 year after the date of final acceptance of the Work by the
Owner.
The Surety furnishing this bond shall have a sound financial standing and a record of service
satisfactory to the Owner, shall be authorized to do business in the State of Arkansas, and
shall be listed on the current U. S. Department of Treasury Circular Number 570, or
amendments thereto in the Federal Register, of acceptable Sureties for Federal projects.
If the Surety on any Bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent
or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the project is located or
it ceases to meet the requirements of the preceding paragraph, Contractor shall within five
days thereafter substitute another Bond and Surety, both of which must be acceptable to
Owner.
The Attorney -in -Fact (Resident Agent) who executes this Performance Bond and Payment
Bond in behalf of the Surety must attach a notarized copy of his power -of -attorney as
evidence of his authority to bind the Surety on the date of execution of the bond. All
Contracts, Performance and Payment Bonds, and respective powers -of -attorney will have the
same date.
21. FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT AND FURNISH BOND
The Bidder who has a Contract awarded to him and who fails to properly execute the Contract
and furnish the Performance Bond and Payment Bond, within the time frame stipulated
elsewhere in these documents, shall forfeit the bid security that accompanied his bid, and the
bid security shall be retained as liquidated damages by the Owner, and it is agreed that this
sum is a fair estimate of the amount of damages the Owner will sustain in case the Bidder fails
to enter into a Contract and furnish the bond as hereinbefore provided. Bid security deposited
in the form of cash, a certified check, or cashier's check shall be subject to the same
requirements as a Bid Bond.
IFY972102 00100-6
22. PERFORMANCE OF WORK BY CONTRACTOR
I
I
I
I
The Contractor shall perform on the site and with his own organization, work equivalent to
at least forty percent of the total amount of the work to be performed under this Contract. If,
during the progress of the Work hereunder, the Contractor requests a reduction of such
percentage, and the Engineer determines that it would be to the Owner's advantage, the
percentage of the work required to be performed by the Contractor's own organization may
be reduced, PROVIDED prior written approval of such reduction is obtained by the
Contractor from the Engineer.
Each bidder must furnish with his bid a list of the items that he will perform with his own
forces and the estimated total cost of these items.
' 23. TIME OF COMPLETION
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
[]
The time of completion of the Work to be performed under this Contract is of the essence of
the Contract. Delays and extensions of time may be allowed in accordance with the
provisions stated in Document 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS. The time allowed for the
completion of the Work is stated in Document 00500 - Contract.
24. PROVIDING REQUIRED INSURANCE
The Bidder's attention is directed to the insurance requirements set forth in the General
Conditions (amended in the Supplementary Conditions, if appropriate). Submittal of a bid
indicates full understanding and intent to comply with the insurance requirements which are
a condition of the contract.
END OF SECTION
IFY972102 00100 - 7
DOCUMENT 00200
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
' PART!. GENERAL
' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Arkansas Prevailing Wage Determination Number 97-226.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
' Not Used.
PART 3. EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
'
FY972102 00200-
1
P CEWVE17 DEC 22 1997
U
I
I
I
H
I
I
I
I
1
H
Also enclosed is a "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages" form that should be out in
' your specifications along with the wage determination The General\Prime Contractor is responsible for
getting this form filled out and returned to this office within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed for this
project.
Please notify me when you issue your Notice to Proceed for this nroiect.
Mike Huckabee
Governor
STATE OF ARKANSAS
ARKANSAS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR
10421 WEST MARKHAM • LITTLE ROCK, ARKANSAS 72205-2190
(501) 682-4500 • FAX: (501) 682.4535 • TOO: (800) 285-1131
December 17, 1997
Joe E. Tarvin, P.E.
McClelland Consulting Engineers, Inc.
PO Box 1229
Fayetteville, AR 72702
Re: Sewer Pump Station Upgrade
Hamestring Lift Station
Fayetteville, Arkansas
Washington County
Dear Mr. Tarvin:
James L. Salkeld
Director
In response to your request, enclosed is Arkansas Prevailing Wage Determination Number 97-226
establishing the minimum wage rates to be paid on the above -referenced project. These rates were
established pursuant to the Arkansas Prevailing Wage Law, Ark. Code Ann. §§ 22-9-301 to 22-9-315 and
the administrative regulations promulgated thereunder.
If the work is subject to the Arkansas Prevailing Wage Law, every specification shall include
minimum prevailing wage rates for each craft or type of worker as determined by the Arkansas Department
of Labor Ark. Code Ann. §§22-9-308(b)(2). Also, the public body awarding the contract shall cause to be
inserted in the contract a stipulation to the effect that not less than the prevailing hourly rate of wages shall
be paid to all workers performing work under the contract. Ark. Code Ann. §22-9-308(c).
Additionally, the scale of wages shall be posted by the contractor in a prominent and easily
accessible place at the work site. Ark. Code Ann. §22-9-309(a).
' If you have any questions, please call me at (501) 682-4536.
' Sincerely,
Don Cash
'
Prevailing Wage Investigator
enclosure
Page 1 of 1 ARKANSAS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR
PREVAILING WAGE DETERMINATION - HEAVY RATE
1
DATE: December 17, 1997 DETERMINATION #: 97-226
PROJECT: Sewer Pump Station Upgrade COUNTY: Washington
Hamestring Lift Station EXPIRATION DATE: 6-18-98
Fayetteville, Arkansas SURVEY #: 797-AH05
BASIC
' HOURLY FRINGE
CLASSIFICATION RATE BENEFITS
Bricklayer/Pointer, Cleaner, Caulker 7.75
Carpenter 10.35 1.90
Concrete Finisher/Cement Mason 9.40 .72
Electrician/Alarm Installer 12.00 .46
' Ironworker 15.50 5.87
Laborer 7.75
Pipelayer 8.90
Truck Driver 9.20
Power Equipment Operators:
Bulldozer 12.55
Backhoe, Rubber tired 1 yd. or less 9.70 1.65
Crane, Derrick, Dragline,
Shovel & Backhoe, 1-1/2 yds. or less 11.90
' Crane, Derrick, Dragline,
Shovel & Backhoe, over 1-1/2 yds. 14.00
Front End Loader 11.85
• Mechanic 14.70
• Motor Patrol, Finish 13.05
Motor Patrol, Rough 9.00 .17
Roller 8.05
Scraper, Rough 11.25
' welders --receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation
to which welding is incidental.
Certified July 1, 1997
tCLASSIFICATIONS THAT ARE NOT LISTED, BUT THAT ARE GOING TO BE
WORKING ON THIS PROJECT, SHOULD BE REQUESTED FROM THE ARKANSAS
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR, PREVAILING WAGE DIVISION. THESE WRITTEN
REQUESTS SHOULD BE MADE AS SOON AS YOU NOTICE THAT A REQUIRED
CLASSIFICATION IS MISSING, NORMALLY THIS WOULD BE DURING THE BID
PROCESS.
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
>1
Cu
0 ro
4 -JO '1)0
W Q44
Q) 44 N 0 Rt
b I •-1 4
3 ~m R,Q)i
O o o b
.q O qal 3 3
W +v a ~ U
OCu
o20�•0
NH U 4
ro G'ti 4 ro
3 'ti +J 4) 14O4
R,
0 3 0 3
Nti UW+i
CuW144400
4 +-1 0 0
A a) ro O
'U
4-J 4Jal G m
U ro tn ro W 4
a)
H 4 Q A
o
o r-
0.0
a t\ 3
u G ~
•h ro al H G
H 4 41 ro
, Cu ro 00
baaro
G m rn G
oo 0 CO mW
ro ro O, m
r.1 kU144
W ^i U Q4u ro •U O+ R
C
a) C al O ul
)0)4JO
3 W 'H o G al
Cu
ro ro ro a
+J G m o v
ro O A • U
W> U m ro ~ m
+i a., .G CO
4 a ro+ 3 ro
U
a O Cu
-i o 4'b b)
ro ro b
m m G E 3 G
~ G •C O b ti
'-I 4 ro
okW
U m 0U
4O
314 -4
0
I
Mike Huckabee
Governor
[I
I
STATE OF ARKANSAS
ARKANSAS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR
10421 WEST MARKHAM • LITTLE ROCK, ARKANSAS 72205-2190
(501) 682-4500 • FAX: (501) 682-4535 • TDD: (800) 285-1131
December 18, 1997
Joe E. Tarvin, P.E.
McClelland Consulting Engineers, Inc.
PO Box 1229
Fayetteville, AR 72702
IRE: Sewer Pump Station Upgrade
Hamestring Lift Station
Fayetteville, Arkansas
Washington County
'Determination #97-226
James L. Salkeld
Director
Dear Mr. Tarvin:
Listed below is the minimum rate required for the
classification that you requested on the above -referenced
project. Please be advised that you may object to the
department's decision by filing a written objection with the
department within five (5) days of receipt of this notice.
' Classification Basic Hourly Rate Fringe Benefits
Plumber/Pipefitter $7.75 -0-
Should you have any questions, or need any additional
classifications, please feel free to contact me at(501)682-4536.
Sincerely,
Don Cash
Prevailing Wage Investigator
L
DOCUMENT 00300
BID FORM
LUMP SUM
NOTE TO BIDDER: Please use BLACK ink for completing this Bid form.
To City of Fayetteville
Address: 113 West Mountain
Fayetteville, AR 72701
Project Title: Hamestring Creek Lift Station
Engineer's
Project No.: FY972102
Date:
Bidder:
Address:
Bidder's person to contact for additional information on this Bid:
Name:
Telephone:
ADDENDA
Arkansas Contractor's
License No.:
The Bidder hereby acknowledges that he has received Addenda Numbers :
to these Specifications.
(Bidder insert No. of each Addendum received.)
00300- 1
H
I
I
I
C
II
I
The Bidder further agrees that he has exercised his own judgement and has utilized all data which he
' believes pertinent from the Engineer, Owner, and other sources in arriving at his own conclusions. The
Bidder states that he has experience in and is qualified to perform the work herein specified and, if he
does not have craftsmen experienced and qualified in any phase of the work for which this Bid is
offered, that he will subcontract the work under said phase to a contractor who does have the necessary
experience and qualifications.
' CONTRACT EXECUTION AND BONDS
BIDDER'S DECLARATION AND UNDERSTANDING
The undersigned, hereinafter called the Bidder, declares that the only persons or parties interested in this
Bid are those named herein, that this Bid is, in all respects, fair and without fraud, that it is made without
collusion with any official of the Owner, and that the Bid is made without any connection or collusion
with any person submitting another Bid on this Contract.
The Bidder further declares that he has carefully examined the Contract Documents for the construction
of the project, that he has personally inspected the site, that he has satisfied himself as to the quantities
involved, including materials and equipment, and conditions of work involved, including the fact that
the description of the quantities of work and materials, as included herein, is brief and is intended only
to indicate the general nature of the work and to identify the said quantities with the detailed
requirements of the Contract Documents, and that this Bid is made according to the provisions and under
the terms of the Contract Documents, which Documents are hereby made a part of this Bid.
' The Bidder agrees that if this Bid is accepted, he will, within 15 days after notice of award, sign the
Contract in the form annexed hereto, and will at that time, deliver to the Owner the Performance Bond
and Payment Bond required herein, and will, to the extent of his Bid, furnish all machinery, tools,
' apparatus, and other means of construction and do the work and furnish all the materials necessary to
complete all work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents.
CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE. PAYMENT BOND. AND PERFORMANCE BOND
The Bidder further agrees to furnish the Owner, before executing the Contract, the certificates of
' insurance, Payment Bond, and Performance Bond as specified in these Documents.
START OF CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACT COMPLETION TIME. AND LIQUIDATED
'DAMAGES
' Start of Construction, Contract Completion Time, and Liquidated Damages are stated in Document
00500 - Contract.
' SALES AND USE TAXES
The Bidder agrees that all federal, state, and local sales and use taxes are included in the stated bid prices
' for the work.
' 00300-2
Li
' In the space below write in the bid based upon the full scope of work as shown on the Drawings and
Specification for the materials, labor, erection, and other required work.
Total Lump Sum Base Bid:
Dollars ($
(Amount written in words has precedence)
Trench and Excavation Safety System, Required by Act 291 of 1993. The Bidder agrees that the
following amount is included in the above stated Lump Sum Base Bid.
I
Dollars ($
(Amount written in words has precedence)
BASIS OF AWARD
The Bidder understands that the contract will be awarded to the bidder with the lowest Total Lump Sum
Base Bid.
' PAYMENT SCHEDULE
A detailed payment schedule for each structure or unit shall be submitted by the successful low Bidder.
The successful low Bidder shall meet with the Engineer and Owner in Fayetteville, Arkansas, to review
the format and details of the payment schedule. This meeting shall be held within 5 days of notification
that the Contractor is the low Bidder.
' The purpose of the meeting shall be to establish an acceptable format for he payment schedule. The
construction detailed payment schedule shall be completed by the Contractor 14 days after the meeting
' and submitted to the Engineer and Owner for review and approval. Failure of the Contractor to submit
the payment schedule as required may result in the Owner's rejection of the Bid or delay in processing
the Contractor's request for a progress payment.
' SUBCONTRACTORS
The Bidder further certifies that proposals from the following subcontractors were used in the
preparation of this Bid; and if awarded a contract, Bidder agrees to not enter into contracts with others
' for these divisions of the Work without written approval from the Owner and Engineer.
SUBCONTRACTOR
Arkansas Contractor License #
I
Name
I
00300-3
Street Address, City, State, Zip Code
SUBCONTRACTOR
Arkansas Contractor License #
Street Address, City, State, Zip Code
PERFORMANCE OF WORK BY CONTRACTOR
The Bidder shall perform at least 40 percent of the work with his own forces (refer to Paragraph 23,
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. Bids from so called "Brokerage Contractors" will not be considered.)
List below the items that the Bidder will perform with his own forces, if awarded this Contract, and fill
in the blank showing the estimated total cost of these items.
Estimated total cost of the above items the Bidder states that will be performed with his own forces, if
awarded Contract:
($
00300-4
u
I
I
I
C
EXPERIENCE OF BIDDER
The Bidder states that he is an experienced Contractor and has completed similar projects within the last
5 years. (List similar projects, with types, names of clients, construction costs, and references with
telephone numbers. Use additional sheets if necessary.)
' SURETY
' If the Bidder is awarded a construction Contract on this Bid, the Surety who provides the Performance
and Payment Bond will be:
twhose address is
Street, City, State, Zip Code
' INSURANCE
The Bidder acknowledges that he is familiar with the insurance requirements on this Project and, if
' awarded a construction contract, agrees to furnish the required insurance certificates within fifteen (15)
days of the date the award is made.
C
[I
I
I
[I
I
The name of the Bidder submitting this Bid is:
doing business at
Street, City, State, Zip Code
which is the address to which all communications concerned with this Bid and with the Contract shall
be sent.
The names of the principal officers of the corporation submitting this Bid, or of the partnership, or of
all persons interested in this Bid as principals are as follows:
I
00300-5
If Sole Proprietor or Partnership
IN WITNESS hereto the undersigned has set his (its) hand this _ day of , 19
Signature of Bidder
Title
If Corporation
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the undersigned corporation has caused this instrument to be executed
and its seal affixed by its duly authorized officers this day of
(SEAL)
Name of Corporation
By
Title
Attest
Secretary
19_
00300-6
C
DOCUMENT 00350
I
Li
I
I
I
BID BOND
STATE OF ARKANSAS
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we:
Principal and Contractor, and
' I hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas and
represented by its Mayor and City Council, hereinafter called Owner, in the sum of
I
I
I
I
I
I
[I
I
I
DOLLARS ($
lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which well and truly to be made,
we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally,
by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal contemplates submitting or has submitted a bid to the Owner for the
furnishing of all labor, materials (except those to be specifically furnished by the Owner), equipment,
machinery, tools, apparatus, means of transportation for, and the performance of the work covered
in the Bid and the detailed Drawings and Specifications, entitled:
Hamestring Creek Lift Station
Fayetteville, Arkansas
WHEREAS, it was a condition precedent to the submission of said bid that a cashier's check,
certified check, or bid bond in the amount of 5 percent of the base bid be submitted with said bid as
a guarantee that the Bidder would, if awarded the Contract, enter into a written Contract with the
Owner for the performance of said Contract within 15 consecutive calendar days after written notice
having been given of the award of the Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, the conditions of this obligation are such that if the Principal within 15
consecutive calendar days after written notice of such acceptance enters into a written Contract with
the Owner and furnishes a Contract Surety Bond in an amount equal to 100 percent of the base bid,
satisfactory to the Owner, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise the sum herein stated shall
be due and payable to the Owner and the Surety herein agrees to pay said sum immediately upon
demand of the Owner in good and lawful money of the United States of America, as liquidated
damages for failure thereof of said Principal.
El
['I' ll$Sl
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said
caused these presents to be signed in its name by its
attested by its
these presents to be signed in its name by its
under its corporate seal, this
Signed, sealed and delivered
in the presence of:
Surety
As to Principal
As to Surety
to
as Principal herein, has
and
under its corporate seal, and the said
as Surety herein, has caused
day of A.D., 19_
Principal -Contractor
Title
Attorney -in -Fact (Power -of -Attorney
to be Attached)
Resident Agent
00350-2
I
1
TO:
1
PROJECT DESCRIPTION:
NOTICE OF AWARD
The OWNER has considered the BID submitted by you for the above described WORK in
response to its Advertisement for Bids dated , 1996 and Instructions to Bidders.
You are hereby notified that your BID has been accepted in the amount of:
You are required by the Instructions to Bidders to execute the Contract and furnish the
required CONTRACTOR'S Performance BOND, Payment BOND, and certificates of insurance
within fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of this Notice to you.
If you fail to execute said Contract and to furnish said BONDS withing fifteen (15) days from
the date of this Notice, said OWNER will be entitled to consider all your rights arising of your BID
BOND. The OWNER will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by law.
You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this NOTICE OF AWARD to the
OWNER.
Dated this day of , 199_
Owner
By.
ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE
,ARKANSAS
Receipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby acknowledged
by
this the day of ,199___
By
I
I
I
11
I
I
F
I
I
I
Li
I
I
I
I
I
I
DOCUMENT 00500
CONTRACT
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into on the day of ,
19_, by and between herein called the
Contractor, and the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas, hereinafter called the Owner:
WITNESSETH:
That the Contractor, for the consideration hereinafter fully set out, hereby agrees with the Owner as
follows:
1. That the Contractor shall furnish all the materials, and perform all of the work in manner and
form as provided by the following enumerated Drawings, Specifications, and Documents, which
are attached hereto and made a part hereof, as if fully contained herein and are entitled
Hamestring Creek Lift Station , dated April. 1997.
Advertisement for Bids
Instructions to Bidders
Bid and acceptance thereof
Performance Bond
SHEET INDEX
Sheet No.
1
2
4
5
Payment Bond
General Conditions
Supplemental Conditions
Specifications
Drawings (See Sheet Index below)
Descri t7tiion
Cover
Lift Station Piping Plans and Sections
Lift Station Structural Plans and Sections
Details
Electrical
2. That the Owner hereby agrees to pay to the Contractor for the faithful performance of this
Agreement, subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Specifications or Bid, in
lawful money of the United States, the amount of
Dollars ($
3. The Work will be substantially completed within 112 days after the date when the Contract
Time commences to run as provided in Notice to Proceed, and completed and ready for final
payment in accordance with the General Conditions within 126 days after the date when the
Contract Time commences to run.
IFY972102 00500-I
I
[1
I
I
I
I
[1
I
I
I
[1
I
I
El
I
4. Liquidated Damages: Owner and Contractor recognize that time is of the essence of this
Agreement and the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the
times specified in above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the General
Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving the
actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of
requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay
(but not as a penalty) Contractor shall pay Owner Two hundred Dollars ($200.00) for each
day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3 for Substantial Completion, if
Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time
specified in Paragraph 3 above for final payment or any proper extension thereof granted by
Owner, Contractor shall pay Owner Two hundred Dollars ($200.00) for each day that expires
after the time specified in Paragraph 3 for completion and readiness for final payment.
5. That within 30 days of receipt of an approved payment request, the Owner shall make partial
payments to the Contractor on the basis of a duly certified and approved estimate of work
performed during the preceding calendar month by the Contractor, LESS the retainage
provided in the General Conditions, which is to be withheld by the Owner until all work
within a particular part has been performed strictly in accordance with this Agreement and
until such work has been accepted by the Owner.
6. That upon submission by the Contractor of evidence satisfactory to the Owner that all
payrolls, material bills, and other costs incurred by the Contractor in connection with the
construction of the work have been paid in full, final payment on account of this Agreement
shall be made within 60 days after the completion by the Contractor of all work covered by
this Agreement and the acceptance of such work by the Owner.
7. It is further mutually agreed between the parties hereto that if, at any time after the execution
of this Agreement and the Surety Bond hereto attached for its faithful performance and
payment, the Owner shall deem the Surety or Sureties upon such bond to be unsatisfactory or
if, for any reason such bond ceases to be adequate to cover the performance of the work, the
Contractor shall, at his expense, within 5 days after the receipt of notice from the Owner,
furnish an additional bond or bonds in such form and amount and with such Surety or
Sureties as shall be satisfactory to the Owner. In such event, no further payment to the
Contractor shall be deemed to be due under this Agreement until such new or additional
security for the faithful performance of the work shall be furnished in manner and form
satisfactory to the Owner.
8. No additional work or extras shall be done unless the same shall be duly authorized by
appropriate action by the Owner in writing.
' FY972102 00500-2
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement on the day and date
first above written, in three (3) counterparts, each of which shall, without proof or accounting for
the other counterpart be deemed an original Contract.
SEAL:
CONTRACTOR
WITNESSES:
Title
ATTEST:
Clerk
Approved as to form:
CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS
OWNER
By
Attorney for Owner
Fred Hanna, Mayor
FY972102 00500-3
Document 00600-1
Construction Performance Bond
Any singular
reference
to Contractor.
Surety.
Owner or other party shall be considered plural
where
applicable
CONTRACTOR (Name
and Address):
SURETY (Name and Principal Place
of Business):
OWNER (Name and Address):
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Date:
Amount:
Description (Name and Location):
BOND
Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date):
Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form:
I
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL
Company
Signature:
Name and Title:
(Corp. Seal)
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL
Company (Corp. Seal)
Signature:
Name and Title:
SURETY
Company (Corp Seal)
Signature:
Name and Title:
SURETY
Company (Corp Seal)
Signature:
Name and Title:
EJCDC No. 1910-28A (1984 Edition)
Prepared through the joint efforts of the Surety Association of America, EngineersJoint Contract Documents Committee, The Associated
General Contractors of America, American Institute of Architects, American Subcontractors Association, and the Associated Specialty
Contractors
' 00600-1-i
H
I
I
FT
I
I
LI
I
Li
I
I
I
1
I. The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves,
their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner
for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated
herein by reference.
2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and
the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to
participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3.1.
3. If there is no Owner Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond
shall arise after:
3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its
address described in Paragraph 10 below, that the Owner is
considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and
attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the
Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such
notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction
Contract lithe Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the
Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the
Construction Contract, but such agreement shall not waive the
Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor
Default; and
3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally
terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract. Such
Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days
after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as
provided in Subparagraph 3.1; and
3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price
to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction
Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction
Contract in accordance with the terms of the contract with the
Owner.
4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety
shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions:
4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to
perform and complete the Construction Contract; or
4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract
itself, through its agents or through independent contractors; or
4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors
acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and
completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract
to be prepared for execution by the Owner and the contractor
selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with
performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety
equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and
pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in
Paragraph 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price
incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default; or
4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion,
or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under
the circumstances:
I. After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be
liable to the Owner and as soon a practicable after the amount is
determined, tender payment to the Owner; or
2. Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing
reasons therefor.
S. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with
reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this
Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the
Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under
this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available
to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4 and
the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability,
in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to
enforce any remedy available to the Owner.
6. After the Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the
Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph
4.1, 4.2 or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner
shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction
Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be
greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the
limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner
of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on
the Construction Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for:
6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective
work and completion of the Construction Contract;
6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting
from the Contractor's Default, and resulting from the actions or
failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4; and
6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in
the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed
performance or non-performance of the Contractor.
7. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of
the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the
Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of
any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond
to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors,
administrators, or successors.
8. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of
time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders
and other obligations.
9. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted
in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the Work or
part of the Work is located and shall be instituted within two years after
Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working
or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations
under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of the Paragraph
are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to
sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
10. Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or
delivered to the address shown on the signature page.
1 I. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other
legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be
performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal
requirements shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming
to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated
herein. The intent is, that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond
and not as a common law bond.
12. DEFINITIONS
12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the
Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all
proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the
Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the
Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to
which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper
payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the
Construction Contract.
12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and
the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all the
Contract Documents and changes thereto.
12.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither
been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply
with the terms of the Construction Contract.
12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been
remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the
Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply
with the other terms thereof.
00600-1-2
11
I
C
1
F I
Document 00600-2
Construction Payment Bond
Any singular reference to Contractor. Surety Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
CONTRACTOR (Name and Address):
OWNER (Name and Address):
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Date:
Amount:
Description (Name and Location):
BOND
I
I
I
lI
Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date):
Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form:
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL
Company (Corp. Seal)
Signature:
Name and Title:
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL
Company (Corp. Seal)
Signature:
Name and Title:
SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business):
SURETY
Company (Corp Seal)
Signature:
Name and Title:
SURETY
Company (Corp Seal)
Signature:
Name and Title:
EJCDC No. 1910-28B (1984 Edition)
Prepared through the joint efforts of the Surety Association of America, EngineersJoint Contract Documents Committee, The Associated
General Contractors of America, American Institute of Architects, American Subcontractors Association, and the Associated Specialty
Contractors
' 00600-2-I
E
I
I
I
I
I
LI
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Li
I. The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves,
their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner
to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the
performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by
reference.
2. With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the
Contractor:
2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due
Claimants, and
2.2 Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from all
claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity who
furnished labor, materials or equipment for use in the
performance of the Construction Contract, provided the Owner
has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the
address described in paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens
or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or
suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no
Owner Default.
3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the
Contractor promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due.
4. The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants underthis Bond until:
4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with
Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address
described in paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to
the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond
and , with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim.
4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor:
I. Have furnished written notice to the Contractor and sent a
copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having
last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment
included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the
amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the
materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was
done or performed; and
2. Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the
Contractor, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the
above notice any communication from the Contractor by which
the Contractor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or
indirectly.; and
3. Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a
written notice to the Surety (at the address described in
paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner,
stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing
a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor.
5. If a notice required by paragraph 4 is given by the Owner to the
Contractor or to the Surety, that is sufficient compliance.
6. When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of paragraph 4, the
Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions:
6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner,
within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that
are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are
disputed.
6.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.
7. The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond,
and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in
good faith by the Surety.
8. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction
Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction contract and
to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond. By the
Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that
funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction
Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and the Surety
under this Bond, subject to the Owner's priority to use the funds for the
completion of the Work.
9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for
obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract.
The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any
Claimant under this Bond.
10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of
time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders
and other obligations.
I1. No suitor action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond
other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the
Work or part of the Work is located or after the expiration of one year from
the date (I) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Subparagraph
4.1 or Clause 4.2.3, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed
by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone
under the Construction Contract, whichever of (I) or (2) occurs first. If the
provisions of this paragraph arc void or prohibited by law, the minimum
period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of
the suit shall be applicable.
12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or
delivered to the address shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of
notice by the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor, however accomplished,
shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown
on the signature page.
13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other
legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be
performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal
requirements shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming
to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated
herein. The intent is, that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond
and not as a common law bond.
14. Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential
beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this
Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.
15 DEFINITIONS
15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with
the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to
furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance
of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include
without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment'
that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone
service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract,
architectural and engineering services required for performance
of the work of the Contractor and Contractor's sub contractors,
and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted
in thejurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were
furnished.
15.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and
the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all the
Contract Documents and changes thereto.
15.3 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been
remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the
Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply
with the other terms thereof.
I
00600-2-2
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDA kIT
STATE OF_
COUNTY OF
The undersigned, being duly sworn on oath, deposes and says that he is
of , the Contractor for
(Company Name)
designated as Project, situated at , owned by,
and that all parties who have furnished labor, material, or both or any other items to the undersigned
for use on the said work and all parties having contracts or sub -contracts with the undersigned for
specific portion of said work have been paid in full with the following exception:
(Officer)
The undersigned further states
that there are no other contracts
or obligations for labor or
materials outstanding which were used
in completing
this Project.
The undersigned makes this affidavit for the purpose of procuring from the Owner a final
payment upon this Contract for all work completed in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications of the Owner.
Signed this day of , 19
Subscribed and Sworn to before me
this day of ____________,19___
By
Notary Public
Contractor
My commission expires the day of
19
NOTICE TO PROCEED
TO: DATE:
Ia:Z�A)oI�I[IA
You are hereby notified to commence WORK in accordance with the Contract dated
on or before . and you are to Substantially Complete the WORK
within _ consecutive calendar days thereafter and have the Work complete and ready for final
payment within _ calendar days thereafter. The date for Substantial Completion is therefore
and the date for final completion is therefore
ARKANSAS
Owner
0
, Mayor
ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE
Receipt of the above NOTICE TO PROCEED is hereby acknowledged by
this the day of , 199_.
By _
Title
(Project)
,ARKANSAS
MCE PROJECT NO.
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
(Date)
A. ATTENDANCE:
REPRESENTING
1. Owner:
2. Contractor:
3. Representatives of Funding Agencies:
4. Engineer: McClelland Consulting Engineers, Inc.
1. Contract Amount:
2. Notice to Proceed dated:
3. Number of days for construction:
PHONE NUMBER
4. Completion Date: Substantial Completion Days and Final Completion
_ Days.
5. Liquidated Damages: $ Per Day
6. Approval of documents by Owners attorney dated:
7. Submittal of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
8. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement.
(Note: Contract and Bonds Dated Same Day)
9. Distribution of Contract Documents.
10. Designation of responsible personnel.
11. Submittal of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and
progress schedule.
12. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions,
applications for payments, bid requests, change orders, and Contract closeout
procedures.
13. Responsibilities of Contractor.
14. Responsibilities of Owner and Engineer.
15. Staking of Work.
16. Construction Observation.
17. Labor Requirements.
18. Rights -of -Way and Easements.
19. Other items as required by funding agencies.: N/A
20. Use of premises by Contractor.
21. Owner's requirements.
22. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.
23. Temporary utilities provided by Owner/Contractor.
24. Security and housekeeping procedures.
25. Procedures for testing; what and when, Owner/Contractor Cost.
26. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
27. Requirements for startup of equipment/operations and maintenance manuals.
28. Inspection and acceptance of all work and equipment put into service.
29. OSHA Safety Requirements:
30. Other:
I
I
DOCUMENT 00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ITABLE OF CONTENT
ARTICLE NUMBER AND TITLE PAGE NUMBER
1
t. AS APPROVED.........................................................................I
' 2. AS SHOWN, AND AS INDICATED........................................................I
3. BIDDER...............................................................................I
4. CONTRACT...........................................................................I
' 5. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS............................................................... 2
6. CONTRACTOR.........................................................................2
7. DAYS.................................................................................2
8. DRAWINGS...........................................................................2
9. ENGINEER............................................................................2
10. NOTICE...............................................................................2
II. OR EQUAL............................................................................3
12. OWNER...............................................................................3
13. PLANS (See Drawings)...................................................................3
14. SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................3
15. NOTICE TO PROCEED..................................................................�
16. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ....... 4
17. WORK................................................................................4
18. INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .................................................... 4
19. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS.......................................................4
' 20. ALTERATIONS - CHANGES IN WORK ....................................................
21. SUB -SURFACE CONDITIONS FOUND DIFFERENT..........................................5
' 22. VERIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.............................................5
23. DOCUMENTS TO BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE .............................................. 6
' 24. ADDITIONAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .................................................. 6
25. OWNERSHIP OF DRAWINGS ............................... 0 ............................ 6
' 26. AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER......................................................... 7
ARTICLE NUMBER AND TITLE PAGE NUMBER
27. DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER ....................................... 7
28. REJECTED MATERIAL..................................................................8
29. UNNOTICED DEFECTS..................................................:..............8
30. RIGHT TO RETAIN IMPERFECT WORK ................................................... 8
31•. LINES AND GRADES...................................................................8
a
32. SHOP'DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE..............................................10
33. ADDITIONAL DETAIL DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS..................................11
34. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR......................................................... I 1
35. SUBCONTRACTING................................................................... II
36. INSURANCE AND LIABILITY....................................................12
37. INDEMNITY..........................................................................15
38. TAXES AND CHARGES..................................................................15
39.. ORDINANCES, PERMITS, AND LICENSES................................................I5
40. SUPERINTENDENCE ................................................................. 16
41. RECEPTION OF ENGINEER'S DIRECTIONS...............................................16
42. SANITATION.........................................................................16
43. EMPLOYEES.........................................................................'16
44. PROJECT MEETINGS..................................................................16
45. SAFETY..............................................................................17
46. CONTRACTOR'S TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT...............................................17
47. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY................................................18
48. RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR TO ACT IN EMERGENCY ..............................18
49. MATERIALS AND APPLIANCES.........................................................18
50. CONTRACTORS' AND MANUFACTURERS' COMPLIANCE WITH STATE SAFETY, OSHA, AND OTHER
CODE REQUIREMENTS................................................................ 19
51. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS.........................................................19
52. TESTS, SAMPLES, AND INSPECTIONS .................................................. 19
53. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS............................................................20
54. CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT ......................20
II
ARTICLE NUMBER AND TITLE
55. CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK FOUND DURING WARRANTY PERIOD ................. 20
' 56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
' 63.
64.
65.
' 66.
67.
' 68.
' 69.
70.
' 71.
72.
' 73.
' 74.
75.
' 76.
77.
' 78
' 79
PAGE NUMBER
BEGINNING OF THE WORK............................................................21
SCHEDULES AND PROGRESS REPORTS .................................................
21
PROSECUTION OF THE WORK..........................................................
22
ASSIGNMENT........................................................................22
OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK.........................................................22
OWNER'S RIGHT TO TRANSFER EMPLOYMENT..........................................23
OWNER'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND OR TERMINATE WORK...................................23
DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME.....................................................25
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES...............................................................26
OTHERCONTRACTS..................................................................26
USEOF PREMISES....................................................................27
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE...........................................27
PERFORMANCE TESTING..............................................................27
OWNER'S USE OF PORTIONS OF THE WORK.............................................27
CUTTING AND PATCHING.............................................................28
CLEANINGUP........................................................................28
PAYMENT FOR CHANGE ORDERS ......................................................
28
PARTIALPAYMENTS..................................................................31
CLAIMS..............................................................................33
NOTICE OF CLAIM FOR DELAY ............................................
4 ........... 33
RELEASE OF LIENS OR CLAIMS........................................................34
FINAL PAYMENT.....................................................................34
NO WAIVER OF RIGHTS...............................................................34
ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT CONSTITUTES RELEASE ..............................
34
I
I
DOCUMENT 00700
' GENERAL CONDITIONS
' These General Conditions contain contractual -legal Articles that establish the requirements and
conditions governing responsibility, policy, and procedures that apply during the construction and
warranty period. This part of the Contract Documents is pre-printed. Any modifications to the
' following Articles that are special to the Project under consideration will be made in the
Supplementary Conditions. Requirements and conditions that have special significance to the
Contract for the contemplated Work on this Project are as set forth in the remaining Sections of these
Contract Documents.
DEFINITIONS
' Wherever in the Contract Documents the following terms are used, the intent and meaning shall be
interpreted as follows:
I. AS APPROVED
The words "as approved", unless otherwise qualified, shall be understood to be followed
by the words "by the Engineer".
' 2. AS SHOWN, AND AS INDICATED
' The words "as shown" and "as indicated" shall be understood to be followed by the
words "on the Drawings".
' 3. BIDDER
The person or persons, partnership, firm, or corporation submitting a Bid for the Work
' contemplated.
4. CONTRACT
' The "Contract" is the written agreement covering the performance of the Work and the
furnishing of labor, materials, incidental services, tools, and equipment in the
'
construction of the Work. It includes supplemental agreements amending or extending
the Work contemplated and which may be required to complete the Work in a
' substantial and acceptable manner. Supplemental agreements are written agreements
covering alterations, amendments, or extensions to the Contract and include Contract
Change Orders.
I
' 00700-I
u
5. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS '
The "Contract Documents" consist of the Bidding Requirements, Contract forms,
Conditions of the Contract, the Specifications, and the Drawings, including all
modifications thereof incorporated into the Documents before their execution, and
including all other requirements incorporated by specific reference thereto. These form
the Contract.
6. CONTRACTOR I '
The person or persons, partnership, firm, or corporation who enters into the Contract
awarded him by the Owner.
7. DAYS '
• Unless otherwise specifically stated, the tern "days" will be understood to mean
• calendar days. '
8. DRAWINGS
The term "Drawings" refers to the official Drawings, profiles, cross sections, elevations,
details, and other working drawings and supplementary drawings, or reproductions
thereof, sealed by the Engineer, which show the location, character, dimensions, and '
details of the Work to be performed. Drawings may either be bound in the same book
as the Project Manual or bound separately and are a part of the Contract Documents, I
regardless of the method of binding.
9. ENGINEERI
The person or organization identified as such in the Contract. The term "Engineer"
means the Engineer or his authorized representative.
10. NOTICE
The term "notice" or the requirement to notify, as used in the Contract Documents or
applicable state or federal statutes, shall signify a written communication delivered in
person or by certified or registered mail to the individual, or to a member of the firm,
or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended. Certified or.registered mail
shall be addressed to the last business address known to him who gives the notice.
L
I
00700-2 ,
I
1 I . OR EQUAL
I
I
I
I
The term "or equal" shall be understood to indicate that the "equal" product is the same
or better than the product named in function, performance, reliability,quality, and
general configuration. Determination of equality in reference to the Project design
requirements will be made by the Engineer. Such "equal" products shall not be
purchased or installed by the Contractor without the Engineer's written approval.
12. OWNER
The person, organization, or public body identified as such in the Contract.
13. PLANS (See Drawings).
14. SPECIFICATIONS
' Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions
of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards, and workmanship as applied
to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Where standard specifications, such as those of ASTM, AASHTO, etc., have been
' referred to, the applicable portions of such standard specifications shall become a part
of these Contract Documents.
Where portions of the Work traverse or cross federal, state, county, or local highways,
roads, streets, or railroads, and the agency in control of such property has established
standard specifications governing items of Work that differ from these Specifications,
the most stringent requirements shall apply.
The Contractor shall comply with all regulations and requirements of the State Highway
Department and the City and County Road Departments wherever the Work traverses
or crosses state, city, or county roads.
' 15. NOTICE TO PROCEED
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor (with a copy to the Engineer)
fixing the date on which the Contract time will commence to run and on which the
Contractor shall start to perform his obligation under the Contract. The Notice to
' Proceed shall be given within 30 days following execution of the Contract by the
Owner.
I
I
' 00700-3
16. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
"Substantial completion" shall be that degree of completion of the Project, or a defined
portion of the Project, sufficient to provide the Owner, at his discretion, the full-time
use of the Project or defined portion of the Project for the purposes for which it was
intended. '
Such substantial completion shall not relieve Contractor from liquidated damages
should the Owner have added costs after the completion date, i.e., if additional
construction observation, interest paid, loss of revenue, or other expenses continue to
be charged to the Owner.
17. WORK '
The word "Work" within these Contract Documents shall include all material, labor, ,
and tools; all appliances, machinery, transportation, and appurtenances necessary to
perform and complete the Contract; and such additional items not specifically indicated
or described which can be reasonably inferred as belonging to the item described or
indicated and as required by good practice to provide a complete and satisfactory
system or structure. As used herein, "provide" shall be understood to mean "provide '
complete in place", that is, "furnish and install".
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS -
18. INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by one shall be as ,
binding as if called for by all. The intent of the Documents is to include all Work
(except specific items to be furnished by the Owner) necessary for completion of the
Contract. Materials or Work described in words which so applied have a well-known
technical and trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards.
19. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
Any discrepancies or omissions found in the Contract Documents shall be reported to ,
the Engineer immediately. The Engineer will clarify discrepancies or omissions, in
writing, within a reasonable time.
In resolving inconsistencies among two or more Sections of the Contract Documents,
precedence shall be given in the following order:
CONTRACT
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
• GENERAL CONDITIONS
DRAWINGS
00700-4
C
Figure dimensions on Drawings shall take precedence over scale dimensions. Detailed
Drawings shall take precedence over general Drawings. It is understood and agreed that
the Work shall be performed and completed according to the true spirit, meaning, and
intent of these Documents.
' 20. ALTERATIONS - CHANGES IN WORK
' The Owner, without notice to the Sureties and without invalidating the Contract, may
order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract by altering, adding
to, or deducting from the Work, the Contract being adjusted accordingly. All such
' Work shall be executed under the conditions of the original Contract, except as
specifically adjusted at the time of ordering such change.
' In giving instructions, the Engineer may order minor changes in the Work not involving
extra cost and not inconsistent with the purposes of the Project, but otherwise, except
' in an emergency endangering life or property, additions or deductions from the Work
shall be performed only in pursuance of an approved Change Order from the Owner,
signed or countersigned by the Engineer, or a Change Order from the Engineer stating
' that the Owner has authorized the deduction, addition, or change, and no claim for
additional payment shall be valid unless so ordered.
' If the Work is reduced by alterations, such action shall not constitute a claim for
damages based on loss of anticipated profits.
21. SUB -SURFACE CONDITIONS FOUND DIFFERENT
Should the Contractor encounter sub -surface and/or latent conditions at the site
materially differing from those shown on the Drawings or indicated in the
Specifications, the Contractor shall immediately give notice to the Engineer of such
conditions before they are disturbed. The Engineer will thereupon promptly investigate
the conditions, and if the Engineer finds that they materially differ from those shown
on the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications, the Engineer will at once make such
' changes in the Drawings and/or the Specifications as he may find necessary, any
increase or decrease of cost resulting from such changes to be adjusted in the manner
provided in the Paragraph titled "Changes in Work."
' 22. VERIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
' The Contractor shall thoroughly examine and become familiar with all of the various
parts of these Contract Documents and determine the nature and location of the Work,
the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the
Work under this Contract.
I
00700-5
I
Failure to make an examination necessary for this determination shall not release the
Contractor from the obligations of this Contract. The Contractor wan -ants that no '
verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner or
with the Engineer either before or after the execution of this Contract, has affected or
modified any of the terms or obligations herein contained.
23. DOCUMENTS TO BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE
The Contractor shall keep one copy of the Contract Documents on the job site, in good ,
order, available to the Engineer and to his representatives.
The Contractor shall maintain on a daily basis at the job site, and make available to the '
Engineer on request, one current record set of the Drawings which have been accurately
marked up to indicate all modifications in the completed Work that differ from the '
design information shown on the Drawings.
Upon substantial completion of the Work, the Contractor shall give the Engineer one
complete set of marked up record Drawings.
Failure of the Contractor to submit accurate Record Drawings to the Engineer will be
adequate justification for postponement of the Final Inspection and Final Payment.
24. ADDITIONAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ,
The Engineer will furnish to the Contractor on request and free of charge, three copies
of the Project Manual and three sets of full-size Drawings. Additional copies of the
Project Manual and the Drawings may be obtained on request by paying the price as
shown in the Invitation to Bid for the Contract Documents.
25. OWNERSHIP OF DRAWINGS
All Drawings, Plans, Specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Engineer and
the Owner are their property. They are not to be used on other work and, with the
exception of the signed Contract set, are to be returned to them on request at the
completion of the Work. Any reuse of these materials without specific written
verification or adaptation by the Engineer and the Owner will be at the risk of the user ,
and without liability or legal expense to the Engineer and the Owner.
Such user shall hold the Engineer and the Owner harmless from any and all damages,
including reasonable attorneys' fees, from any and all claims arising from any such '
reuse. Any such verification and adaptation by the Engineer and the Owner will entitle
the Engineer to further compensation at rates to be agreed upon by the user and the '
Engineer and the Owner. All models are the property of the Owner.
I
00700-6 1
I
THE ENGINEER
' 26. AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER
The Engineer shall be the Owner's representative during the construction period. His
authority and responsibility shall be limited to the provisions set forth in these Contract
Documents. The Engineer shall have the authority to reject Work and material which
' does not conform to the Contract Documents. However, neither the Engineer's
authority to act under this provision, nor any decision made by him in good faith either
to exercise or not to exercise such authority, shall give rise to any duty or responsibility
of the Engineer to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, their respective Sureties, any of
their agents or employees, or any other person performing any of the Work.
27. DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER
The Engineer will make periodic visits to the site of the Project to observe the progress
'
and quality of the Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in
accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents. He shall not be required to make
' comprehensive or continuous inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work, and
he shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Visits
' and observations made by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation
to conduct comprehensive inspections of the Work and to furnish materials and perform
acceptable Work, and to provide adequate safety precautions, in conformance with the
intent of the Contract.
The Engineer will make decisions, in writing, on all claims of the Owner or the
' Contractor arising from interpretation or execution of the Contract Documents. Such
decision shall be necessary before the Contractor can receive additional money under
the terms of the Contract. Changes in Work ordered by the Engineer will be made in
compliance with the Article titled, ALTERATIONS - CHANGES IN WORK.
One or more construction observers may be assigned to observe the Work for
compliance with the Contract Documents and to act in matters of construction under
this Contract. It is understood that such Construction observers shall have the power
' to issue instructions and make decisions within the limitations of the authority of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable assistance required by the
Engineer or construction observer for proper review of the Work.
LI
I
I
00700-7
I
Construction observers shall not have the power or authority to delete, increase, modify
or otherwise change the requirements of the Contract Documents. The above -
mentioned
observation shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to conduct
comprehensive inspections of the Work and to furnish materials and perform acceptable
Work and to provide adequate safety precautions, in conformance with the intent of the ,
Contract.
28. REJECTED MATERIAL
Any material condemned or rejected by the Engineer or his authorized construction
observer because of nonconformity with the Contract Documents shall be removed at
once from the vicinity of the Work by the Contractor at his own expense, and the same
shall not be used on the Work.
29. UNNOTICED DEFECTS
Any defective Work or material that may be discovered by the Engineer before the final
acceptance of Work, or before final payment has been made, or during the guarantee
period, shall be removed and replaced by Work and materials which shall conform to '
the provisions of the Contract- Documents. Failure on the part of the Engineer to
condemn or reject bad or inferior Work or materials shall not be construed to imply
acceptance of such Work or materials. The Owner shall reserve and retain all of its
rights and remedies at law against the Contractor and its surety for correction of any and
all latent defects discovered after the guarantee period.
30. RIGHT TO RETAIN IMPERFECT WORK I
If any part or portion of the Work done or material furnished under this Contract shall
prove defective and not in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, and if the
imperfection in the same shall not be of sufficient magnitude or importance as to make
the Work dangerous or unsuitable, or if the removal of such Work will create conditions
which are dangerous or undesirable, the Owner shall have the right and authority to
retain such Work but shall -make such deductions in the final payment therefore as may
be just and reasonable. The Owner shall also have the option to require, at no added
cost to the Owner, extended warranties, maintenance bonds, or other remedies to
provide for repair or reconstruction of imperfect Work.
31. LINES AND GRADES
The Contractor shall stake -out Work for this Contract and set the lines and grades
necessary to complete the Work and shall keep the Engineer informed a reasonable time
in advance of the times and places at which he wishes to do Work in order that the
1
Engineer
may
review the lines and grades set by
the Contractor
and
in order that the
Engineer
may
make the necessary measurements
for payment to
the
Contractor.
00700-8 1
I
All stakes, marks, and other information shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor,
and in case of their careless or unnecessary destruction or removal by him or his
employees, such stakes, marks, and other information will be replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
Figured dimensions, when given in the Drawings, shall be accurately followed, even
though they may differ from scaled measurements. No Work shown on the Drawings,
' the dimensions of which are not figured, shall be executed until instructions have been
obtained from the Engineers as to the dimensions to be used. Large-scale and full-size
drawings shall be followed in preference to small-scale drawings. The Engineer will
provide the Contractor with bench marks to be used to establish grades and will also
provide a baseline to be used to establish the proper lines. All Work done under this
Contract shall be done to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. The Contractor
' shall stake -out Work for this Contract and set the lines and grades necessary to
complete the Work and shall keep the Engineer informed a reasonable time in advance
I. of the times and places at which he wishes to do Work in order that the Engineer may
review the lines and grades set by the Contractor and in order that the Engineer may
make the necessary measurements for payment to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall furnish without charge competent persons from his force and such
tools, stakes, surveying instruments, and other materials as the Engineer may require
for reviewing the Contractor's stake -out of the Work and in making measurements for
payment estimates or for surveys to establish temporary or permanent reference marks
in connection with said Work.
Any Work done without lines, grades, and levels being reviewed by the Engineer, or
other representative of the Engineer, may be ordered removed and replaced at the
' Contractor's cost and expense. The Contractor shall carefully preserve all monuments,
bench marks, reference points, and stakes, and in case of willful or careless destruction
' of the same, he will be charged with the resulting expense of replacement and shall be
responsible for any mistakes or loss of time that may be caused by their unnecessary
loss or disturbance. In the event that the stakes and marks placed by the Engineer are
destroyed through carelessness on the part of the Contractor, and that the destruction
of these stakes and marks causes a delay in the Work, the Contractor shall have no
claim for damages or extensions of time. In the case of any permanent monuments or
' bench marks which must of necessity be removed or disturbed in the construction of the
• Work, the Contractor shall carefully protect and preserve the same until they can be
properly referenced and relocated. The Contractor shall also furnish at his own expense
' such materials and assistance as are necessary for the proper replacement of monuments
or bench marks that have been moved or destroyed.
I
I
' 00700-9
I
32. SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE i
The Contractor shall submit a sufficient number of copies to allow the Engineer to
retain four copies (2 for himself; 2 for the Owner) for review, such.shop drawings,
electrical diagrams, and catalog cuts for fabricated items and manufactured items
(including mechanical and electrical equipment) required for construction, except as
noted below.
Should the Contractor fail to submit acceptable shop drawings on the second submittal, •'
one copy will be returned to him and the cost of the Engineer's time to review
subsequent submittals on the unacceptable item will be deducted from the Contractor's '
monthly payment invoice. Shop drawings shall be submitted in sufficient time to allow
the Engineer not less than 20 regular working days per submittal for examining the shop
drawings. '
These shop drawings shall be accurate, distinct, and complete and. shall contain all
required information, including satisfactory identification of items, units, and
assemblies in relation to the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, shop drawings shall be submitted only by '
the Contractor, who shall indicate by a signed stamp on the shop drawings, or other
approved means, that he (the Contractor) has checked the shop drawings, and that the ,
Work shown is in accordance with Contract requirements and has been checked for
dimensions and relationship with Work of all other trades involved.
The practice of submitting incomplete or unchecked shop drawings for the Engineer to ,
correct or finish will not be acceptable, and shop drawings which, in the opinion of the
Engineer, clearly indicate that they have not been checked by the Contractor will be
considered as not complying with the.intent of the Contract Documents and will be
returned to the Contractor for resubmission in the proper form.
When the shop drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer, two (2) sets of submittals
will be returned to the Contractor appropriately stamped. If major changes or
corrections are necessary, the shop drawing may be rejected and one (1) set will be ,
returned to the Contractor with such changes or corrections indicated, and the
Contractor shall correct and resubmit the shop drawings in quadruplicate, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer. No changes shall be made by the Contractor to
resubmitted shop drawings other than those changes indicated by the Engineer, unless
such changes are clearly described in a letter accompanying the resubmitted shop I
drawings.
I
I
00700 -10 '
I
The review of such shop drawings and catalog cuts by the Engineer shall not relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for correctness of dimensions, fabrication details, and
' space requirements or for deviations from the Contract Drawings or Specifications
unless the Contractor has called attention to such deviations in writing by a letter
accompanying the shop drawings and the Engineer approves the change or deviation
in writing at the time of submission; nor shall review by the Engineer relieve the
Contractor from the responsibility for errors in the shop drawings. When the Contractor
' does call such deviations to the attention of the Engineer, the Contractor shall state in
his letter whether or not such deviations involve any deduction or extra cost adjustment.
' 33. ADDITIONAL DETAIL DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS
The Engineer will furnish, with reasonable promptness, additional instructions by
' means of drawings or otherwise, if, in the Engineers opinion, such are required for the
proper execution of the Work. All such drawings and instructions will be consistent
with the Contract Documents, true developments thereof, and reasonably inferable
' therefrom.
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEES
34. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall perform all Work under this Contract as an Independent Contractor
and shall not be considered as an agent of the Owner or of the Engineer, nor shall the
' Contractor's subcontractors or employees be subagents of the Owner or of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall employee only employees who are competent and skillful in their
' respective line of work, and local labor shall be given preference. Whenever the
Engineer or the Owner notify the Contractor that any person on this work is, in their
opinion, incompetent, disorderly, or refuses to carry out the provisions of this Contract,
or uses threatening or abusive language to any person representing the Owner on the
work or is otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be immediately discharged from
the Project and shall not be re-employed thereon except with the consent of the
' Engineer by the Owner.
35. SUBCONTRACTING
Within 30 days after the execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer the names of all subcontractors proposed for the Work, including the names
of any subcontractors that were submitted with the Bid. The Contractor shall not
employ any subcontractors that the Engineer may object to as lacking capability to
' properly perform Work of the type and scope anticipated. No changes will be allowed
from the approved subcontractor list without written approval of the Engineer.
I
' 00700 - 1 1
• The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and
omissions of his subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed '
by them as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him.
Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation
between any subcontractor and the Owner. '
36. INSURANCE AND LIABILITY
A. GENERAL ,
The Contractor shall provide (from insurance companies acceptable to the Owner) the
insurance coverage designated hereinafter and pay all costs.
Before execution of the Contract, Contractor shall furnish the Owner with complete
copies of all certificates of insurance specified herein showing the type, amount, class
of operations covered, effective dates, and date of expiration of policies. Each
certificate shall contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not ,
be canceled, materially changed, or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior
written notice has been given to the Owner. '
In case of the breach of any provision of this Article, the Owner, at his option, may take
out and maintain, at the expense of the Contractor, such insurance as the Owner may
deem proper and may deduct the cost of such insurance from any monies which may
be due or become due the Contractor under this Contract.
All insurance contracts and certificates shall be executed by a licensed resident agent '
of the insurance company, having his place of business in the State of Arkansas, and in
all ways complying with the insurance laws of the State of Arkansas. Further, the said
insurance company shall be duly licensed and qualified to do business in the State of
Arkansas.
B. CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not execute the Contract or commence Work under this Contract
until he has obtained all the insurance required hereunder and such insurance has been
reviewed and approved by the Owner, nor shall the Contractor allow any subcontractor
to commence Work on his subcontract until insurance specified below has been
obtained. Review of the insurance by the Owner shall not relieve or decrease the
liability of the Contractor hereunder.
C. COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
The Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Contract the statutory Workmen's
Compensation, in addition, Employer's Liability Insurance in an amount not less than
$100,000 for each occurrence, for all of his employees to be engaged in Work on the
Project under this Contract and, in case any such Work is sublet, the Contractor shall
00700-12 '
I
LJ
I
require the subcontractor similarly to provide Workmen's Compensation and
Employer's Liability Insurance for all of the latter's employees to be engaged in such
Work. Where Work under this Contract includes any water or navigational exposure,
coverage shall be included to cover the Federal Longshoremen's and Harborworker's
Act and the Federal Jones Act when applicable. Employer's Liability Insurance shall
be extended to include waiver of subrogation to the Owner.
' D. GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE
I
I
I
I
The Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Contract such independent
contractor's general liability, completed operations and products liability, and
automobile liability insurance as will provide coverage for claims for damages for
personal injury, including accidental death, as well as for claims for property damage,
which may arise directly or indirectly from performance of the Work under this
Contract. The general liability policy should also specifically ensure the contractual
liability assumed by the Contractor under Article Indemnification.
Coverage for property damage shall be on a "broad form" basis with no exclusions for
"X, C, and U." The certificate of insurance shall explicitly waive X, C, and U
exclusions. Amount of insurance to be provided shall be as shown below:
1) Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
General Aggregate: Not less than $2,000,000
Completed Operations Aggregate: Not less than $2,000,000
Each Occurrence of Personal Injury or Property Damage: Not less than
$1,000,000 Combined Single Limit
2) Contractor's Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
Shall include Personal Injury and Property Damage coverage for "Any Auto",
"Hired Autos", and "Non -Owned Auto" at a Combined Single Limit of not less
than $1,000,000.
3) Contractor's Excess Umbrella Policy: $1,000,000 limit of liability policy shall
be provided.
' In the event any Work under this Contract is performed by a subcontractor, the
Contractor shall be responsible for any liability directly or indirectly arising out of the
Work performed under this Contract by a subcontractor, which liability is not covered
' by the subcontractor's insurance.
The Contractor's and any subcontractor's general liability and automobile liability
' insurance policies shall include the Owner and Engineer, their officers, agents, and
employees as additional insureds for any claims arising out of Work performed under
this Contract. Certificates of insurance shall explicitly name the Owner and Engineer
' as additional insureds. Inclusion of either party as "certificate holder" does not meet
this requirement.
00700-13
C
E.
F
PROPERTY INSURANCE
Unless otherwise modified'. in the Supplementary Conditions, the Contractor shall
secure and maintain during the life of this Contract, property insurance upon the Work
at the site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof. This insurance shall:
1) include the interests of the Contractor, subcontractors, and the Owner as such
interests may appear; .
2) be written on a Builder's Risk "all risk" or open peril or special causes of loss
policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the
Work, temporary facilities, falsework, and Work in transit. The policy shall insure
against at least the following perils: fire, lightning, theft, vandalism and malicious
mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal occasioned by enforcement of Laws and
Regulations, water damage, and other such perils as may be specifically required by
the Supplementary Conditions or Basic Requirements;
3) include expenses incurred in the repair, replacement, redesign, or reinspection of
any insured property; and
4) cover materials and equipment stored at the site, or at another location that was
agreed to in writing by the Owner, prior to being incorporated in the Work.
OWNER'S AND CONTRACTOR'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE (OCP
INSURANCE)
The Contractor shall, at his expense, provide the Owner with a separate OCP Insurance
Policy naming the Owner as the Insured and the Engineer as Additional Insured under
that policy, said policy to protect said parties from claims which may arise from
operations under the Contract. It is understood that the coverage shall apply to all
authorized representatives of the said parties. The limits of policy coverage shall be:
General Aggregate: Not less than $2,000,000
Each Occurrence of Personal Injury or Property Damage: Not less than $1,000,000
Combined Single Limit
I
I
I
I
I
[1
_I
I
I
I
I
G. INSURANCE COVERAGE FOR SPECIAL CONDITIONS
When the construction is to be accomplished within a public or private right-of-way
requiring special insurance coverage, the Contractor shall conform to the particular
requirements and provide the required insurance. The Contractor shall include in his
liability policy all endorsements that the said authority may require for the protection
of the authority, its officers, agents, and employees. Insurance coverage for special
conditions, when required, shall be provided as set forth in the Supplementary
Conditions.
H
I
00700-14
C
H
H. NO PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS
In carrying out any of the provisions hereof in exercising any authority granted by the
Contract, there will be no personal liability upon any public official.
37. INDEMNITY
' The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Engineer, and their agents
and employees from and against damages, losses, and expenses including attorneys' fees, up
to the amount of the Contract price, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the
Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable to bodily injury,
sickness, disease, or death, or to injury or to destruction of tangible property (other than the
Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (2) is caused in whole or in part
'
by any act or omission of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, provided that
' such claims, damages, losses, and expenses are not approximately caused by the negligence of
any indemnitee in the design, or by the sole negligence of any indemnitee in the inspection of
the Work that is the subject of this construction Contract.
' In any and all claims against the Owner, the Engineer, or any of their agents or employees by
any employee of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by
' any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under this Article shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of
damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any subcontractor under
Workmen's Compensation Acts, Disability Benefit Acts, or other Employee Benefit Acts.
' 38. TAXES AND CHARGES
The Contractor shall withhold and pay any and all sales and use taxes, including any and all
' change of taxes thereof, and all withholding taxes, whether state or federal, and pay all Social
Security charges and also all State Unemployment Compensation charges, and pay or cause to
be withheld, as the case may be, any and all taxes, charges, or fees or sums whatsoever, which
are now or may hereafter be required to be paid or withheld under any laws.
39. ORDINANCES, PERMITS, AND LICENSES
' The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed of all local ordinances, as well as state and
federal laws, which in any manner affect the Work herein specified. The Contractor shall at
all times comply with said ordinances, laws, and regulations, and protect and indemnify the
Owner, the Engineer and their respective employees, and its officers and agents against any
claim or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such laws, ordinances, or
regulations up to the amount of the Contract Price. All permits, licenses, and inspection fees
necessary for prosecution and completion of the Work shall be secured and paid for by the
Contractor, unless otherwise specified.
H
00700-15
H
The Contractor shall observe and comply with all applicable local, state, and federal
occupational safety and health regulations during the prosecution of Work under this Contract.
In addition, full compliance -by the Contractor with the U. S. Department of Labor's
Occupational Safety and Health Standards, as established in Public Law 91-596, will be
required under the terms of this Contract.
40. SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall keep on the Work, during its progress, competent supervisory personnel.
The Contractor shall designate, in writing, before starting Work, one authorized representative
who shall have complete authority to represent and to act for the Contractor. The Contractor
shall give efficient supervision to the Work, using his best skill and attention. The Contractor
shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, and procedures, and
for providing adequate safety precautions and coordinating all portions of the Work under the
Contract. It is specifically understood and agreed that the Engineer, its employees and agents,
shall not have control or charge of and shall not be responsible for the construction means,
methods, techniques, procedures, or for providing adequate safety precautions in connection
with the Work under the Contract.
Li
I
I
I
I
I
41. RECEPTION OF ENGINEER'S DIRECTIONS
The superintendent, or other duly authorized representative of the Contractor, shall represent
the Contractor in all directions given to him by the Engineer. Such directions of major
importance will be confirmed in writing. Any direction will be so confirmed, in each case, on
written request from the Contractor.
42. SANITATION
Sanitary conveniences conforming to state and local codes shall be erected and maintained by
the Contractor at all times while workers are employed on the Work. The sanitary convenience
facilities shall be as approved by the Engineer.
43. EMPLOYEES
The Contractor shall employ only men or women who are competent and skillful in their
respective line of work. Whenever the Engineer or Owner shall notify the Contractor that any
person on the Workis, in their opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly or refuses to
carry out the provisions of this Contract or uses threatening or abusive language to any person
representing the Owner on the Work, or is otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be
immediately discharged from the Project and shall not be re-employed thereon except with the
consent of the Engineer by the Owner.
I
I
I
J
H
H
I
44. PROJECT MEETINGS I
The Engineer may conduct Project meetings, as he deems necessary, for the purposes of
discussing and resolving matters concerning the various elements of the Work. Time and place
for these meetings and the names of persons required to be present shall be as directed by the
C'
00700-16
I
Engineer. Contractor shall comply with these attendance requirements and shall also require
his subcontractors to comply.
45. SAFETY
' The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site,
including safety of all persons (including employees) and property during performance of the
' Work. This requirement shall apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours.
Safety provisions shall conform to U. S. Department of Labor (OSHA); the State Labor
Department Laws; all other applicable federal, state, county, and local laws, ordinances, and
codes; the requirements set forth below; and any regulations that may be detailed in other parts
of these Documents. Where any of these are in conflict, the more stringent requirement shall
be followed. The Contractor's failure to thoroughly familiarize himself with the
I. aforementioned safety provisions shall not relieve him from compliance with the obligations
and penalties set forth herein.
' The Contractor shall develop and maintain for the duration of this Contract, a safety program
that will effectively incorporate and implement all required safety provisions. The Contractor
shall appoint an employee who is qualified and authorized to supervise and enforce compliance
'with the safety program.
The duty of the Engineer to conduct construction review of the Contractor's performance is not
intended to include a review or approval of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety supervisor,
the safety program, or any safety measures taken in, on, or near the construction site.
The Contractor, as a part of his safety program, shall maintain at his office or other well-known
place at the job site, safety equipment applicable to the Work as prescribed by the
' aforementioned authorities, all articles necessary for giving first aid to the injured, and shall
establish the procedure for the immediate removal to a hospital or a doctor's care of persons
(including employees) who may be injured on the job site.
If death or serious injuries or serious damages are caused, the accident shall be reported
' immediately by telephone or messenger to both the Engineer and the Owner. In addition, the
Contractor must promptly report in writing to the Engineer all accidents whatsoever arising out
of, or in connection with, the performance of the Work whether on, or adjacent to, the site,
' giving full details and statements of witnesses.
If a claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or any subcontractor on account of any
accident, the Contractor shall promptly report the facts in writing to the Engineer, giving full
details of the claim.
' 46. CONTRACTOR'S TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
The Contractor's tools and equipment used on the Work shall be furnished in sufficient quantity
and of a capacity and type that will safely perform the Work specified, and shall be maintained
00700-17
and used in a manner that will not create a hazard to persons or property, or cause a delay in the
progress of the Work.
47. PROTECTION.OF WORK AND PROPERTY
The Contractor shall at all times safely guard the Owner's property from injury, or loss in
connection with this Contract. The Contractor shall at all times safely guard and protect from
damage his own Work, and that of adjacent property (as provided by law and the Contract
Documents). All passageways, guard fences, lights, and other facilities required for protection
by federal, state, or municipal laws and regulations and local conditions, must be provided and
maintained.
The Contractor shall protect his Work and materials from damage due to the nature of the
Work; the elements, carelessness of other Contractors, or from any cause whatever until the
completion and acceptance of the Work. All loss or damages arising out of the nature of the
Work to be done under these Contract Documents, or from any unforeseen obstruction or
defects which may be encountered in the prosecution of the Work, or from the action of the
elements, shall be sustained by the Contractor.
I
I
H
H
J
I
1.1
In addition, the Contractor shall take special precautions to prevent the "flotation" of all tanks
and structures prior to their final acceptance and filling for beneficial use. The Contract price
shall include all costs associated with such special precautions.
Also, the Contractor shall not load or permit any part of any structure to be loaded with a
weight that will endanger its safety or its structural integrity.
48. RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR TO ACT IN EMERGENCY
In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury of property, and/or safety of life, the I
Contractor shall act, without previous instructions from the Owner or Engineer, as the situation
may warrant. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer thereof immediately thereafter. Any
claim for compensation by the Contractor, together with substantiating documents in regard to
expense, shall be submitted to the Owner through the Engineer and the amount of compensation
shall be determined by agreement.
49. MATERIALS AND APPLIANCES ._ t'
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water,
tools, equipment, light, power, transportation, and other facilities necessary for the execution
and completion of the Work.
Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials
shall be of good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to
the kind and quality of materials.
II
00700- 18 I
I
50.
I
' 52.
I
In selecting and/or approving equipment for installation in the Project, the Owner and Engineer
assume no responsibility for injury or claims resulting from failure of the equipment to comply
with applicable national, state, and local safety codes or requirements, or the safety
requirements of a recognized agency, or failure due to faulty design concepts, or defective
workmanship and materials.
CONTRACTORS' AND MANUFACTURERS' COMPLIANCE WITH STATE SAFETY,
OSHA, AND OTHER CODE REQUIREMENTS
The completed Work shall include all necessary permanent safety devices, such as machinery
guards and similar ordinary safety items required by the state and federal (OSHA) industrial
authorities and applicable local and national codes. Further, any features of the Work
(including Owner -selected equipment) subject to such safety regulations shall be fabricated,
furnished, and installed in compliance with these requirements. Contractors and manufacturers
of equipment shall be held responsible for compliance with the requirements included herein.
Contractors shall notify all equipment suppliers and subcontractors of the provisions of this
Article.
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS
Except for Owner -selected equipment items and items where no substitution is clearly
specified, whenever any material, article, device, product, fixture, form, type of construction,
or process is indicated or specified by patent or proprietary name, by name of manufacturer, or
by catalog number, such specifications shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of
establishing a standard of quality and facilitating the description of the material or process
desired. This procedure is not to be construed as eliminating from competition other products
of equal or better quality by other manufacturers where fully suitable in design, and shall be
deemed to be followed by the words "or equal". The Bidder may, in such cases, submit
complete data to the Engineer (with his Bid, as stipulated hereinbefore) for consideration of
another material, type, or process which shall be substantially equal in every respect to that so
indicated or specified. Substitute materials shall not be used unless approved in writing. The
Owner or his authorized agent will be the sole judge of the substituted article or material.
TESTS, SAMPLES, AND INSPECTIONS
The Contractor shall furnish, without extra charge, the necessary test pieces and samples,
including facilities and labor for obtaining the same, as requested by the Engineer. When
required, the Contractor shall furnish certificates of tests of materials and equipment made at
the point of manufacture by a recognized testing laboratory.
The Owner, Engineer, authorized government agents, and their representatives shall at all times
be provided safe access to the Work wherever it is in preparation or progress, and the
Contractor shall provide facilities for such access and for inspection, including maintenance of
temporary and permanent access.
00700-19
I
Flt?
If the Specifications, the Engineer's instructions, laws, ordinances, or any public authority
require any Work to be specially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give timely notice of
its readiness for inspection. Inspections to be conducted by the Engineer will be promptly
made, and where practicable, at the source of supply. If any Work should be covered up
without approval or consent of the Engineer. it shall be uncovered for examination at the
Contractor's expense.
ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
The Contractor shall pay all royalty and license fees, unless otherwise specified. The
Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save
the Owner and the Engineer harmless from any and all loss, including reasonable attorneys'
fees, on account thereof, up to the amount of the Contract Price.
54. CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT
If the Work should be stopped under an order of any court or other public authority for a period
of more than 3 months, through no act or fault of the Contractor, its Subcontractors, or
respective employees or agents, then the Contractor may, upon 15 days' written notice to the
Owner and the Engineer, if said default has not been cured, stop Work or terminate this
Contract and recover from the Owner payment for the reasonable value of Work performed.
55. CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK FOUND DURING WARRANTY PERIOD
The Contractor hereby agrees to make, at his own expense, all repairs or replacements
necessitated by defects in materials or workmanship, supplied under terms of this Contract, and
pay for any damage to other works resulting from such defects, which become evident within
1 year after the date of final acceptance of the Work or within 1 year after the date of substantial
completion established by the Engineer for specified items of equipment, or within such longer
period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee
required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor further assumes responsibility for, a
similar guarantee for all Work and materials provided by subcontractors or manufacturers of
packaged equipment components.
The effective date for the start of the guarantee or warranty period for equipment qualifying as
substantially complete is defined in Article 16, SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, and Article
67, SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE, in these General Conditions. The Contractor also
agrees to hold the Owner and the Engineer harmless from liability of any kind arising from
damage due to said defects. The Contractor shall make all repairs and replacements promptly
upon receipt of written order for same from the Owner.
J
J
I
I
I
Ii
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
00700-20
If the Contractor fails to make the repairs and replacements promptly, the Owner may do the
Work, and the Contractor and his Surety shall be liable for the cost thereof. Any additional
requirements for the Project relative to correction of defective Work after final acceptance are
set forth in the Supplementary Conditions.
' PROGRESS OF THE WORK
56. BEGINNING OF THE WORK
Before Work shall be started and materials ordered, the Contractor shall meet and consult with
the Owner and/or Engineer relative to materials, equipment, and all arrangements for
prosecuting the Work.
57. SCHEDULES AND PROGRESS REPORTS
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner such schedule of quantities and costs, progress
schedules, payrolls, reports, records, and other data as the Owner may request concerning Work
performed or to be performed under this Contract.
Construction Schedule Requirements: The Contractor shall comply with the following
requirements concerning construction scheduling and payments:
The Contractor shall submit a construction schedule of the bar graph type (or other
approved type) prior to the preconstruction conference showing the following
information as a minimum:
a. Date of Notice to Proceed with Contract Work.
b. Actual date construction is scheduled to start if different from the date of Notice
to Proceed.
' c. Contract completion date.
d. Beginning and completion dates for each phase of Work.
e. The dates at which special detail drawings are required.
f. Respective dates for submission of shop drawings and the beginning of
manufacture, the testing of, and the installation of materials, supplies, and
equipment.
g. All construction milestone dates.
h. A separate graph showing Work placement in dollars versus Contract time.
I00700-21
I
FR
59.
60.
The schedule shall incorporate approved Contract changes. The schedule shall be maintained
in an up-to-date condition monthly and shall be available for inspection at the construction site
at all times..
The construction schedule shall be submitted in conjunction with and/or in addition to any other
requirements concerning schedules within these Specifications. I.
The construction schedule shall be updated and submitted with each monthly request for
payment. Should the Contractor fall behind said schedule, he shall present in writing to the
owner a revised plan of action to complete the project on time. Methods may include, but are
not limited to additional manpower, equipment, working overtime, etc.. As may be required.
Also, the construction schedule shall be revised accordingly. Failure to submit such revised
construction schedule and written explanation shall be reason to withhold payment entirely or
reduce payment substantially.
PROSECUTION OF THE WORK
It is expressly understood and agreed that the time of beginning, rate of progress, and time of
completion of the Work are the essence of this Contract. The Work shall be prosecuted at such
time, and in or on such part or parts of the Project as may be required, to complete the Project
as contemplated in the Contract Documents and the approved construction schedule.
Regular Work hours shall be from 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. Monday through Friday. No Work
requiring the presence of the Engineer's representative will be performed outside of regular
Work hours.
The cost of additional engineering services will be based upon actual hours worked (labor cost
x 3) plus out-of-pocket expenses such as lodging, mileage, materials, etc. Otherwise, the
Contractor may perform clean-up work only outside of regular hours (including Saturdays and
Sundays). No Work will be accomplished on holidays.
ASSIGNMENT
Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole, without the
written consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any monies due or to become due
to him hereunder without the previous written consent of the Owner.
OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK
If the Contractor should, in the opinion of the Engineer, neglect to prosecute the Work properly
or should neglect or refuse at his own cost to take up and replace Work as shall have been
rejected by the Engineer, then the Owner shall notify the Surety of the condition, and after 10
days' written notice to the Contractor and the Surety, or without notice if an emergency or
danger to the Work or public exists, and without prejudice to any other right which the Owner
may have under the Contract, take over that portion of the work which has been improperly
executed or uncompleted, and make good the deficiencies and deduct the cost thereof from the
I
i1
I
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
L
L
C
LI
00700-22
C
C
payments then or thereafter due the Contractor, and if such payments are not sufficient thereof,
charge the cost to the Contractor and its surety.
' 61. OWNER'S RIGHT TO TRANSFER EMPLOYMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
If the Contractor should abandon the Work or should be adjudged bankrupt, or if he should
make a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed
on account of his insolvency, or if he should persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail,
except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled
workers or proper materials, or if he should fail to make prompt payment to subcontractors for
material or labor, or persistently disregard laws, ordinances, or the instructions of the Engineer,
or otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the Contract or any laws or
ordinance. The Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy, and after giving
the Contractor and Surety 7 days' written notice, transfer the employment for said Work from
the Contractor to the Surety. Upon receipt of such notice, such Surety shall enter upon the
premises and take possession of all materials, tools, and appliances thereon for the purpose of
completing the Work included under this Contract and employ, by Contract or otherwise, any
qualified person or persons to finish the Work and provide the materials therefore, in
accordance with the Contract Documents, without termination of the continuing full force and
effect of this Contract.
In case of such transfer of employment to such Surety, the Surety shall be paid in its own name
on estimates according to the terms hereof without any right of the Contractor to make any
claim for the same or any part thereof.
If after the furnishing of said written notice to the Surety, the Contractor and the Surety still fail
to make reasonable progress on the performance of the Work, the Owner may terminate the
employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools,
and appliances thereon and finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient and
charge the cost thereof to the Contractor and Surety. In such case, the Contractor shall not be
entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the expense of completing
the Contract, including compensation for additional managerial and administrative services,
shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor and the Surety shall pay the difference to the
Owner.
62. OWNER'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND OR TERMINATE WORK
Owner may suspend work under the following conditions:
At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a
period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will
fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so
fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contract makes ah
approved claim therefor as provided in per the General Conditions.
1 00700-23
C
Owner may terminate:
Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events:
1. If Contractor persistently fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or
suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule established
in the Contract Documents.
2. If Contractor disregards Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction.
3. If Contractor disregards the authority of the Engineers.
4. If Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents.
Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any) seven days' written notice and to
the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools,
appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the site and use the same to the full
extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or
conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for. which
Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as Owner may
deem expedient.
In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is
finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and
damages sustained by Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess
will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid
balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages
incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and when so
approved by Engineer incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any
rights or remedies under the paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price
for the Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect
any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which.may thereafter
accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release
Contractor from liability:
Upon seven days' written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, elect to terminate the Contract. In
such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
1. For completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums
for overhead and profit on such Work.
2. For expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses.
II
II
r
C
C
I
I
El
H
I
H
I
I
I
I
00700-24
II
' 3. For all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others.
4. For reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
' economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
63. DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME
' If the Contractor is delayed in the progress of the Work by any separate Contractor employed
by the Owner, or by strikes, lockouts, fire, excessive adverse weather conditions not reasonably
' anticipated (on the basis of official weather records from the past ten years, minimum, from the
locality involved), or acts of God, the Contractor shall, within 48 hours of the start of the
occurrence, give written notice to the Owner of the cause of the potential delay and estimate
' the possible time extension involved, and within 7 days after the cause of delay has been
remedied, the Contractor shall given written notice to the Owner of any actual time extension
requested as a result of the aforementioned occurrence; then the Contract time may be extended
' by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Engineer determines.
It is agreed that no claim shall be made or allowed for any damages which may arise out of any
delay caused by the above referenced acts or occurrences, other than claims for the appropriate
extension of time.
' No extension of time will be granted to the Contractor for delays occurring to parts of the Work
that have no measurable impact on the completion of the total Work under this Contract; nor
will extension of time be granted for delays to parts of Work that are not located on the critical
path if the Critical Path Method (CPM) is used for scheduling the Work.
' No extension of time will be considered for weather conditions normal to the area in which the
Work is being performed. Unusual weather conditions, if determined by the Engineer to be of
a severity that would stop all progress of the Work, may be considered as cause for an extension
of Contract completion time. The Contractor shall provide official documentation of weather
conditions experienced versus those anticipated as described above.
Delays in delivery of equipment or material purchased by the Contractor or his subcontractors
(including Owner -selected equipment) shall not be considered as a just cause for delay. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible for the timely ordering, scheduling, expediting, delivery,
and installation of all equipment and materials.
Within a reasonable period after the Contractor submits to the Owner a written request for an
extension of time, the Engineer will present his written opinion to the Owner as to whether an
extension of time is justified, and, if so, his recommendation as to the number of days for time
extension. The Owner will make the final decision on all requests for extension of time.
In no event shall the Contractor be entitled under this Contract to collect or recover any
' damages, loss, or expense incurred by any delay other than as caused by the Owner, as
stipulated in the Article titled, NOTICE OF CLAIM FOR DELAY.
' 00700-25
I
I
64. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
The Work shall begin at the time stated in the Notice to Proceed issued by the Owner to the
Contractor and shall be completed within the number of consecutive calendar days, or by the
calendar date, stated in the accepted Bid and Contract. The time shall be computed from and
including the date stated in the Notice to Proceed. It is agreed that time is of the essence of this
Contract.
The Contractor agrees that said Work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and
uninterruptedly at such rate or progress as will insure full completion thereof within the time
specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner,
that the time for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time for the
completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual
construction conditions prevailing in this locality.
..
• If the Contractor shall neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the Work within the time herein
specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does
hereby agree, as a part consideration for the awarding of this Contract, a penalty put as
liquidated damages for such breach of Contract, as hereinafter set forth, for each and every
calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated in the Contract for
completing the Work.
The said, amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner
because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty offixing and ascertaining the actual
damages which the Owner would in such event sustain, and said amount shall be retained from
time to time by the Owner from current periodic pay estimates.
65. OTHER CONTRACTS ,
The Owner reserves the right to award other Contracts in connection with the Work. The
Contractor shall afford other Contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and
storage of their materials and the execution of their Work and shall properly connect and
coordinate his Work with theirs.
If any part of the Work under this Contract depends on the prior acceptable completion of Work
by others under separate Contract(s), the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the
Engineer any defects in such Work that would adversely affect the satisfactory completion of
the Work under this Contract. The Contractor's failure to so inspect and report shall constitute
acceptance of the Work by others as being suitable for the proper reception and completion of
the Work under this Contract, excluding, however, those defectsin the Work by others that
occur after the satisfactory completion of the Work specified hereunder.
00700 -26 ,
I
t66. USE OF PREMISES
The Contractor shall confine his equipment, the storage of materials, and the operation of his
workers to limits shown on the Drawings or indicated by law, ordinances, permits, or directions
' of the Engineer, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with his materials. The
Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, the necessary rights -of -way and access to the
Work which may be required outside the limits of the Owner's property.
' 67. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE
' The Engineer may, at his sole discretion, issue a written notice of substantial completion for
the purpose of establishing the starting date for specific equipment guarantees, and to establish
the date that the Owner will assume the responsibility for the cost of operating such equipment.
I
Said notice shall not be considered as final acceptance of any portion of the Work or relieve the
Contractor from completing the remaining Work within the specified time and in full
compliance with the Contract Documents.
' Such substantial completion shall not relieve Contractor from liquidated damages should the
Owner have added costs after the completion date, i.e., if additional construction observation,
interest paid, loss of revenue, or other expenses continue to be charged to the Owner.
' Substantial completion of an operating facility shall be that degree of completion that will
provide a minimum of 7 continuous work days of successful operation in which all performance
and acceptance testing has been successfully demonstrated to the Engineer. All equipment
contained in the Work, plus all other components necessary to enable the Owner to operate the
facility in the manner that was intended, shall be complete on the substantial completion date.
See "SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION" under Article DEFINITIONS, of these General
' Conditions.
68. PERFORMANCE TESTING
' Operating equipment and systems shall be performance tested in the presence of the Engineer
to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements. Performance testing shall be
' conducted under the specified design operating conditions or under such simulated operating
conditions as recommended or approved by the Engineer. Schedule such testing with the
Engineer at least I week in advance of the planned date for testing.
69. OWNER'S USE OF PORTIONS OF THE WORK
The Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially
completed portions of the Work. Such use shall not be considered as final acceptance of any
portion of the Work, nor shall such use be considered as cause for an extension of the Contract
completion time, unless authorized by a Change Order issued by the Owner.
I
' 00700-27
I
70. CUTTING AND PATCHING . I
The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching of his Work that may be required to
make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by Work of
other Contractors shown upon or reasonably implied by the Drawings. Any defective Work
or material, performed or furnished by the Contractor, that may be discovered by the Engineer
before the final acceptance of the Work or before final payment has been made, shall be
removed and replaced or patched, in a manner as approved by the Engineer at the expense of
the Contractor. '
71. CLEANING UP•
'
The Contractor shall, at all times, at his own expense, keep property on which Work is in
progress and the adjacent property free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused '
by employees or by the Work. Upon completion of the construction, the Contractor shall, at
his own expense, remove all temporary structures, rubbish, and waste materials resulting from
his operations. '
PAYMENT
72. PAYMENT FOR CHANGE ORDERS
Payment or credit for any alterations covered by a Change Order shall be determined by one
or a combination of the methods set forth in A, B, or C below as applicable:
A. UNIT PRICES. If applicable, those unit prices stipulated in the Bid, shall be utilized.
If such Unit Prices are not applicable, the Contractor and Owner may utilize Unit Prices
as mutually agreed upon.
B. LUMP SUM. A total lump sum for the Work may be negotiated as mutually agreed
upon by the Contractor and Owner.
In "A" and "B" above, Contractor's quotations for Change Orders shall be in writing and firm
for a period of 90 days. Any compensation paid in conjunction with the terms of a Change
Order shall comprise total compensation due the Contractor.for the Work or alteration defined
in the Change Order.
By signing the Change Order, the Contractor acknowledges that the stipulated compensation
includes payment for the Work or alteration plus all payment for the interruption of schedules,
extended overhead, delay or any other impact claim or ripple effect, and by such signing '
specifically waives any reservation or claim for additional compensation in respect to the
subject of the Change Order.
The Owner's request for quotations on alterations to the Work shall not be considered
authorization to proceed with the Work prior to the issuance of a formal Change Order, nor t
shall such request justify any delay in existing Work. Lump sum quotations for alterations to
00700-28
I
the Work shall include substantiating documentation with an itemized breakdown of Contractor
and subcontractor costs, including labor, material, rentals, approved services, overhead, and
' profit calculated as specified under "C" below.
C. FORCE ACCOUNT WORK. If the method of payment cannot be agreed upon prior to
'
the beginning of the Work, and the Owner or the Engineer directs that the Work be done
by written Change Order or on a force account basis, then the Contractor shall furnish
' labor, equipment, and materials necessary to complete the Work in a satisfactory manner
and within a reasonable period of time. For the Work performed, payment will be made
for the documented actual cost of the following:
1) Labor, including foremen, who are directly assigned to the force account Work:
(actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits as established by negotiated
labor agreements, labor insurance, and labor taxes as established by law). No
other fixed labor burdens will be considered, unless approved in writing by the
Owner.
' 2) Material delivered and used on the designated Work, including sales tax, if paid
' for by the Contractor or his subcontractor.
3) Rental, or equivalent rental cost of equipment, including necessary transportation
for items having a value in excess of $100.
4) Additional bond, as required and approved by the Owner.
5) Additional insurance (other than labor insurance) as required and approved by the
Owner.
' To costs under 72C, FORCE ACCOUNT WORK, there shall be added the following
fixed fees for the Contractor or subcontractor actually performing the Work:
' A fixed fee not to exceed 15 percent of the cost of all items above.
' The added fixed fees shall be considered to be full compensation, covering the cost of
general supervision, overhead, profit, and any other general expense.
The Owner reserves the right to furnish such materials and equipment as he deems
expedient, and the Contractor shall have no claim for profit or added fees on the cost of
such materials and equipment.
I
I
' 00700-29
I
For equipment under Item 3 above, rental or equivalent rental cost will be allowed for ,
only those days or hours during which the equipment is in actual use. Rental and
transportation allowances shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the ,
locality. The rentals allowed for equipment will, in all cases, be understood to cover all
fuel, supplies, repairs, and renewals, and no further allowances will be made for those
items, unless specific agreement to that effect is made. I
The Contractor shall maintain his records in such a manner as to provide a clear
distinction between the direct costs of Work paid for on a force account basis and the '
costs of other operations. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer report sheets in
duplicate of each day's force account Work no later than the working day following the
performance of said Work. The daily report sheets shall itemize the materials used, and
shall cover the direct cost of labor and the charges for equipment rental, whether
furnished by the Contractor, subcontractor, or other forces.
The daily report sheets shall provide names or identifications and classifications of
workers, the hourly rate of pay and hours worked, and also the size, type, and
identification number of equipment and hours operated.
Material charges shall be substantiated by valid copies of vendors' invoices. Such
invoices shall be submitted with the daily report sheets, or, if not available, they shall be
submitted with subsequent daily report sheets. Said daily report sheets shall be signed
•by the Contractor or his authorized agent. '
To receive partial payments and final payment for force account Work, the Contractor
shall submit in a manner approved by the Engineer, detailed and complete documented
verification of the Contractor's and any of his subcontractors' actual current costs
involved in the force account Work pursuant to the issuance of an approved Change ,
Order. Such costs shall be submitted within 30 days after said Work has been performed.
No payment will be made for Work billed and submitted to the Engineer after the 30 -day
period has expired. No extra or additional Work shall be performed by the Contractor,
except in an emergency endangering life or property, unless in pursuance of a written
Change Order, as provided in ALTERATIONS -CHANCES IN WORK. '
I
I
I
Il
00700-30 '
I
73. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
' A. GENERAL
Nothing contained in this Article shall be construed to affect the right, hereby reserved,
'
to reject the whole or any part of the aforesaid Work, should such Work be later found
not to comply with the provisions of the Contract Documents. All estimated quantities
of Work for which partial payments have been made are subject to review and correction
on the final estimate. Payment by the Owner and acceptance by the Contractor of partial
payments based on periodic estimates of quantities of Work performed shall not, in any
' way, constitute acceptance of the estimated quantities used as the basis for computing the
amounts of the partial payments. For public works projects, each partial payment request
and final payment request shall contain an affidavit by the Contractor that all provisions
' of the applicable federal and state requirements regarding apprentices and payment of
prevailing wages have been complied with by him and by his Subcontractors.
B. ESTIMATE AND PAYMENT
Before the first working day of each calendar month, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a detailed estimate of the amount earned for the separate portions of the Work,
and request payment. As used in this Article, the words "amount earned" means the
' value, on the date of the estimate for partial payment, of the Work completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents, and the value of approved materials delivered
to the Project site suitably stored and protected prior to incorporation into the Work. If
' the Contractor's estimate of amount earned conforms with the Engineer's evaluation, the
Engineer will calculate the amount due the Contractor and make recommendation to the
Owner for payment.
An estimate of monthly progress payments shall be provided for the entire job prior to
the first payment request. An update of the estimate of progress payments shall be
updated if the actual progress differs by more than 20 percent in any given month. Each
monthly payment request shall include the required updated Schedule.
' If the updated Schedule is not submitted, the Owner may withhold payment until this
item is completed. The Contractor shall be paid within 30 days of approval of the
' payment request.
C. DEDUCTION FROM ESTIMATE
Unless modified in the Supplementary Conditions, deductions from the estimate will be
as described below. The Owner will deduct from the estimate, and retain as part security,
I0 percent of the amount earned for Work satisfactorily completed. However, no
deduction or retainage will be made on the approved items of material delivered to and
properly stored at the job site but not incorporated into the Work. When the Work is 50
' percent complete, the Owner may "freeze" the retainage at 5 percent of the dollar value
of the total contract provided that the Contractor is making satisfactory progress and
' 00700-3!
D.
there is no specific cause for a greater retainage. The Owner may reinstate the retainage
up to 10 percent of the dollar value of "Work complete to date" if the Owner determines,
at his discretion, that the Contractor is not making satisfactory progress or where there
is other specific cause for such withholding.
NOTE: Exception —If the Work includes water or sewer pipelines, the Contractor shall
maintain the Work for a period of ninety (90) days following its acceptance by the
OWNER.
Up to five percent (5%) of the Contract amount shall be retained during this maintenance
period. All prior payments shall be subject to correction in the final payment.
This 90 -day period does not relieve the Contractor of the Performance and Payment
Bond requirements regarding warranty of the Project. In such cases, the semi-final
payment estimate shall indicate the initial acceptance of the Work, and the warranty shall
begin on such date.
QUALIFICATION FOR PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS DELIVERED
Unless modified in the Supplementary Conditions, qualification for partial payment for
materials delivered but not yet incorporated in to the Work shall be as described below.
Materials, as used herein, shall be considered to be those items which are fabricated or
manufactured material and equipment. To :receivepartial payment for materials
delivered to the site, but not incorporated in the Work, it shall be necessary for the
Contractor to include invoices of such materials and documentation warranting that the
materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other
arrangements to protect Owner's interest therein; all of which must be satisfactory to
Owner.
At the time of the next partial payment request, the Contractor must submit the following
documentation relative to materials paid on the previous partial payment: paid invoices
of such materials or other documentation warranting that the Owner has received the
materials and equipment free and clear of all liens, charges, security interests, and
encumbrances (i.e., all materials have been paid for by Contractor). Failure to submit
this documentation will result in an appropriate reduction on the current partial payment
estimate for such materials.
At his sole discretion, the Engineer may approve items for which partial payment is to
be made. Proper storage and protection shall be provided by the Contractor, and as
approved by the Engineer. Final payment shall be made only for materials actually
incorporated in the Work and, upon acceptance of the Work, all materials remaining for
which advance payments had been made shall revert to the Contractor, unless otherwise
agreed, and partial payments made for these items shall be deducted from the final
payment for the Work.
I
El
I
I
I]
I
I
]
I
J
I
I
1,
C
00700 -32
I
E. PAYMENT
' After deducting the retainages and the amount of all previous partial payments made to
the Contractor, the amount earned as of the current month will be made payable to the
Contractor within 30 days of the Owner's receipt of an approved request, except where
the Owner is a municipality or other agency whose laws require the approval of each
payment by a council or similar body, in which case, the payment shall become due and
' payable 10 days after the first regularly -scheduled meeting in the month following the
submittal of such payment request.
74. CLAIMS
In any case where the Contractor deems additional compensation is due him for Work or
' materials not clearly covered in the Contract or not ordered by the Engineer according to
provisions of Article 20 ALTERATIONS - CHANGES IN WORK, the Contractor shall notify
the Engineer, in writing, of his intention to make claim for such compensation before he begins
' the Work on which he bases the claim, in order that such matters may be settled, if possible,
or other appropriate action promptly taken. If such notification is not given or the Engineer is
not afforded proper facilities by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost, then
the Contractor hereby agrees to waive the claim for such additional compensation. Such notice
by the Contractor, and the fact that the Engineer has kept account of the cost as aforesaid, shall
' not in any way be construed as proving the validity of the claim.
Claims for additional compensation shall be made in itemized detail and submitted, in writing,
to the Owner and Engineer within 10 days following completion of that portion of the Work
for which the Contractor bases his claim. In case the claim is found to be just, it shall be
allowed and paid for as provided in the Article titled, PAYMENT FOR CHANGE ORDERS.
' 75. NOTICE OF CLAIM FOR DELAY
' If the Contractor intends to file a claim for additional compensation for delay caused by the
Owner at a particular time, he shall file a notice of claim with the Owner within 7 days of the
beginning of the occurrence. The notice of claim shall be in duplicate, in writing, and need not
state the amount. No claim for additional compensation will be considered unless the
provisions of Article 61, DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME, are complied with, and a
notice of claim has been filed with the Owner in writing, as stated above.
' Should the Owner be prevented or enjoined from proceeding with Work, either before or after
its prosecution, or from authorizing its prosecution by reason of any litigation, the Contractor
shall not be entitled to make or assert claim for damage by reason of said delay; but time for
completion of the Work will be extended to such reasonable time as the Owner may determine
will compensate for time lost by such delay, with such determination to be set forth in writing.
I
' 00700 - 33
I
'p,
77
78.
79.
RELEASE OF LIENS OR CLAIMS
The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all claims for labor and
materials furnished under this Contract. Prior to the final payment, the Contractor shall furnish
to the Owner, as part of his final payment request, an affidavit that all of the Contractor's
obligations on the Project have been satisfied and that there are no unpaid taxes, liens, vendors'
liens, rights to lien or any other type of claim against the Project, and that the hourly wages paid
to all persons on the Project were in accordance with the applicable wage scale determinations.
FINAL PAYMENT
Upon completion of all of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer, in writing, that he has completed his part of the Contract and shall request final
inspection.
Upon receipt of the Contractor's written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection, the
Engineer shall make such inspection and shall submit to the Owner his recommendation as to
acceptance of the completed Work and as to the final estimate of the amount due the Contractor
under this Contract.
Upon approval of this final estimate by the Owner and compliance with provisions in Article
titled, RELEASE OF LIENS'OR CLAIMS, and other provisions as may be applicable, the
Owner shall pay to the Contractor all monies due him under the provisions of these Contract
Documents. On contracts for public works, final payment of the retained percentage will not
be made until the Contractor has also furnished the applicable apprenticeship wage
certification.
NO WAIVER OF RIGHTS
Neither the inspection of the Owner, through the Engineer or any of his employees, nor any
order by the Owner for payment of money, nor any payment for, or acceptance of, the whole
or any part of the Work by the Owner or Engineer, nor any extension of time, nor any
possession taken by the Owner or:its employees shall operate as a waiver of any provision of
this Contract, or any power herein reserved to the Owner, or any right to damages herein
provided nor shall any waiver of any breach in this Contract be held to be a waiver of any other
or subsequent breach.
ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT CONSTITUTES RELEASE
The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall release the Owner and the
Engineer, as agent of the Owner, from all claims and all liability to the Contractor for all things
done or furnished in connection with the Work, and every act of the Owner and others relating
to or arising out of the Work. No payment, however, final or otherwise, shall operate to release
the Contractor or his Sureties from obligations under this Contract and the Performance and
Payment Bonds, and other bonds and warranties, as herein provided.
END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
I
I
J
H
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
I
00700 - 34
DOCUMENT 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
REVISIONS AND ADDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
The GENERAL CONDITIONS are hereby revised as follows:
ARTICLE 7.5 "DEFECTIVE WORK"
Add the new article as follows:
Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that such Work does not conform to the
Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard,
test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to the
Engineer's recommendation for final payment (unless the Owner has assumed responsibility for
protection thereof at Substantial Completion).
ARTICLE 9. "ENGINEER"
Delete the first sentence.
ARTICLE 16. "SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION"
Replace the word "Project" wherever it occurs with the word "Work".
Delete the second paragraph and add the following:
Substantial Completion shall be evidenced by a definitive Certificate of Substantial Completion
or by the Engineer's written recommendation that the Work is complete and ready for final
payment. The date of Substantial Completion shall be the effective date on the certificate or the
date the Engineer recommends for final payment, whichever occurs first.
ARTICLE 28. "REJECTED MATERIAL"
Delete entirely and replace with the following:
ARTICLE 28. "REJECTED WORK"
Any Work condemned or rejected as defective by the Engineer shall be removed at once from
' the vicinity of the Work by the Contractor at his own expense (unless such Work is Owner -
provided material equipment) and shall not be used on the remainder of the Work.
I
I
IFY972102 00800-1
I
ARTICLE 52. "TESTS, SAMPLES, AND INSPECTIONS"
Add the following:
COMPACTION AND CONCRETE TESTING
The Engineer shall conduct field soil density and concrete testing as required by Owner and
Contract Documents. The Owner shall pay for all initial testing. The Contractor shall pay for
all retesting necessitated by unsatisfactory results of initial testing.
ARTICLE 55. "CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK FOUND DURING WARRANTY
PERIOD"
Delete entirely and replace with the following:
ARTICLE 55. "CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY &. GUARANTEE &
CORRECTION PERIOD"
The Contractor warrants and guarantees to the Owner that all Work will be in accordance with
the Contract Documents and will not be Defective Work. The Contractor's warranty and
guarantee excludes defective Owner -provided material and equipment; however, it does not
exclude the Contractor's workmanship in incorporating such material and equipment in the
remainder of the Work.
If, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or longer period of time as prescribed
by Laws, Regulation, or specific provisions of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to
be Defective Work, the Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance
with the Owner's written instruction.
1) Correct the Defective Work or remove and replace it with Work that is not
defective, and
2) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work resulting
therefrom.
Where Defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this Article, the warranty and guarantee period shall be extended for
an additional year after the date the Owner accepts such correction or removal and replacement.
If the Contractor fails to promptly make such correction or removals and replacements, or in an
emergency where delay would cause serious risk loss or damage, the Owner may have the
Defective Work corrected or removed and replaced. In such instance the Contractor shall pay
all resulting claims, costs, losses and damages.
I
I
I
I
[1
I
1
I
I
I
I
H
I
Li
I
I
FY972102 00800-2 '
I
ARTICLE 58 "PROSECUTION OF THE WORK" Delete and replace with
58. "PROSECUTION OF THE WORK; WORKING HOURS; OBSERVATION HOURS"
I
Owner and Contractor expressly understand and agree that the time of beginning, rate of
progress, and time of completion of the Work are of the essence in this Contract.
Contractor shall prosecute the Work at such time and in such parts of the Work as may be
required to complete the Work within the Contract Times or on or before the dates
established for completion, except as limited below.
' Contractor's Working Hours: Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of
persons, the Work, or property at or adjacent to the site, and except as otherwise stated in
the Contract Documents, Contractor shall limit work at the site to period between 7:00
A.M. and 6:00 P.M., Monday through Friday. Contractor will not permit work outside
these hours or on Saturday, Sunday or legal holiday without Owner's consent (which will
not be reasonably withheld) and prior notice to Engineer. The intent of this limitation is
to minimize the impact of construction work on those living or conducting business near
or adjacent to the site.
' Enwineer's Observation Hours: Contractor is expected to schedule and prosecute the
Work in a manner that will not require observation for more than 40 hours per week, on
Sundays, or on legal holidays. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for all observation in
excess of 40 hours per week or on Sundays or holidays (such holidays being New Years
Day, Memorial Day, 4th of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day). The
method of reimbursement shall be a deduction from monies due Contractor on pay
'
requests and shall be calculated as follows:
$55/hour times the sum of all observers' hours, as recorded on certified time
sheets as devoted to this project, less 40 hours -or- $55 x (SUM,BSHRs 40).
ARTICLE 67 "SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE"
Delete entirely.
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
[1
I
I
IFY972102 00800-3
I
' SECTION 01009
SUMMARY OF WORK
' PARTI GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. This Section describes the project in general, and provides overview of the extent of
the work to be performed. Detailed requirements and extent of work is stated in the
applicable Specification Sections and is shown on the Drawings. The Contractor
'
shall, except as otherwise specifically stated herein or in any applicable parts of the
Contract Documents, provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools,
construction equipment, and other facilities and services necessary for proper
execution, and completion of his work.
1.02 REASONABLY IMPLIED PARTS OF THE WORK SHALL BE DONE THOUGH
I
ABSENT FROM SPECIFICATIONS
A. Any part of the work which is not mentioned in the Specifications but is shown on
' the Drawings, or any part not shown on the Drawings but described in the
Specifications, or any part not shown on the Drawings nor described in the
Specifications, but which is necessary or normally required as a part of such work,
' or is necessary or required to make each installation satisfactorily and legally
operable, shall be performed by the Contractor as incidental work without extra cost
to the Owner, as if fully described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings,
' and the expense thereof shall be included in the applicable unit prices or lump sum
bid for the work.
I1.03 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT
A. Work covered by these Contract Documents in general covers the construction of the
' following facilities:
Addition of one submersible pump, piping, valves and electrical work.
PART2 PRODUCTS
' Not Used.
I
PART 3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
3.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION WORK
A. The Contractor shall execute all work, including site, structural, piping, equipment,
and finishes.
FY972 102 Section 01009-I
B. The Contractor shall also:
•1. Provide temporary sanitary toilet facilities.
2. Pay for all electrical energy and water consumed for construction purposes
until final acceptance by the Owner or until the Engineer certifies Substantial
Completion.
3. Provide telephone service for his own use and for the Engineer's use.
4. Provide an adequate supply of potable drinking water for use by his
employees and by the Engineer.
3.02 DRAWINGS
A. Drawings are bound separately and consist of 5 sheets.
END OF SECTION
A
FY972102 Section 01009-2
I
I
I
I
En
I
I
I
I
I
I
LI
C
I
[1
I
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16010
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Comply with the Conditions of the Contract, General and Supplementary
Conditions, and any other applicable requirements contained herein or issued
under separate cover.
B. Perform other work related to or necessary for the electrical installation in
accordance with the applicable Specification Division or Section contained herein.
C. In Electrical Specification Sections, items under "RELATED WORK" are listed for
convenience only and are not guaranteed to be a complete listing of all applicable
work.
1.02 CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDS:
A. Comply with the latest edition of applicable codes including the following:
1. Standard Building Code :.!.
2. Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) y !
3. National Electrical Code NEC (NFPA 70)
4. State Fire Prevention Code
B. Comply with applicable Regulations as amended, including the following:
1. State Department of Health Regulations
2. State and Federal Department of Labor Regulations
3. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
4. Utility Company Regulations and Requirements
5. Other State and Federal Laws and Regulations
6. Local Ordinances
C. Furnish products and perform installation conforming the latest accepted
Standards published by the following organizations:
1. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
4. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)
5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
16010-1
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
6. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
7. Insulated Power Cable Engineer's Association (IPCEA)
8. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL)
9. Insurance Service Office (ISO)
10. Factory Insurance Association (FIA)
11. Factory Mutual (FM)
12. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
D. In case of discrepancy or conflict between Codes, Regulations, Standards,
Drawings and/or Specifications, the requirement yielding the higher(est) quality of
work shall govern.
1.03 PERMITS AND ADMINISTRATIVE FEES:
A. Obtain and maintain all necessary licenses, permits and inspections and pay all
fees including connection fees, taxes and penalties, if any, required by the
Administrative Authority. Refundable deposits will be paid by the Owner.
1.04 PRE -CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to each Electrical Section for a listing ofrequired Submittals under that
Section. Refer to Section entitled Shop Drawings;: Product Data, and Samples for
submittal procedure and requirements.
B. Submit .for approval, Manufacturer's technical data sheets including performance -
specifications for all equipment, major materials, and other manufactured -items.
Obtain approval on product manufacturers not specifically named prior to making
submittals..
I
I
[I
I
I
I
I
C. Submit for approval, Contractor's original Shop Drawings of all assemblies of
manufactured items including complete wiring diagrams. Indicate all pertinent
dimensions on scale drawings necessary for clarity and for coordination of the
installation between trades.;
D. Submit for approval, a schedule of nameplates and test report forms.
E. Bind Submittals in durable cover(s) with contents conveniently organized and
properly indexed.
F. Make Submittals on all work contained in Division 16, Electrical, at one time except
by special permission.
1.05 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER:
16010-2
I
I
E
17
V
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
A. Provide general and task lighting for construction activity as required for adequate
illumination. Provide minimum of 5 footcandles general illumination for all work.
and egress areas and 30 footcandles on task such as wall being painted. Provide
exterior type fixtures where exposed to weather or moisture.
B. Provide general purpose electrical outlets and special outlets as required for
construction activities. Provide circuits of proper sizes, characteristics and ratings
'for each use required.
C. Provide 20 amp, 4 -gang receptacle outlets, equipped with ground -fault circuit
interrupters, reset button and pilot light, spaced that a 100 foot extension cord can
reach each area of work. Use only grounded extension cords. Use "hard -service
cords" where exposed to abrasion and traffic.
1.06 INTENT:
' A. It is intended that the Contractor provide a complete and operating electrical
system including all incidental items and connections necessary for proper
operation or customarily included even though each and every item may not be
indicated.
I. B. !, The:.Drawings indicate the general layout requirements for equipment, conduit,
devices, etc. Final layout will be governed by.actual field conditions with all
measurements verified at the site.
aC. Conduit and wiring1shown on the Drawings are diagramatic unless noted
otherwise, and are intended to indicate switching and branch circuit arrangements,
phase balance, and general wiring connection requirements.
D. It is intended that the electrical installation be safe, reliable, energy efficient, and
easily maintained with adequate provisions for access to equipment.
E. It is intended that the electrical system operate quietly with noise levels below the
' criteria recommended for the application by NEMA. Provide corrective action as
required to reduce objectionable hum or vibration.
IF. The Drawings indicate diagramatically the number and function of the conductors
required for the conduit routing as shown. The Contractor has the option of
changing the routing or combining circuits in one conduit run, providing the
installation does not interfere with work of other trades, the system functions as
intended, the ampacity of the conductors is derated in accordance with the NEC,
' and none of the loads require a dedicated circuit. Indicate actual conduit routing
and conductor arrangement on record drawings.
n.
16010-3
I
HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
G. General purpose 20 ampere branch circuits may share a common neutral,
provided each branch circuit is derived from a different phase leg. Circuits with ,
ground fault circuit breakers must have their own neutral
H. "Home runs" are indicated on the Drawings with arrows from the branch circuit
outlets pointing in the general direction of the panelboards to which they connect,
complete with the panelboard and circuit designations. Continue "home runs" to
the designated panelboards as though the conduit runs were shown in their
entirety.
PART2-PRODUCTS '
2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS:
A. Furnish only new standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
production of said products.
B. Support all products by service organizations with adequate spare parts inventory
and personnel located reasonably close to the site.
C. Where multiple units of the same p type or class of products are required, provide all
units of the same manufacturer.
2.02 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Store products in the original containers and shelter in a suitable environment at
- an approved location.
B. Make products readily accessible for inspections and inventory accounting.
2.03 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. For products specified by generic reference standard, select any product meeting
such standard. ,
B. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers, select '
any named. Submit request for substitution of any product or manufacturer not
specifically named and obtain approval prior to bidding.
C. Provide all information required to support claim of "equality" of product proposed '
for substitution. Substitutions will be considered only if equivalent in quality,
efficiency, performance, size, weight, reliability, appearance, and ease of
maintenance to the specified product or manufacturer.
16010-4 1
L
1
SPECIFICATIONS INDEX
1 Hamestring Pump Station #7
April 15, 1997
iDIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
1 Section
Section
Section
' Section
Section
Section
1
Section
Section
Section
1
Section
Section
Section
'
Section
Section
i
I
L
I
I
[1
I
I
1
16010
16110
16120
16130
16170
16190
16195
16421
16424
16450
16460
16471
16476
16484
General Electrical Requirements
Raceways
Wires and Cables
Boxes and Enclosures
Disconnect Switches
Supporting Devices
Electrical Identification
Underground Electrical Services
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor
Grounding
Transformers, Dry Type
Circuit Breaker Lighting Panelboards, 240 VAC
Fuses
Motor Control Centers
I
3.2
3.3
3.4
PLACEMENT OF VALVES
A. Buried valves shall be installed with valve boxes in accordance with the details shown
on the Drawings.
B. Buried valves shall have bolts protected by wrapping in polyethylene material.
ACCESS
A. Location of valves shall be as required to provide accessibility for control and
maintenance.
TESTING
A. Valves: Test at same time adjacent pipeline is tested.
B. Joints shall show no visible leakage under test.
C. Repair joints that show signs of leakage prior to final acceptance
D. If there are any special parts of control systems or operators that might be damaged by
the pipeline test, they shall be properly protected. The Contractor will be held
responsible for damage caused by the testing.
E. If requested by the Engineer, the valve manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit stating the
materials options furnished and that he has complied with these and other referenced
Specifications.
END OF SECTION
FY972102 15101 -7
H
2.8 CHECK VALVE
' The
check valve shall
be of the
Swing Flex, full body flanged type, with a domed access cover
and
only one moving
part, the
valve disc.
I
The valve body shat
valve. The seating
access port shall be
the pipeline. The
operational in lines
l have full flow equal to nominal pipe diameter at any point, through the
surface shall be on a 45 degree angle to minimize disc travel. The top
full size, allowing removal of the disc without removing the valve from
access cover shall be domed in shape, to allow the disc to be fully
containing a high solids content.
The disc shall be of one piece construction, precision molded with an integral O-ring type
sealing surface and contain steel and nylon reinforcements in both the Memory -Flex TM and
central disc areas. The flex portion of the disc shall be warranted for twenty-five years. Non -
slam closing characteristic shall be provided through a short 35 degree disc stroke and a
Memory -Flex TM disc return action.
Backflow capabilities shall be available by means of an optional screw type backflow actuator.
The actuator shall be field installable without modification to the valve, a need for special
tools or removal of the valve from line.
The valve body and cover shall be ASTM A126, Class B cast iron. The disc shall be Buna-N
' (NBR), ASTM D2000-BG.
The interior of the valve shall be coated with an epoxy suitable for potable water. The exterior
shall be coated with a universal primer.
' The valve shall be cycle tested 1,000,000 times with no signs of wear or distortion to the valve
disc or seat and shall remain drop tight at both high and low pressures. The tests results shall
be independently certified.
The valve shall be series 500 as manufactured by Val-Matic Valve and Manufacturing
Corporation or approval equal.
' 2.9 SEWAGE COMBINATION AIR VALVE
Sewage Combination Air Valves shall be of the single housing style that combines the
operating features of both an Air/Vacuum and air Release Valve.
' The Air/Vacuum portion shall automatically exhaust large quantities of air during the filling
of the pipeline and automatically allows air to re-enter the pipeline when the internal pressure
' of the pipeline approaches a negative value due to column separation, draining of the pipeline,
power outage, pipeline break, etc.
' The Air Release portion shall automatically release small pockets of air from the pipeline
while the pipeline is in operation and under pressure.
IFY972102 15101 - 5
I
I
The Sewage Combination air Valve shall have 3" NPT inlet and outlet connections, 1/2" and
1" flushing connections, and suitable for a maximum working pressure of 150 PSI.
The materials of construction shall be: Body, Cover and Baffle of Cast Iron; Float and all
other trim shall be of Stainless Steel with the exception of the Buna-N Seat and adjustable
Buna-N Orifice Button.
Valves shall be Series 800 as manufactured by Val-Matic Valve and Mfg. Corp, Elmhurst,
Illinois, Model No 803BW, or equal.
Rubber hoses with quick disconnect coupling on each end shall be provided.
2.10 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Mueller; Product H-615.
2. Or equal.
B. Resilient seat or resilient wedge with a flange on one side for connection to the tapping
sleeve.
I
J
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Bolt holes of flanged valves shall straddle the vertical centerline of the pipe run.
B. Prior to installing flanged valves, the flange faces shall be thoroughly cleaned.
C. After cleaning, insert gasket and bolts, and tighten the nuts progressively and uniformly.
D. If flanges leak under pressure, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the
gasket, retighten or reinstall the nuts and bolts, and retest the joints.
E. Joints shall be watertight at test pressures before acceptance.
F. Thoroughly clean threads of screwed joints by wire brushing, swabbing, or other
approved methods.
G. Apply approved joint compound to threads prior to making joints.
H. Joints shall be watertight at test pressures before acceptance.
I
C
Li
I
I
I
FY972102 '
15101 - 6
I
1 2.4 VALVE BOXES
I
C
[1
A. Buffalo two-piece sliding type, cast iron, with 5 -1/4 -inch shaft of appropriate length for
the installation.
B. Extension pieces, if required, shall be the manufacturer's standard type.
C. Furnish units complete with all necessary bases and accessories.
2.5 EXTENSION STEMS FOR VALVE OPERATORS
A. Where the depth of the valve is such that its centerline is more than 4 feet below grade,
' provide operating extension stems to bring the operating nut to a point 6 inches below
the surface of the ground and/or box cover.
B. Constructed of steel.
C. Complete with 2 -inch square operating nut.
D. Bolt to valve stem to prevent separation.
2.6 GATE VALVES
IA. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Clow; Product F-6100.
2. American Flow Control, Product Series 500.
3. Or equal.
B. Gate Valves:
1. Double disc parallel seat type in accordance with AWWA C509 with resilient
wedge.
2. Mechanical joint with non -rising stems and two inch square operating nut.
' 3. Open by turning to the left or counter clockwise.
C. Gate Valve Body and Bonnet:
1. Cast iron.
2. Conform to ASTM A126, Class B.
3. "O" ring type seals and smooth unobstructed waterway when in fully open position.
4. Mechanical joint ends underground; flange joint ends above ground.
2.7 PLUG VALVES
Plug valves shall be of the non -lubricated, resilient seated, eccentric type. They shall have
' round ports with a flow area not less than 90% of the connecting pipe area or rectangular ports
equal to the pipe area.
1 FY972102 15101 - 3
I
Valves shall be rated for 175 P.S.I. up to 12" and 150 P.S.I. For sizes 14" and larger. Drop
tight shut-off shall be provided at full rated working pressure in the standard or reverse flow
direction. An adjustable close position stop shall be provided for field adjustment. The seat
end shall be cast on valve body.
The shaft seal shall be per AWWA specification C504-80, section 3.7 and be of either. the '
bronze cartridge type with two O -Rings, V -Type or pull down packing. If V -Type or pull
down packings are utilized, they shall be self-adjusting. All shaft seals shall be replaceable
without disassembling the valve and while the valve is under system operating pressure.
The plug shall be of a one piece design with a precision molded resilient facing. Resilient
body seats are not acceptable. The resilient seating surface shall not be in the flow way
pattern when the valve is in the open position. The body seating surface shall be welded
nickel overlay containing a minimum of 90% nickel and machined to a.16 micro -inch finish
containing no stress cracks.
Plug valves shall have worm gear actuators. Non -buried service actuators shall be supplied
with position indicators and handwheels. Buried service actuators shall be supplied with a 2"
AWWA nut.
Radial journal bearings shall be stainless steel, of the permanently lubricated type. Two thrust
bearings shall be provided in the upper journal area, one of stainless steel and one of teflon.
The lower journal shall have one stainless steel thrust bearing of the non-adjustable type. Grit
seals shall be furnished in the upper and -lower journals to prevent abrasive media from
entering the bearing and seal areas.
COATING: The valve interior shall be coated with 4-6 mils of a two part hi -build epoxy
suitable for potable water service. The exterior of the flanged valves shall be
prime coated with a universal base primer. The exterior of the mechanical
joint (MJ) valves are to be coated with asphalt varnish.
TESTING: All testing shall be conducted per AWWA C504-80, section 5, covering rubber
seated butterfly valves. Each valve shall be performance tested per para. 5.2
assuring valve operation.
Body seat and shell leakage testing to be conducted on each valve per para. 5.3 and 5.4.
Proof of design testing shall be conducted per para. 5.5 and witnessed by a third party
inspection agency. Certified copies of this report shall be available upon request.
Valve shall be as manufactured by Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp., Series 5000, DeZurik or
approved equal.
I
FY972102 '
15101 -a
I
' SECTION 15101
VALVES
PART I. GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install valves.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
I. A. Section 02620 - Cement -Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
1.3 REFERENCES.
' A. American Society for Testing and Materials, 1961 Race Street, Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania 19103.
1. ASTM A126 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe
Fittings.
2. ASTM B61 - Specification for Steam of Valve Bronze Castings.
' PART 2. MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Items specified shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve
standardization for operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services.
B. Valves to be complete with necessary operators, valve boxes, extension stems, floor
stands, worm and gear operators, operating nuts, etc., required for proper completion of
' work.
C. Valves of equal quality by other manufacturers will be considered in accordance with the
'General Conditions.
ID. Renewable parts including discs, packing, and seats shall be of types recommended by
valve manufacturer for intended service.
1 E. Units shall have name of manufacturer and size of valve cast on the body or bonnet or
shown on a permanently attached plate in raised letters.
11
IrYar_iO2
15101 - I
C
I
2.2
2.3
DESIGN FEATURES
A. Brass and bronze components of valves and appurtenances which have surfaces in
contact with the water shall be alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and 2 percent
aluminum.
B. Stainless steel Alloy 18-8 may be substituted for bronze at the option of the manufacturer
and with the approval of the Engineer.
C. All gland bolts on iron body valves shall be bronze and shall be fitted with brass nuts.
VALVE OPERATORS
A. Open by turning counterclockwise.
B. Worm and gear operators to be of totally enclosed design, so proportioned as to permit
operation of the valve under full operating head with a maximum pull of 40 pounds on
the operator.
C. Self-locking type to prevent the disc or plug from creeping.
D. Self-locking worm gears to be a one-piece design of gear bronze material, accurately
machine cut.
E. Worm to be hardened alloy steel with thread ground and polished.
F. Reduction gearing to run in a proper lubricant.
G. Provide gear operators with position indicators, where specified, to show the position of
the valve disc or plug.
H. Operators to be galvanized and painted the same color as the valve and associated
pipeline.
I
J
Buried valves to have 2 -inch x 2 -inch square operating nut.
Above -ground valves to have handwheel operators.
H
I
I
I
E
I
I1
E
I
H
[1
I
I
I
FY972102 15 101 - 2
H
6.0 CIRCUITRY COMPONE NTS
The existing 40 HP pumps are presently wired for 230 volt, 3 phase, but the electrical supply will
be changed to 460 volt, 3 phase. A motor control center, specified elsewhere, will contain starters
and disconnects for the two (2) 40 HP, 460 volt pumps and the 100 HP, 460 volt pump. Power
available to the pump logic panel will be 120 vac.
A 120/24 vac ACME transformer will be mounted in the logic panel and will power the control
circuitry.
Panel components will be by the following manufacturers: alternator, Timemark; lightning arrestor.
'• Delta: elapsed time meters, Cramer: indicator lights and switches, Square D: aluminum deadfront,
Instrument & Supply; float switches, Instrument & Supply; breakers, Square D; wiring channels,
Panduit; and terminals, Connectron.
A wiring diagram will be permanently affixed to the inside of the panel enclosure.
Panel will be as manufactured by Instrument & Supply, Inc., Hot Springs, Arkansas, 501-262-3282.
Ti
END OF SECTION
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
' FY972102 11312-3
I
I
SECTION 11312
CONTROL PANEL
' 1.0 GENERAL
The proposed control panel will control the operation of the two (2) existing 40 HP pumps and the
proposed 100 HP pump. The panel will have provisions to also control a second future 100 HP
pump. The pumps will withdraw wastewater from two (2) adjacent wetwells which are joined by
a 14" gravity sewer pipe. The existing pumps draw suction from the older (north) wetwell while the
proposed 100 HP submersible pump and the future 100 HP submersible pump will be installed in
the most recently constructed wetwell (south).
A level sensing bubbler line will be installed in the older (north) wetwell, and two (2) redundant
"pump(s) stop" suspended float switches will be installed - one (1) in each wetwell. The two (2)
redundant "float control off level backup" stop switches shall stop all pumps whether in "auto" or
' "hand" position.
2.0 CONTROL SCHEME
IThe panel circuitry will be designed to provide the following actions at the corresponding wetwell
levels:
Distance above north Distance above south
wetwell floor wetwell floor
Float Control off level backup 3' 8"
Low wetwell level alarm 3' 8"
Lead pump off (40 HP) 4' 0"
Lag pump off (40 HP) 4" 6"
Lead pump on (40 HP) 5' 0"
Standby pump off (100 HP) 5,3"
Lag pump on (40 HP) 5' 6"
Standby pump on (100 HP) Lead/Lag
pumps off (40 HP) 6'
Lead pump enabled (40 HP) 6' 6"
Lag pump enabled (40 HP) 7' 0"
High wetwell level alarm 7' 6"
FY972102 11312-I
I
The two (2) 40 HP pumps will alternate on each successive pumping cycle.
A flashing red alarm light will be illuminated upon wetwell high level, and a flashing yellow will
be illuminated upon low wetwell level.
Auxiliary alarm contacts will be provided for use by the existing SCADA system.
3.0 ENCLOSURE
The control panel enclosure will be manufactured by Hoffman, or equal, and will be NEMA 4X, type
304 stainless steel with continuously welded'and smooth ground seams. The enclosure will contain
no holes or knockouts, yet the control panel systems integrator will drill four (4) holes in the bottom
of the enclosure. Each hole will be covered with stainless steel #24 insect mesh which will be
affixed to the inside of the enclosure with epoxy.
The enclosure will feature seamless foam -in -place watertight and dust tight gasket around the inner
periphery of the door. '
The door will have a continuous stainless steel hinge. The door will be removable by removing the
stainless steel hinge pin. '
The enclosure will feature stainless steel weld nuts for mounting a white enamel coated subpanel.
The enclosure will meet the requirements of UL 50 type 4X.
4.0 LEVEL CONTROLLER/INDICATOR
The City of Fayetteville's contract operator, OMI, Inc.., has standardized lift station control panels
around the E.G. Controls electrogauge level controller/indicator, as represented by Instrument &
Supply, Inc. of Hot Springs, Arkansas.
The electrogauge works in conjunction with wetwell level as provided by backpressure from a i
bubbler dip tube. Ten feet of the wetwell level can be displayed on the indicator. The indicator has
contact points for every 0.25of wetwell level for a total of 40 points. The indicator shall be a
manometer which operates at 24 vac power.
5.0 AIR SUPPLY SYSTEM
The air supply system will be an E.G. Controls bubbler air monitor system, Model BAMS-20. The
unit will consist of two air compressors which alternate in operation. The BAMS unit provides LED
lights to indicate the presence of air flow, no air flow, flow switch failure, compressor #2 running,
compressor #1 fail, and compressor #2 fail.
Li
11
FY972102 11312-2 '
I
I�
1
2.03 CARRIER GUIDE BRACKET
A. A factory installed pump carrier guide bracket shall be fabricated from steel and painted
with a corrosion resistant coating. The carrier shall be mounted on the pump so that
when lifting or lowering there are no forces or couples exerted on the guide rails. All
fasteners shall be 300 series stainless steel.
1 2.04 LIFTING CHAIN
I
I
I
I
1
1
A. The pumping unit shall be provided with a stainless steel lifting chain and be of sufficient
length to extend from the pump to the top of the wet -well. The access frame shall
provide a hook to attach the chain when not in use. The lifting chain shall be sized
according to the pump weight.
2.05 ACCESS FRAME AND DOOR (2 REQUIRED)
A. Two separate access frame assemblies shall be supplied with separate hinged doors for
removal of pumps. Two are required; one for the pump being installed at this time and
one for a future pump. The frame assemblies and doors shall be aluminum, with 300
series stainless steel hinges and hardware. The aluminum door shall have a raised tread
plate to provide a skid -proof surface. As a safety precaution, each pump shall be
provided with a separate door so as to limit access to the wet -well. Load rating shall be
a minimum 300 PSF for aluminum. The frame shall support the float mounting bracket.
A recessed handle shall be provided with each door, as well as a safety latch to hold the
door in an open position. Hatches shall be supplied by the pump manufacturer.
1 2.06 FLOAT MOUNTING BRACKET
I
I
I
I
I
A A float mounting bracket shall be provided with strain reliefs. The bracket shall be
fabricated from steel, coated for corrosion resistance, and attached to the access frame
with 300 series stainless steel fasteners. A dielectric spacer should be installed when
bolting to an aluminum access frame.
2.07 GUIDE RAIL
A. The dual rail guide design keeps the pump in proper alignment with the stationary
discharge piping. The rail shall be 2" stainless steel pipe and positioned on each side of
the pump so that no weight of the pump bears on the rails at any time.
IFY972102 11311 - 7
3.01 WARRANTY
A. In addition to the manufacturers standard warranty, a five-year warranty shall also be
provided. The warranty period shall be five years from date of shipment on• all
equipment except for the control equipment which will carry the manufacturers standard.
warranty. The following parts will be replaced within five years of date of shipment
upon payment of the applicable percentage of the list price of each part in effect at the
time of replacement.
B. Months after shipment shall be determined by date of receipt of defective product by
authorized service station representing manufacturer. Purchaser shall assume all
responsibility and expenses for removal, reinstallation, and freight.
MONTHS AFTER SHIPMENT
0-18 19-31 32-45 46-60
Mechanical Seal
0%
25%
50%
75%
Impeller
0%
30%
50%
80%
Pump Housing
0%
30%
50%
80%
Wear Ring
0%
50%
80%
100%
Ball Bearings
0%
50%
80%
100%
Rotor and Stator
0%
40%
80%
100%
END OF SECTION
FY972102 1 131 1 - 8 '
I
3.09 SERVICEABILITY
LJ
H
A. The complete rotating assembly shall be capable of being removed from the volute
without disturbing the suction piping, discharge piping, and volute. The motor housing,
seal housing with seal plate and impeller still attached to the shaft shall be capable of
being lifted out of the volute case from the top as one assembly.
' 3.10 SUPPORT
I
1
I
I
I
I
[1
I
A. Though the pump may not require feet to support the unit while installed, the pump
volute must have feet to support the unit when removed for service. Units which do not
have feet upon which the unit can be supported when removed for service shall not be
acceptable.
4.01 TESTING
A. Commercial testing shall be required and include the following.
1. The pump shall be visually inspected to confirm that it is built in accordance with
the specification as to HP, voltage, phase and hertz.
2. The motor and seal housing chambers shall be hi -potted to test for moisture content
and/or insulation defects
3. Pump shall be allowed to run dry to check for proper rotation.
4. Discharge piping shall be attached, the pump submerged in water and amp readings
shall be taken in each leg to check for an imbalanced stator winding. If there is a
significant difference in readings, the stator windings shall be checked with a bridge
to determine if an unbalanced resistance exists. If so, the stator shall be replaced.
B. A non -witnessed certified Hydraulic Institute performance test shall be performed. This
shall include the following:
1. The pump shall be tested at the design point as well as at least 7 other points to
develop a curve. Data shall be collected to plot the head -capacity curve as well as
a KW input and amperage curve.
2. In making these tests, no minus tolerance or margin shall be allowed with respect
to capacity, total head, or efficiency at the specified design condition. Pump shall
be held within a tolerance of +10% of rated capacity or at rated capacity with a
tolerance of+5% of rated head. The pump shall be tested at shut-off but shall not
be plotted and only used as a reference point when plotting the performance curve.
3. Complete records shall be kept of all information relevant to the test as well as the
manufacturer's serial number, type and size of pump as well as any impeller
modification made to meet the design conditions.
IFY972102 11311 - 5
I
4. A written test report shall be prepared, signed and dated by the test engineer
incorporating 3 curves (head -capacity, KW input, and amperage) along with the
pump serial number, test number, date, speed, volts, phase, and impeller diameter.
This report shall then be submitted to the Engineer.
5.01 WARRANTY
A. The pump unit or any part thereof shall be warranted against defects in material or
workmanship within one year from date of installation or 18 months from date of
manufacture, whichever comes first, and shall be replaced at no charge with a new or
remanufactured part, F.O.B. factory or authorized warranty service station. The
warranty shall not assume responsibility for incidental damages resulting from the failure
of the pump to perform. The warranty shall not apply to damage resulting from accident,
alteration, design, misuse or abuse.
HYDRORAIL - DUAL RAIL STATION
1.01 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to
provide a complete pumping system as specified herein.
B. The Hydrorail System shall include one submersible non -clog sewage pump, discharge
elbow with, hydraulic sealing flange assembly with sealing diaphragm, pump carrier
assembly lifting chain or cable, access frame and hatch cover, float mounting bracket,
control equipment, guide rails and discharge piping.
C. Refer to separate specifications for pump and control equipment.
2.01 DISCHARGE BASE ELBOW WITH BASE PLATE
A. The discharge elbow/base plate assembly is designed to rest squarely on the wet -well
floor assuring perfect alignment and a smooth surface for the pump,. The base plate shall
also include bolt down holes, a leveling bolt, and adjustable guide rail supports. The
sealing face of the base elbow shall be spray coated with zinc to provide a smooth,
corrosion and abrasion resistant surface. All fasteners shall be 300 series stainless steel.
2.02 HYDRAULIC SEALING. FLANGE
A. A cast iron sealing flange, complete with Buna N rubber diaphragm type sealing gasket,
shall be mounted on each pump discharge. This diaphragm shall be held in place by a
clamp ringwith stainless steel fasteners.
J
I
I
I
Li
I
I
Ii
U
I
FY972102 1 131 1 - 6
I
3.04 BEARINGS AND SHAFT
A. An upper radial bearing and a lower thrust bearing shall be required. These shall be
' heavy-duty single row ball bearings which are permanently lubricated by the dielectric
oil which fills the motor housing. Double row, sealed grease packed bearings shall not
be acceptable. Bearings which require lubrication according to a prescribed schedule
' shall not be acceptable. The upper radial bearing shall have a minimum B-10 life at the
specified condition of 40,000 hours and the lower thrust bearing shall have a minimum
B-10 life at the specified condition of 40,000 hours. Bearings shall be locally available
B. The shaft shall be machined from a solid 303 stainless steel forging and be a design
which is of large diameter with minimum overhang to reduce shaft deflection and
' prolong bearing life.
' 3.05 SEALS
A. The pump shall have two mechanical seals, mounted in tandem, with an oil chamber
between the seals, John Crane Type 21, BF1Cl, seals shall be used with the rotating seal
faces being carbon and the stationary seal faces to be ceramic. The lower seal shall be
replaceable without disassembly of the seal chamber and without the use of special tools.
Pump -out vanes shall be present on the backside of the impeller to keep contaminants
out of the seal area. Units which require the use of tungsten -carbide seals or foreign
manufactured seals shall not be acceptable. Seals shall be locally available.
' B. The pump shall be quipped with a 300 series stainless steel shaft sleeve under the lower
seal for added protection to reduce costly shaft work in the event of seal failure. The
' sleeve shall be keyed to the shaft and "O" ringed to prevent leakage under the sleeve.
Units which do not include a stainless steel shaft sleeve shall not be considered equal nor
' acceptable.
C. The pump shall be equipped with a seal leak detection probe and warning system. This
shall be designed to alert maintenance personnel of lower seal failure without having to
take the unit out of service for inspection or requiring access for checking seal chamber
oil level and consistency.
D. There shall be an electric probe or seal failure sensor installed in the seal chamber
between the two tandem mechanical seals. If the lower seal fails, contaminants which
' enter the seal chamber shall be detected by the sensor and send a signal to operate the
specified warning device
' E. Units equipped with opposed mechanical seals shall not be acceptable.
I
IFY972102 1 131 1 - 3
C
1
3.06 IMPELLER 1
A. Impeller shall be of the two -vane, enclosed non -clogging design and have pump -out
vanes on the front and backside of the impeller to prevent grit and other materials from
collecting in the seal area. Single vane design impellers which cannot be easily trimmed
and which do not maintain balance with wear causing shaft deflections and reducing seal
and bearing life are not acceptable. Impeller shall not require coating. Because most
• impeller coatings do not remain beyond the very early life of the impeller, efficiency and
other performance data submitted shall be based on performance with an uncoated
impeller. Attempts to improve efficiency by coating impeller shall not be acceptable. 1
B. Impellers shall be hydraulically and statically balanced. The tolerance values shall be
as listed below according to the International Standard Organization grade 6.3 for rotors 1
in rigid frames. The tolerance is to be split equally between the two valance planes
• which are the two impeller shrouds.
• RPM Tolerance
1750 .02in. - oz./lb. Of impeller weight 1
C. The impeller shall be threaded shaft or tapered shaft and key driven. A 300 series
stainless steel washer and impeller bolt shall be used to fasten the impeller to the shaft.
Straight end shafts for attachment of the impeller shall not be acceptable.
3.07 CASING 1
A. The casing shall be of -the end suction volute type having sufficient strength and
thickness to withstand all stress and strain from service at full operating pressure and
load. The casing shall be of the centerline discharge type equipped with an automatic 1
pipe coupling arrangement for ease of installation and piping alignment. The design
shall be such that the pumps will be automatically connected to the discharge piping
when lowered into position with the guide rails. The casing shall be accurately
machined, and bored for register fits with the suction and casing covers.
B. A volute case wearing ring shall be provided to minimize impeller wear. The wear ring
shall be alloy 230 brass, ASTM B-43 and held by 300 series stainless steel fasteners.
The wear ring shall be easily replaceable in the field. Wear rings of any other material
shall not be acceptable.
3.08 PAINTING
A. The pump shall be painted after assembly, but before testing with an alkyd air dried
enamel. The paint shall be applied in one coat with a minimum mil thickness of 3 to 4
mils. •1
• •FY972102 11311-4 1
LI
I
1 1.01 GENERAL
SECTION 11311
NON -CLOG SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMP
IA. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to
provide one non -clog submersible centrifugal sewage pump as specified herein.
2.01 OPERATING CONDITIONS
I
[I
I
n
I
I
I
I
I
A. The pump shall be rated 100 H.P., 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz, 1750 R. P. M. The unit
shall produce 1260 U.S. GPM at 146 feet TDH, with a minimum pump efficiency of
68%, and 950 U.S. GPM at 155 feet TDH. The pump shall be capable of handling a 3"
spherical solid. The pump shall be non -overloading throughout the entire range of
operation without employing a service factor. The pump shall reserve a minimum
service factor of 1.15. The performance curve submitted for approval shall state in
addition to head and capacity performance, the pump efficiency, solid handling
capability, and reflect motor service factor..
3.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. The pump shall be a centrifugal, non -clog, solids handling, submersible, wastewater type,
model S8LA as manufactured by Hydromatic Pumps, or approved equal. The pump
volute, motor and seal housing shall be high quality gray cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class
25. The pump discharge shall be fitted with a 8" standard ASA 125 lb. Flange, faced and
drilled. All external mating parts shall be machined and Buna N Rubber O-ring sealed
on a beveled edge. Gaskets shall not be acceptable. All fasteners exposed to the pumped
liquids shall be 30 series stainless steel.
3.02 ELECTRICAL POWER CORD
A. Electrical Power cord shall be water resistant 600V, 60°C minimum, and applied
dependent on amp draw for size.
B. The pump shall be triple protected with a compression fitting and two epoxy potted areas
at the power cord entry to the pump. A separation between the junction box areas of the
pump and the motor by a stator lead sealing gland or terminal board shall not be
acceptable.
C. The power cable entry into the cord cap assembly shall first be made with a compression
fitting. Each individual lead shall be stripped down to bare wire at staggered intervals,
and each strand shall be individually separated. This area of the cord cap shall then be
filled with an epoxy compound potting which will prevent water contamination to gain
entry even in the event of wicking or capillary attraction.
IFY972102 11311 - I
L
H
D. The power cord leads shall then be connected to the motor leads with extra heavy
connectors having brass inserts with a screwed wire to wire connection, rather than a
terminal board that allows for possible leaks.
E. The connection box wiring shall be separated from the motor housing wiring by stripping
each lead down to bare wire, at staggered intervals, and separating each strand. This area
shall be filled with an epoxy compound potting: Fiberglass terminal boards which are
subject to heat fatigue and cracking, and which may lead to possible leaks shall not be
acceptable.
F. The cord cap assembly where bolted to the connection box assembly and the connection
box assembly where bolted to the motor housing shall each be sealed with a Buna-N
rubber O-ring on a beveled edge to assure proper sealing.
3.02 MOTOR
A. The stator, rotor and bearings shall be mounted in a sealed submersible type housing.
The stator windings shall have Class F insulation, (155 degrees Cot 311 degrees F), and
a dielectric oil filled motor, NEMA B design (3 phase), NEMA L design, (single phase).
Because air -filled motors do not dissipate heat as efficiently as oil filled motors, they
shall not be acceptable.
B. The pump and motor shall be specifically designed so that they may be operated partially
dry or completely submerged in the liquid being pumped. The pump shall not require
cooling water jackets. Dependence upon, or use. of, water jackets for supplemental
cooling shall not be acceptable.
C. Stators shall be securely held in place with a removable end ring and threaded fasteners
so they may be easily removed in the field without the use of heat or a press. Stators held
by a heat shrink fit shall not be acceptable. Stators must be capable of being repaired or
rewound by local motor service station. Units which require service only by the factory
shall not be acceptable. No special tools shall be required for pump and motor
disassembly
D. Pump shall be equipped with heat sensors. The heat sensor(s) two on three phase, shall
be a low resistance, bi-metal disc that is temperature sensitive. They shall be mounted
directly in the stator and sized to open at 120 degrees C or 130 degrees C and
automatically reset at 30-35 degrees C differential. The sensor shall be connected in
series withe the motor starter coil so that the starter is tripped if a heat sensor opens. The
motor starter shall be equipped with overload heaters 3 -leg on three phase so all normal
overloads are protected by external heater block.
H
J
I
I
H
H.
I
I
H
I
H
I
H
u
FY972102 1
11311-2
PAINTING SCHEDULE
PIPING AND VALVES IN VAULTS
Surface Prep Paint Material Min. Coats. Cover
Abrasive Blast, or Organic Zinc 1 coat, 2.5 MDFT
Centrifugal Wheel Blast Rich Primer
(SP 10)
Chlorinated 2 coats, 4 MDFT
Rubber Finish
IC. Submerged Metal: Metal surfaces below a plane of 1 foot above the maximum liquid
surface, metal surfaces above the maximum liquid surface which are a part of the
immersed equipment, concrete embedded surfaces of metallic items under submerged
conditions; wall pipes, pipes, pipe sleeves, weirs, baffles, access manholes, gate
guides and thimbles, and structural steel. This system shall also be on above ground
ductile iron pipe, except surface preparation will include a tar stop on asphalt coated
pipe.
D. Surfaces which have been factory prepared and primed need only have finish coats
' field applied, unless primer coating is damaged. Coatings manufacturer shall provide
appropriate solvent coatings as required for adhesion of finish coats.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION
1 09900- I l
Li
3.15 FILM THICKNESS
A. Coverage is listed as either total minimum dry film thickness in mils (MDFT) or the
spreading rate in square feet per gallon (SFPG). Per coat determinations are listed as
MDFTPC or SFPGPC. The number of coats is the minimum required irrespective of
the coating thickness.
' 1. Additional coats may be required to obtain the minimum required paint
thickness, depending on method of application, and atmospheric conditions.
2. Maximum film build per coat shall not exceed the coating manufacturer's
' recommendations.
3. Perform electrical inspection and film thickness measurements on coated
I. surfaces with properly calibrated instruments.
4. Recoat and repair as necessary for compliance with the Specifications.
5. Coatings will be subject to inspection by Engineer and coating manufacturer's
representative.
6. Particular attention shall be given edges, angles, flanges, where insufficient film
thicknesses are likely to be present, ensure proper millage in these areas.
' 7. After repaired and recoated areas have dried sufficiently, final tests will be
conducted by the Engineer.
8. Coating thickness specified in mils will be measured with a magnetic type dry
film thickness gage; Mikrotest, supplied by Nordson Corporation, Anaheim, CA.
9. Finish coat (expect zinc primer and galvanizing) will be tested for holidays aqd
discontinuities with an electrical holiday detector, low voltage, wet sponge type;
' Model M- I, manufactured by Tinker and Rasor, San Gabriel, CA.
10. Each coat will be checked for the correct millage.
11. No measurement will be made under a minimum of 8 hours after application of
' coating.
3.16 DAMAGED COATINGS
A. Damaged coatings, pinholes, and holidays shall have the edges feathered and repaired
' in accordance with the recommendations of the paint manufacturer, as reviewed by
the Engineer.
I. Repair of fusion bonded coatings to be as recommended by the original
applicator.
2. Liquid repair kits to be provided for this purpose by the applicator, as
recommended by the coating manufacturer.
' B. Finish coats, including touch-ups, and damage -repair coats shall be applied in a
manner which will present a uniform texture and color -matched appearance.
3.17 UNSATISFACTORY APPLICATION
A. Coatings found to have improper finish color, or insufficient film thickness, the
surface shall be cleaned and topcoated with the specified paint material to obtain the
specified color and coverage. Specific surface preparation information to be secured
from the coating manufacturer and the Engineer.
09900-9
I
a"
C.
D.
E.
3.18
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.19
A.
B.
C.
3.20
Visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint shall be hand or power -sanded
feathering the edges.
I. The areas shall then be primed and finish coated in accordance with the
Specifications.
2. Depending on the extent of repair and its appearance, a finish sanding and
topcoat may be required by the Engineer.
Work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections. Evidence of
these conditions shall be cause for rejection.
Defect in the coating system shall be repaired per written recommendations of the
coating manufacturer. -
Leave staging
up
until the
Engineer has
inspected the surface or coating. Staging
removed prior
to
approval
by Engineer
shall be replaced.
SHIPPING
Protect precoated items shipped to the jobsite from damage.
Coated items shall be battened to prevent abrasion.
Use nonmetallic or padded slings and straps in handling.
Items will be rejected for excessive damage, in the opinion of the Engineer.
CLEANUP
Cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal
containers or destroyed at the end of each day.
Upon completion of the Work, staging, scaffolding, and containers shall be removed
from the site or destroyed in a legal manner.
Paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors shall be completely
removed, and the entire job left clean.
APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Unless otherwise indicated in the Specifications or on the Drawings, Work shall be
painted or coated in accordance with the following application schedule.
B. In the event of discrepancies or omissions in the following, request clarification from
the Engineer before starting the work in question.
I
I
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
09900 - 10
3.8 PRE -BLAST CLEANING REQUIREMENTS
A. Oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants shall be removed prior to
blast cleaning.
B. Pre -blast cleaning methods shall use steam, open flame, hot water, or cold water with
appropriate detergent additives followed with clean water rinsing.
C. Small isolated areas shall be cleaned as above or solvent cleaned with suitable
I. solvents and clean cloths.
D. Sharp edges shall be rounded or chamfered and burrs, jagged edges, and surface
defects shall be ground smooth.
E. Welds and adjacent areas shall be prepared so that there is:
I1. No undercutting or reverse ridges on the weld bead.
2. No weld spatter on or adjacent to the weld or any other area to be painted.
3. No sharp peaks or ridges along the weld bead.
4. Embedded pieces of electrode or wire shall be ground flush with the adjacent
surface of the weld bead.
3.9 BLAST CLEANING REQUIREMENTS
A. The type of equipment and speed of travel shall be such that and specified degree of
'cleanliness is obtained.
B. The type and size of abrasive shall be selected to produce a surface profile that meets
the coating manufacturer's recommendations for the particular primer to be used.
C. Only dry blast cleaning methods will be permitted.
D. The abrasive shall not be reused.
E. Comply with the applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations
for blast cleaning.
3.10 POST -BLAST CLEANING AND OTHER CLEANING REQUIREMENTS
A. Surfaces shall be cleaned of dust and residual particles caused by the cleaning
operations by dry (no oil or water vapor) air blast cleaning or other method prior to
' painting.
B. Enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem shall be vacuum
' cleaned and wiped with a tack cloth.
C. Surfaces shall be coated within 6 hours after they are blasted.
' 09900-7
I
D. Surfaces that have started to rust before they are painted shall be re -blasted.
3.11 SOLVENT CLEANING
A. Solvent cleaning shall consist of removal of foreign matter such as oil, grease, soil, ,
drawing and cutting compounds, and other surface contaminants by the use of
solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or similar materials and
methods that involve a solvent or cleaning action. This method conforms with Steel
Structures Painting Council SP 1.
3.12 APPLICATION OF PAINT - GENERAL '
A. Furnish Engineer prior to application, manufacturer's written instructions for applying
each type of paint or protective coating.
1. Cleaned surfaces and coats shall be inspected prior to the succeeding coat.
2. Schedule inspections with the Engineer in advance. '
3. Apply coatings in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer's
recommendations, as reviewed by the Engineer. ,
4. Allow sufficient time between coats to assure thorough drying of previously
applied paint.
5. Paint new units that are to be bolted together and to structures prior to assembly ,
or installation.
3.13 SHOP PRIMED SURFACES
A. Shop primed items shall be inspected at the jobsite for compliance with these
Specifications.
1. Schedule inspections with Engineer in advance.
2. Areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded primer shall be hand or power sanded
feathering the edges.
3. Areas shall then be spot primed with the specified primer.
B. Prior to application of finish coats, shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned free of dirt,
oil, and grease, and a mist coat, 3.0 mil dry film thickness, of the specified primer
applied, complete.
C. Holdback areas for welding shall be prepared and primed, after welding, as required
for the specified paint system.
D. Application of primer shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.14 MANUFACTURER APPLIED PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Abraded areas on factory finished items: Repair in strict accordance with the
equipment manufacturer's directions.
B. Repaired areas shall be carefully blended into the original finish. '
I
' 3.2 INTENT
A. Leave surfaces of work in such a condition that only minor cleaning and sanding is
required prior to surface preparation and painting.
' B. Inspect and provide substrate surfaces that are prepared in accordance with these
Specifications and the printed directions and recommendations of the paint
' manufacturer whose product is to be applied.
3.3 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS NOT TO BE PAINTED
' A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates,
aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on
machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be painted.
B. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent
' surfaces.
C. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during
surface preparation and painting process.
D. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering the
motors.
3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Paint shall not be applied in temperatures beyond the manufacturer's recommended
maximum and minimum allowable, nor in dust, smoke -laden atmosphere, damp or
humid weather.
B. Abrasive blast cleaning shall not be performed whenever the relative humidity
exceeds 85 percent and when surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the
' dew point of the ambient air.
3.5 SAFETY
' A. Painting shall be performed in strict accordance with the safety recommendations of
the paint manufacturer; with the safety recommendations of the National Association
' of Corrosion Engineers contained in the publication, Manual for Painter Safety;
Federal. state. and local agencies having jurisdiction.
I
I
1 09900-5
I
I
3.6
PAINT MIXING
A. Multiple -component coatings shall be prepared using contents of the container for
. each component as packaged by the paint manufacturer.
B. No partial batches permitted.
C. Multiple -component coatings that have been mixed shall not be used beyond their pot
life.
D. Provide small quantity kits for touch-up painting and for painting other small areas.
E. Only the components specified and provided by the paint manufacturer shall be
mixed.
I
I
I
I
I
F. No intermixing of additional components permitted.
G. Keep materials sealed when not in use. I
H. Where more than one coat of a material is applied within a given system, color will be
alternated to provide a visual reference that the required number of coats has been
applied.
3.7 PREPARATION OF SURFACES - METAL ,
A. No surface preparation blasting will be permitted prior to submission of samples.
B. Workmanship for metal surface preparation as specified shall be in strict conformance
with the current Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Specifications as follows:
1. - Solvent Cleaning: SP 1
2. Hand Tool Cleaning: SP 2
3. Power Tool Cleaning: • SP 3
4. White Metal Blast Cleaning: SP 5
5. Commercial Blast Cleaning: SP 6
6. Brushoff Blast Cleaning: SP 7
7. Pickling: SP 8
8. Near -White Blast Cleaning: SP 10
C. Wherever the words "solvent cleaning," "hand tool cleaning," "wire brushing," or
"blast cleaning," or similar words of equal intent are used in these Specifications or. in
paint manufacturer's specifications, they shall be understood to refer to the applicable
SSPC. Specifications listed above.
D. Hand -tool clean areas that cannot be cleaned by power tool cleaning.
I
TI
B. Representative of the paint manufacturer, familiar with the products specified shall be
available at jobsite at initial starting of coating work and at intervals during surface
preparation and painting required for product application quality assurance, to
' determine compliance with manufacturer's instructions and these Specifications, and
to resolve necessary field problems attributable to, or associated with, manufacturer's
products furnished under this Contract.
' C. Inform Engineer a minimum of 3 days in advance of the start of surface preparation
' work or coating application work. Work shall be performed only in the presence of
Engineer, unless Engineer has granted prior approval to perform work in his absence.
D. For coatings subject to immersion, full cure must be obtained for the completed
system. Consult coatings manufacturer's written instructions for these requirements.
Coating shall not be immersed for until completion of the curing cycle.
' E. Inspection by Engineer, or waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the Work,
shall not be construed to relieve Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work
' in accordance with these Specifications.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
' A. Deliver new materials to the Project site in unopened containers that show, time of
use, designated name, date of manufacture, color, and name of manufacturer.
B. Store paints in a protected area that is heated or cooled to maintain temperatures
' within the range recommended by paint manufacturer.
1.10 WARRANTY
' A. Warrant to Owner and guarantee Work under this Section against defective
workmanship and materials for a period of 1 year commencing on the date of final
acceptance of the Work.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Products specified are manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc., Kansas City,
' Missouri, and Sherwin Williams.
B. Products for each specified function and system shall be of a single manufacturer.
1 09900- 3
I
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS I
A. Product: Refer to Painting Schedule at the end of this Section.
2.3 EPDXY FILLER
A. Manufacturer: Tnemec, epoxy filler and surfacer for spot welds, lap seams, and other
areas that require fill and smoothing.
2.4 COLOR SELECTION
A. Colors shall be formulated with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other
materials which might be affected by the presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas
likely to be present at the Project.
B. See Painting Schedule at the end of this Section of colors.
2.5 EQUIPMENT COLORS
A. Equipment shall be meant to include the machinery or vessel itself plus the structural
supports acid fasteners and attached electrical conduits. Nonsubmerged portions of
equipment shall be painted the same color as the process piping it serves, except as '
itemized below.
Equipment Color ,
Dangerous parts of equipment and machinery ....................OSHA Orange
Fire protection equipment and apparatus OSHA Red
Physical hazards in normal operating area; handrails ...............OSHA Yellow
PART 3. EXECUTION '
3.1 GENERAL
A. Materials of a paint system, including primer and finish coats, shall be produced by
the same paint manufacturer. Thinners, cleaners, driers, and other additives shall be
as recommended by the paint manufacturer of the particular coating. I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
[]
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PARTI. GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Prepare surfaces and furnish and apply paint and protective coatings.
B. Paint new exposed ferrous surfaces, whether specifically mentioned or not, except as
modified herein.
C. Paint exposed piping within vault.
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AWWA
American Water Works Association
FRP
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic
HCI
Hydrochloric Acid
MDFT
Minimum Dry Film Thickness
MDFTPC
Minimum Dry Film Thickness Per Coat
mil
Thousandths of an Inch
MIL -P
Military Specification - Paint
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Act
PSDS
Paint System Data Sheet
SFPG
Square Feet Per Gallon
SFPGPC
Square Feet Per Gallon Per Coat
SP
Surface Preparation
SSPC
Steel Structures Painting Council
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02625 - Ceramic Epoxy -Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).
1.5 SURFACES NOT REQUIRING PAINTING
A. Unless specified or shown on the Drawings, the following areas or items will not
require painting:
I. Nonferrous and corrosion -resistant ferrous alloys such as cooper, bronze, monel,
aluminum, chromium plate, weathering steel, and stainless steel except where
a. Required for electrical insulation between dissimilar metals.
IFY972101 09900-I
b. Aluminum and stainless steel is embedded in concrete or masonry, or
aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry.
c. Color coding of equipment and piping is required.
d. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) equipment with an integral colored gel
coat does not require painting, provided the color is as specified.
2. Prefinished electrical and architectural items such as motor control centers,
switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, transformers, disconnect switches, etc.
3. Items specified to be galvanized after fabrication unless specifically required
elsewhere in these Specifications or subject to immersion.
1.6
1.7
SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the following in accordance with Section 01001:
1. Obtain from each paint manufacturer for submittal to Engineer:
a. Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) for each paint system used.
b. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product used in the paint
system.
c. Technical Data Sheets for each product used in the paint system.
2. Submit the required information on a system -by -system basis.
3. Provide copies of the paint system submittals to the coating applicator.
4. A sample PSDS form is appended at the end of this Section.
B. Paint Color Sample: Submit samples of colors that Owner has chosen.
COLOR SELECTION CONFERENCE
A. Prepare color samples for each item on the Chart properly labeled with the same color
identification as specified in the scheduled on the Drawings. Provide additional
samples displaying full color selection available for each item on the Chart by each
manufacturer listed for use during the Conference.
B. Samples for the above referenced Chart and Conference are designated as
manufacturers' actual product and color chips; photographs and color reproductions in
brochures are not acceptable.
I.B. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide mock-ups using specified products and colors per the Painting Schedule,
located at the end of this Section. Engineer shall approve colors and application
process prior to starting Work of this Section.
noonn - 2
I
I
' Type S-2 (Wood Float Finish):
1. Float surface as indicated above.
2. Surface shall have a uniform sandy texture.
Type S-3 Underside Elevated Slab:
I1. Grind off projections as soon as forms are removed.
2. Repair rock pockets and honey -comb area defects.
' Type S-4 (Exterior Broomed Finish):
1. Finish concrete as specified for Type S-1 floor finish above, except only trowel the surface
once.
2. Finish surface by drawing fine -hair broom lightly across surface.
3. Brooming:
a. Broom in same direction and parallel to expansion joints.
b. Inclined slab: Broom perpendicular to slope. Texture shall be as approved by the
Engineer from sample panels.
c. Round roof slab: Broom surface in radial direction.
Type S-5 (Power Machine Finish):
I1. In lieu of hand finishing, use an approved power machine for finishing concrete floors and
slabs in accordance with directions of machine manufacturer and as approved by Engineer.
' 2. Use of power machine will not be allowed when concrete has not attained necessary set to
allow finishing without introducing high and low spots in slab.
3. Finish concrete as for Type S-1 above except second steel troweling may use power
' machine.
4. Perform first steel troweling for slab S-1 finish should be by hand.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
IFY972102
03300 - 25
C
' 3. Curing Compounds:
a. Verify compatibility with required finishes such as hardeners, paint, stain, tile,
or other specified work.
b. Exposed concrete receiving mastic applied adhesive, or metallic or mineral
aggregate hardeners shall be cured with the specified curing and sealing
'
compounds.
' E. Walls and Columns:
1. Use water curing procedures, not curing compounds, where walls are to receive
coatings, painting, cementitious material, or other similar finishes.
' 2. Leave concrete forms in place and keep sufficiently damp at for as required in
Paragraph 3.4.H.3.
3. When forms are removed within 7 days of concrete placement, apply curing
compound immediately after removal of forms or continuously sprinkle exposed
surfaces, or where allowed, apply curing compound after final finishing.
' F. Cold -Weather Curing:
1. Use moisture -cover curing or liquid membrane -forming compound as approved.
2. Protect concrete from temperature changes in accordance with ACI 306.
G. Hot -Weather Curing: Use water curing or moisture -cover curing as approved.
SCHEDULE 1
' CONCRETE FINISHES
' Area Type of Finish
Top Side of Uncovered Exterior Elevated Slabs S-4
' Roof Slab (Covered with Roofing Material) S-2
Underside of Elevated Slabs S-3
Exterior Slabs on Grade S-4
' Interior Slabs S-1, S-5
Clarifier Slabs S-2, S-7
Exterior Below Grade Walls W-1
' Exterior of Above Grade Walls W-3
Interior Walls of Water -Holding Basins W-3
Beams B-2
Columns C-2
I
IFY972102 03300-23
I
C
CONCRETE WALL FINISHES
Type W-1:
1. Fill snap -tie holes with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or polymer patching mortar as directed
by Engineer.
2. Knock if projections.
3.
Repair
honey -comb
areas and rock pockets.
4.
Small air holes do no
require patching.
I
I
Type W-3:
1. Plug snap -tie holes with nonshrink, nonmetallic, color -matched patching mortar approved
by Engineer. This mortar shall include the specified bonding admixture.
2. Grind off projections, fins, and rough spots.
3. Repair.other defects such as honey -comb areas, rock pockets, and other rough spots that are
a result of form release agent failure or other reasons with color -matched patching mortar.
This mortar shall include the specified bonding admixture.
CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES
I
I
H
Place, consolidate, strike off, and level concrete to proper elevations and give the required surface
finish. Jitterbugs or other special tools designed to force coarse aggregate away from surface and
allow a layer of mortar to accumulate will not be permitted.
Dusting of surfaces with dry materials will not be permitted. Slabs and floors shall be thoroughly
compacted by vibration.
Round off edges of slabs and tops of walls with steel edging tool, except where cove finish is
indicated on Drawings. Steel edging tool radius shall be 1/8 inch for slabs subject to wheeled traffic.
Type S-1 (Steel Trowel Finish):
Place, consolidate, strike off, and level concrete slab to proper elevation.
2. After concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation, and water sheen has
disappeared, float surface to a true even plane with no coarse aggregate visible to a uniform
sandy texture.
3. After the floating operation, trowel concrete at least twice to a smooth impervious surface
free from trowel marks.
4. Trowel surface again for the purpose of burnishing; final troweling shall produce a ringing
sound from trowel.
5. , Do not use dry cement or additional water when troweling; excessive troweling will not be
permitted.
6. The slab finish tolerances and slope tolerances and repairs shall be as specified.
J
Ti
I
II
I
1J
[I
FY972102
I
I
I
I
E. Structural Repairs:
I. Submit method and procedures to Engineer for approval.
2. Remove and replace concrete if repairs cannot be made to satisfaction of Engineer.
F. Surface Repairs:
1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired
to satisfaction of the Engineer.
U
2. Honey -combed areas and rock pockets:
a. Repair immediately after removal of forms.
b. Prepare no -slump concrete mortar and test so that, when dry, patching mortar
will match surrounding color and strength.
c. Cut out to solid concrete or minimum of 1 -inch depth.
d. Make edges for cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface.
' e. Thoroughly clean and dampen with water.
f. Apply bonding compound.
g. Compact no -slump concrete into patch, and finish to blend with adjacent
' finished concrete.
h. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
' 3. High Areas: Grind after concrete has cured at least 14 days.
4. Low Areas:
a. Repair during or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations.
b. Cut out low areas and replace with fresh concrete of same type and class as
original concrete.
c. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
'• 5. Defective Areas:
a. Cut out and replace with fresh concrete of same type and class as original
concrete.
b. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
6. Make structural repairs with prior approval of Engineer, as to method and procedure,
using the specified epoxy adhesive or epoxy mortar. Where epoxy injection
procedures must be used, use an approved low viscosity epoxy made by the
manufacturers previously specified.
7. Level floors for subsequent finishes by use of specified underlayment material.
8. Where required, level exposed floors by use of the specified self -leveling repair
topping.
9. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to approval of Engineer.
I
I
I
' FY972102 03300-21
C
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
BLOCKOUTS AT PIPES OR OTHER PENETRATIONS
A. Submit proposed blockouts for review in accordance with Section 01001.
CONCRETE FINISHES
A. Select finish required for this Project based on Schedule 1 located at the end of this
Section.
BEAMS AND COLUMN FINISHES
A. Type B-2:
1. Grind beams to remove form marks.
2. Repair rock pockets.
B. Type C-2:
1. Grind columns to remove form marks.
2. Repair rock pockets.
CURING OF CONCRETE
A. Follow recommendations in Standard Practice for Curing Concrete (ACI 308).
B. Begin curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and
finishing.
C. Continue curing for at least 7 days without interruption.
D. Curing Methods for Slabs
Water Curing:
a. Cover surface with burlap or sand (1 -inch deep) as soon as possible without
marring surface.
b. Keep continuously wet for 7 days; do not allow surface to become alternately
wet and dry.
c. Use water not more than 2 degrees F. cooler than concrete.
d. Allow surface to dry slowly before removing cover.
2. Moisture -Cover Curing:
a. Cover surface with plastic film (4 mil minimum) as soon as possible without
marring the surface. Cover entire surface without wrinkles or holes.
b. Cover plastic film with 1 -inch of sand and weight edges.
c. Keep covered for a minimum of 7 days.
H
I
I
I
I
I
I
j
I
_1
I
I
I
I
FY972102 03300.22 ,
I
3.14 BONDING TO CONCRETE SURFACES
A. New Concrete Surfaces:
I. New concrete is defined as less than 60 days old.
' 2. Roughen surface to hardened concrete.
3. Thoroughly clean and saturate with water.
4. Immediately place concrete.
' 5. Horizontal surfaces:
a. Cover surface with 2 -inches of grout.
b. Limit first lift on top of grout to 12 -inches.
c. Thoroughly vibrate to mix and consolidate grout and concrete.
B. Old Concrete Surfaces:
' I. Use bonding agent.
2. Prepare surface in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions and
recommendations for specific and application for this Project.
3. Follow manufacturers recommendations.
3.15 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. As specified in Section 03251.
' 3.16 WATERSTOPS
A. Install in construction joints of water -bearing structures and where indicated on Drawings.
3.17 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE
' A. Conform to ACI Standard Building Code requirements for reinforced concrete (ACI 318-
83), Section 4.7, "Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete", and to the following
' specifications:
B. Testing Responsibilities:
1. Contractor:
a. Collect, label, and handle test specimens at Project site.
' b. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage, curing, and protection for first
24 hours and for additional time as may be required before transporting to test
lab.
' c. Deliver test specimens to laboratory.
d. Pay for failed tests and additional testing resulting from failed tests or
Contractor preference.
1
I
IFY972102
03300-19
3.18
3.19
MU
C. Number of test cylinders
1. Set of cylinders: Three (3).
2. Sample frequency:
a. I set/class of concrete/50 cubic yards.
b. l set/class of concrete/3000 square feet of wall or slab surface.
c. I set/class of concrete/day.
d. Whichever is greater.
D. Laboratory shall test 3 cylinders for the 28 -day strength test. The test results should be
the average strength of the. 3 cylinders, except that if 1 cylinder shows obvious evidence
of improper sampling, molding or testing, it should be discarded and the strengths of the
other 2 cylinders averaged. If more than 1 cylinder shows defects, the test should be
abandoned.
PATCHING -GENERAL
A. Prior to starting patching work, except as specified, obtain Engineer's approval of
proposed patching techniques and mixes.
B. Develop patching techniques and mixes on mock-up panel; dress surface of patches that
will remain exposed to view to match color and texture of adjacent surfaces.
C. Do not start patching concrete surfaces that will remain exposed to view until architectural
surface finishes have been completed and Contractor has consulted with Engineer, since
other corrective action may be more appropriate.
TIE HOLES
A. Fill tie holes with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
B. Color of grout after curing shall match color of adjacent concrete.
REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE AREAS
A. Definition: Concrete in place that does not conform to specified design strength, shapes,
alignments, and elevations as shown on Drawings and contains surface defects.
B. Evaluation and acceptance of concrete shall conform to ACI 318.
C. With prior approval of Engineer, as to method and procedure, repair defective areas in
conformance with ACI 301, Chapter 9, except that the specified bonding compound shall
be used.
D. The specified patching mortar may be used in lieu of the above -mentioned method when
color match of adjacent concrete is not required. Prior approval of Engineer is required.
H
r
C
I
I
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
FY972102 03300-20 ,
I
F. Make every effort to maintain concrete temperature:
1. Below 90 degrees F. at time of placement, cool the ingredients before mixing by use
of chilled water or crushed ice.
2. Uniformity:
a. Minimize the time of placement.
b. Begin each operation in concrete finishing promptly when the concrete is ready
for it.
G. Place concrete promptly upon arrival at Project and vibrate immediately after placement.
H. Do not add water to retemper.
I. Consider placing concrete in late afternoon as opposed to early morning.
1 J. Provide windbreaks, shading, and fog spraying on days when temperature is forecast to
exceed 90 degrees F.
' K. Saw -Cut Joints:
I1. Maximum Joint Spacing: 36 times slab thickness, unless otherwise noted on
Drawings.
2. Soff-Cut Saw: Cut to a depth of 1 -1/4 -inch immediately after final finishing.
' 3. Conventional saw shall be used as soon as possible without dislodging aggregate to
a depth of 1/4 slab thickness.
IL. Protect and cure exposed surfaces by one of the following:
1. Continuous water curing.
2. Moisture -cover curing.
3.13 PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER (ACI 306R-78)
' A. Preparation:
1. Follow recommendations in Cold Weather Concreting, ACI 306.
2. Additives for the sole purpose of providing freeze protection shall not be used.
'
3. Arrangements for covering, insulating, housing, or steam heating newly -placed
concrete shall be made in advance of placement and shall be adequate to maintain
temperature and moisture conditions recommended.
I
n
II
IFY972102
03300 - 17
I
4. Temperatures of concrete mix shall be as shown as follows for various stages of mixing
and placing of concrete mix:
J
Section Size. Minimum Dimension
Air 12 in.- 36 in. -
Temperature
12 in. 36 in. 72 in. 72 in.
Minimum concrete temperature as mixed for indicated weather:
Above30°F 60°F 55°F 50°F 45°F
0°F to 30°F 65°F 60°F 55°F 50°F
Below0°F 70°F 65°F 60°F 55°F
Maximum allowable gradual temperature drop in first 24 hours after end of
protection:
50°F 40°F 30°F 20°F
B. Placement:
1. Surfaces to be in contact with concrete shall be free of snow, ice, and frost and shall
be above 40 degrees F.
2. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade.
3. Placement of insulating material, tarpaulins, or other movable coverings shall follow
closely the placing of concrete so that only a few feet of concrete are exposed to
outside air at anytime.
C. Curing and Protection:
1. Keep concrete continuously moist and maintain concrete temperature at a minimum
of 50 degrees F. for 7 days; temperature shall be uniform throughout concrete. If
high early strength concrete is used, this temperature requirement may be reduced
to 3 days.
2. It is recommended to leave forms in place for the entire period of protection; use
insulated blankets or other approved method on slab surfaces.
3. Limit rapid temperature changes at end of protection period to avoid thermal
cracking.
4. Cure other troweled or floated interior slabs with the specified dissipating resin type
curing compound.
5. Protection Requirements for Structural Concrete:
a. Follow recommendations above.
b. Verify concrete strength before removing forms orreducing supports and
before curing and protection are discontinued; field -cured test cylinders or
nondestructive strength testing in accordance with ACI 306 may be used.
L
L
L
L
UT
L
L
L
L
FY972102 03300-18 '
I
F. Vertical Free Fall Drop to Final Placement:
1. Concrete shall not be dropped freely where reinforcing will cause segregation.
'2. Not to exceed 10 feet for concrete containing high -range water -reducing admixture
(superplasticizer).
' 3. Not to exceed 5 feet for other concrete.
G. Do not use concrete truck chutes, pipes, finishing tools, etc., constructed of aluminum.
IH. Before Depositing Concrete:
1. Remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete.
' 2. Dampen:
a. Gravel fill beneath slabs on ground.
b. Sand where vapor barrier is specified.
' c. Wood forms.
3. Verify reinforcement is secured in position.
3.8 ADDITION OF WATER AT PROJECT SITE
IA. Do not add water to concrete at Project site if slump is within specified range.
B. With the Engineer's approval, add water to concrete arriving at Project site with a slump
less than the specified range, provided it can be demonstrated that the specified water -
cement ratio will not be exceeded.
IC. Water/Cement Ratio:
1. Concrete subject to freezing and thawing: Maximum water/cement ratio of 0.50, 4000
psi at 28 days or more.
' 2. Concrete subject to deicers or required to be watertight: Maximum cement/water ratio
of 0.45, 4500 psi at 28 days or more.
3. Reinforced concrete subjected to brackish water, salt spray, or deicers: Maximum
' water/cement ratio or 0.40, 5000 psi at 28 days or more.
D. The following tests will be required from each truck to which water has been added at
Project site: 3 cylinders, I slump, and 1 air test. Costs for these tests shall be the full
responsibility of the Contractor.
' 3.9 CONVEYING
IA. Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods which
will prevent the separation or loss of materials.
' B. Conveying equipment shall be capable of providing a supply of concrete at the site of
placement without interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between successive
increments.
IrY972102 03300-15
I
3.10
3.11
3.12
CONSOLIDATION AND VISUAL OBSERVATION
I
A. Concrete
shall
be consolidated with internal vibrators having a frequency of at
least
800 vpm,
with
amplitude required to consolidate concrete in the section being
placed.
B. At least one standby vibrator in operable condition shall be at the placement site prior to
and during placing concrete.
I
C. Consolidation equipment and methods shall conform to ACI 309 "Recommended Practice
for Consolidation of Concrete".
D. The forms shall contain sufficient windows or be limited in height to allow visual
observation of the concrete.
E. Vibrator operator is required to see the concrete being consolidated to ensure good quality
workmanship; or Contractor shall have a person actually observe the vibration of the
concrete and will advise the vibrator operator of changes needed to assure complete
consolidation.
F. Do no.t use vibrators to transport concrete in forms.
SEQUENCE OF PLACING WALL AND SLAB PANELS
A. Alternate placement, regardless whether slab, wall, or roof areas, to allow for strength gain
and some volume changes die to shrinkage.
B. Prepare a schedule for the Sequence of Placing Concrete and obtain approval of Engineer.
C. Where construction joints are required or shown, place panels alternately, allowing a
minimum of 7 days' curing time prior to placing adjacent panels unless otherwise noted
on Drawings. Refer to notes on the Drawings for specific Project requirements.
PLACING CONCRETE IN HOT WEATHER
A. Follow.the recommendations in Hot Weather Concreting, ACI 305.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
d
B. Do not place concrete at times when temperature is forecast to exceed 100 degrees F.
within 12 hours after the concrete is placed.
C. Verify preparations are complete before ordering concrete so that concrete may be placed
upon arrival.
D. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
E. Minimize size of concrete placements and thickness of layers of concrete.
I
I
H
FY972102 03300-16 '
TOLERANCES
BUILDINGS
(INCHES)
CONCRETE
CANAL
LINING
(INCHES)
DRAINAGE
STRUCTURE
(INCHES)
•
•
•
Footings••
V-1/2
Variation in dimensions
-1/2•
Variation in drawings
+2
+2
Misplacement or eccentricity
2 Percent
•
2 Percent
•
•
Reduction in thickness
5 Percent
•
5 Percent
•
........................................................................................................................_.................................................................
Steps:•
•
In a flight of stairs
Rise
1 /8
Tread •
1/4
In consecutive steps•
Rise
I/16
•
Tread •
•
•
1/8
I. Removal of Forms:
1. Do not disturb forms until concrete is sufficiently strong to withstand possible injury.
2. Do not remove shoring until member has acquired sufficient strength to support its
weight and the load upon it.
3. Guidelines for minimum elapsed time between completion of concrete placement and
removal of forms.
Class of Work Above 60° 50°-60° 40°-60° Below 40°
Walls in Mass Work 1 2 5 Not until test
have been made
indicating
concrete is set.
Thin Walls --12" or
less in thickness 2 4 7
Columns --if girders
are shown 3 5 10
Bottom forms of slabs --
Span: Greater than 5'
Span: 5' or less 4 8 14
Bottom forms of beams
and girders--
FY972102 03300- 13
I
Span: 14' or greater * * *
Span: Less than 14' 14 20 28
*Not until test cylinders indicate full 28 -day compressive strength.
3.5 FORM TIES
A. Place in uniform patterns on exposed surfaces.
B. Number and placement sufficient to withstand pressures and limit deflection of forms to
acceptable limits. '
3.6 BACKFILL AGAINST WALLS
A. Do not place earth backfill against walls until concrete has obtained a compressive
strength equal to the specified 28 -day compressive strength.
B. Where backfill is to be placed on both sides of wall, place both sides simultaneously to
prevent differential pressures.
C. Since walls of some structures are laterally restrained or supported by suspended slabs or
slabs on grade and are not designed as cantilever retaining walls, do not backfill these
walls until other work is complete and cured sufficiently to obtain the specified 28 -day
concrete strength.
3.7 PLACING CONCRETE - GENERAL 1
A. Do not place concrete without Engineer being present.
B. Notify Engineer or Engineer's representative, at least 1 full working day in advance before
starting to place concrete to permit inspection of forms, reinforcing, sleeves, conduits,
boxes, inserts, or other work required to be installed in concrete.
C. Review curing methods with Engineer and verify curing materials and equipment are at
Project site.
D. Placement shall conform to requirements and recommendations of ACI 304 and ACI 318,
except as modified in these Specifications.
E. Place concrete as soon as possible after leaving mixer in layers not over 1.5 feet deep: t
1. Without segregation or loss of ingredients.
2. Without splashing forms or steel above.
I
FY972102 03300- 14
I
H. Admixtures:
1. Concrete shall contain the specified water -reducing admixture or the specified high-
' range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer).
2. Concrete slabs placed at air temperatures below 50 degrees F shall contain the
specified non -corrosive, non -chloride accelerator.
I3. Concrete required to be air entrained shall contain an approved air entraining
admixture.
' 4. Pumped concrete, concrete for industrial slabs, architectural concrete, concrete
required to be watertight, or concrete with a water/cement ratio below 0.50 shall
contain the specified high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer).
' 3.2 MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS AND MIXING
IA. Conform to ACI 304 current edition; specified requirements for mix design, testing, and
quality control; and to other requirements of these Specifications.
3.3 RETEMPERING
A. Retempering of concrete or mortar in which the cement has partially hydrated will not be
permitted. Redosage with the specified high -range water -reducing admixture
(superplasticizer) may be done with the prior approval of the Engineer regarding dosage
and time periods.
3.4 FORMS - MAXIMUM SIZE OF CONCRETE PLACEMENTS
A. Coordinate with other trades whose work may be located within or below concrete.
' B. Notify Engineer 1 full working day prior to erection of forms for inspection.
C. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete; remove chips, wood,
sawdust, dirt or other debris before concrete is placed.
D. Design:
' 1. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork in accordance with:
a. Building Codes Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318).
b. Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork (ACI 347).
'
c. Construction Industry Standards (OSHA 2207).
2. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to
' concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
E. Reuse of Forms: Do not reuse forms unless they are in new and undamaged condition.
I
FY972102 03300-11
F. Beveled Edges (Chamfer):
1. Form 3/4 -inch bevels at concrete edges.
2. Where beveled edges on existing adjacent structures are diverse more than 3/4 inch,
obtain Engineer's approval of size prior to placement of bevel form strip.
G. Cover Over Reinforcement:
1. Follow ACI 318, Article 7.7.1 for providing minimum . concrete cover for
reinforcement.
a. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 3 inches.
b. Concrete exposed to earth or weather:
1) No. 6 through No. 8: 2 inches.
2) No. 5 bars and smaller including wire mesh: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with ground:
a. Slabs, Walls, Joists:
1) No. 11 bars and smaller: 3/4 inch.
b. Beams, Columns, Primary Reinforcement, Ties, Stirrups, and Spirals:
1-1/2 inch.
H. Foim Tolerances: Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, work
in finished structures.
CONCRETE
CANAL
DRAINAGE
BUILDINGS
LINING
STRUCTURE
TOLERANCES
(INCHES)
(INCHES)
(INCHES)
Aligment--Tangents
2
--Curves
4
Grades
I
......................................................................................................................:................................:.....................................
Plumb: In any 10 foot of length
1/4
1/2
Maximum for entire structure
I
---
1
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Level
1/2
........................................................................................
E................................i................................l.....................................
Linear building lines from established
position on drawings
1
---
---
........................................................................................
i................................i.....................................................................
Sizes and locations of sleeves
-1/4
---
-1/2
Floor openings and wall openings•
+1/2
__•
+1/2
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cross-section dimensions of beams, slabs,
-1/4
-1/4
1 -1/4
walls, and similar parts
+1/2
+1/2
+l/2
.................................................................................................................................................................................................
Depressions or high spots in slabs in any 10
- -
foot in length
1/4
1/4
1/4
.........................................................................................i................................i................................i.....................................
IL8
-1/8
Thickness of elevated reinforced slabs
+1/4
---
+1/4
FY972102 03300-12
LJ
I
I
I
7
F. Underlayment Compound
I. Free -flowing, self -leveling, pumpable cementitious base compound.
2. Manufacturer:
a. Flo -Top by the Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Or approved equal.
G. Repair Topping:
1. Self -leveling, polymer modified high strength topping.
2. Manufacturer: Thin Top SL by the Euclid Chemical Co.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIX
A. Submit mix design on each class of concrete for review, include standard deviation
analysis or trial mixture test data.
B. Proportion mix design in accordance with ACI 318-89, Section 5.3, "Proportioning on
'the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures".
C. If trial batches are used:
'
1. Prepare mix design by independent testing laboratory.
2. Achieve an average compressive strength 1200 psi higher than the specified
' strength, or 1400 psi for specified concrete strengths over 5000 psi.
3. Certified copies of laboratory trial mix reports and cylinder tests shall be submitted
to Engineer by the testing laboratory for approval.
D. Do not place concrete prior to receipt of Engineer's written approval of mixes and
cylinder test results.
' E. Design mix and perform tests to meet the requirements as specified.
Minimum 28 -Day Slump
Compressive Maximum Water- Air Range
' Location Strength (psi) Cement Ratio Content (in.)
Footings, piers, grade -beams,
and other grade
foundations. 3500 --- Optional 2-4
Interior slabs on grade,
' structural slabs, beams,
columns, walls. 4000 0.50 Optional 2-4
Concrete subject to
FY972102 03300-9
freeze/thaw; water -bearing
structures. 4000 0.50
Exterior slabs subjected to
de-icers. 4500 0.45
4.5%-7.5% 2-4
4.5%-7.5% 2-3
Reinforced concrete subjected
to de-icers, salt spray, or
brackish water. 5000 0.40 4.5%-7.5%
F. Minimum Cement Content (based on aggregate size):
Minimum Cement Content
517 lb/cy
540 lb/cy
564 Ib/cy
Maximum Ag regate Size
1 -1/2 -inch
1 -inch
3/4 -inch
2-3
G. Combined Aggregate Gradings:
1. Aggregates for concrete shall be combined in proportions that will provide a
mixture within the grading limits in accordance with this Section, unless otherwise
approved in writing by Engineer.
2. Maximum aggregate size depends on rebar clearances.
3. Recommended Admixture Usage:
Location
or
Condition
Slabs placed at air
temperatures below
50 Degrees F.
Recommended
Admixture
Non -corrosive, non -
chloride accelerator
Air entrained concrete Air -entraining admixture
Pumped concrete High -range, water=reducing
admixture (Superplasticizer)
slump
Concrete with a water- High -range, water -reducing
cement ratio below admixture
0.50. (Superplasticizer)
Additional
Requirements
Non-toxic; non-
corrosive
Initial slump:
2-3 in. with
Superplasticizer:
8 inches max.
Initial slump:
2-3 in with.
Superplasticizer:
8 inches max.
FY972102 03300-10
I
D. WaterStops:
1. Required on ties for water holding structures and below grade walls.
' 2. Type:
a. Integral Steel Waterstop: 0.103 inch thick add 0.625 inch in diameter
continuously welded to the tie.
b. Neoprene Waterstop: 3/16 inch thick and 15/16 inch in diameter with center
hole one-half the snap tie diameter.
' c. Molded Plastic Waterstop: 3/16 inch thick and 15/16 inch in diameter.
2.10 BONDING AGENT
' A. Manufacturer: Sonnebond by Sonneborn; or approved equal.
I B. Submit product specifications and manufacturer's specific instructions for application on
this Project for Engineer's approval.
C. Product must meet Project requirements with regard to surface, pot life, set time, vertical
or horizontal application, forming restrictions, or other stated requirements.
' 2.11 BOND BREAKER
A. Manufacturers:
'
1. Williams Tilt -Up Compound, Williams Distributors Inc., Seattle, Washington.
2. Silcoseal 77, Superior concrete Accessories, Franklin Park, Illinois.
' 3. Or equal.
B. Nonstaining type.
' C. Provide positive bond prevention.
D. Submit for review copies of manufacturer's data, recommendations, and instructions for
specific use on this Project.
' 2.12 CURING COMPOUND
A. Curing and Sealing Compound:
'1. Clear styrene acrylate type, minimum 30 percent solids content.
2. Test data from an independent testing laboratory indication a maximum moisture
loss of 0.030 grams per sq. cm. when applied at a coverage rate of 300 sq. ft. per
'
gallon.
3. Submit manufacturer's certification.
' 4. Sodium silicate compounds are not permitted.
5. Manufacturer:
a. Super Rez Seal or Super Pliocure by the Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Masterkure 30 by Master Builders.
FY972102 03300-7
I
2.13
B. Exposed Concrete Surfaces:
1. . Manufacturer:
a. Kurez DR by Euclid Chemical Company.
b. Or approved equal.
2. Dissipating resin type compound.
3. ASTM C309.
4. Film must chemically break down in 6- to 8 -week period.
BONDING AND REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Rewettable Bonding Compounds:
1. Polyvinyl acetate type..
2. Manufacturer:
a. Euco Weld by the Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Weldcrete by the Larsen Co.
3. Use only inareas not subject to moisture.
B. Non-Rewettable Bonding • Compounds:
1. Polymer modified type.
2. Manufacturer:
a. Euco-Bond by the Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Or approved equal.
C. Bonding Admixture
1. Latex, non-rewettable type.
2. Manufacturer:
a. SBR Latex or Flex -Con by the Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Daraweld C by W. R. Grace.
D. Epoxy Adhesives:
1. Two component, 100 percent solids, 100 percent reactive compound.
2. Suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces.
3. Manufacturer:
a. Euco Epoxy No. 452MV or No. 620 by the Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Sikadure Hi -Mod by the Sika Chemical Corp.
E. Patching Mortar:
1. Free flowing or gel consistency.
2. Polymer modified cementitious mortar.
3. Manufacturer:
a. Euco Thin Coat or Concrete Coat by the. Euclid Chemical Co. for horizontal
repairs.
b. Verticoat by the Euclid Chemical Co. for vertical or overhead repairs.
c. Sikatop 121 or 122 by the Sika Chemical Co. for horizontal repairs.
d. Sikatop 123 by the Sika Chemical Co. for vertical or overhead repairs.
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
C
r
I
C
I
FY972102 - 03300-8
1
I
' 2.5 ADMIXTURES
A. Water -Reducing Admixture: Conforming to ASTM C494, Type A and not contain more
than 0.05 percent chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.
1. Eucom WR-75 by the Euclid Chemical Company.
' 2. Pozzolith 200N by Master Builder.
3. Plastocrete 160 by Sika Chemical Corporation.
B. Water -Reducing Retarding Admixture: Conforming to ASTM C494, Type D and not
contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.
1. Eucom Retarder -75 by the Euclid Chemical Company.
' 2. Pozzolith 100XR by Master Builder.
3. Plastiment by Sika Chemical Company.
C. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): Conforming to ASTM
C494, Type F or G, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal
drinking water.
'
1. Eucom 37 by Euclid Chemical Company.
2. Rheobuild 1000 by Master Builders.
U
3. Sikament by Sika Chemical Company.
D. Non -Corrosive Non -Chloride Accelerator Admixture: Conforming to ASTM C494 Type
C or E, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.
1. Accelguard 80 by Euclid Chemical Company.
' 2. Or approved equal.
3. Manufacturer must have long-term non -corrosive test data from an independent
testing laboratory (of at least 1 year's duration) using an acceptable accelerated
corrosion test method using electrical potential measures.
E. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more
' than 0.05 percent chloride ions.
F. Certification: Submit written conformance to the requirements and chloride ion content
'
of the admixture to Engineer prior to mix design review.
I
F I
I
IFY972102 03300-5
2.6 POZZOLAN ADMIXTURE I
A. Use of pozzolan admixtures requires approval of Engineer.
B. Acceptable Forms: Fly Ash conforming to ASTM C618, Class C of Class F provided
that it can be shown that it is not contaminated by certain additives used to control power
plant stack emission. notably soda ash which can cause extreme efflorescence of the
finished concrete.
C. Weight:
1. Class C Fly Ash: Between 100 to 120 pounds per cubic yard or 20 to 25 percent of
total cementitious material.
2. Class F Fly Ash: Between 110 to 150 pounds per cubic yard or 20 to 25 percent of
total cementitious material.
2.7 FORMS
A. Materials: Plywood, hard plastic finished plywood, overlaid waterproof particle board,
or steel.
B. Surfaces: New and undamaged condition.
C. Joints: Use tape, gaskets, plugs, or approved calking to keep joints water tight and to
allow them to withstand placing pressures without bulging outward or creating surface
patterns.
2.8 WALL SPACERS
A. Provide positive spacers for wall forms.
2.9 FORM TIES.
A. Factory -made and constructed so that tie remains embedded in wall, except for
removable portion at each end.
B: Inserts:
1. Conical or spherical.
2. Fixed to remain in contact with forming material.
3. Constructed so no metal is within 1 inch of concrete surface when forms, inserts,
and tie ends are removed.
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
I
C
1.
I
I
C. Flat bar ties for panel forms: Plastic or rubber inserts with a minimum depth of! inch
and sufficient dimensions to permit proper patching of tie hole.
I
FY972102 03300-6
I
PART 2. PRODUCTS
' 2.1 CEMENT
A. Portland cement Type I and Type II conforming to ASTM C150.
I. Type I most common uses: Pavement, drainage structures, water treatment plants,
and buildings.
2. Type II: Moderately resistant to sulfate attack, generates less heat and at slower rate
'
than Type I. Uses: Sewage treatment plants, massive structures (large piers or
abutments).
2.2 WATER
IA. Clean and free from oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances.
B. Potable.
2.3 CONCRETE AGGREGATES
IA. General:
1. Natural aggregates, well graded, free from deleterious coatings and organic
materials conforming to ASTM C33 (latest revision).
2. Import non -reactive aggregates if local aggregates are reactive. (Appendix XI-
ASTM C33).
I 3. Wash aggregates uniformly before use.
4. Other aggregate gradations can be approved by Engineer.
'• B. Fine Aggregates:
1. Clean, sharp, natural sand conforming to ASTM C33.
2. Less than 2 percent passing the No. 200 sieve.
C. Coarse Aggregates:
1. Natural gravel, crushed gravel, crushed stone, or combination of these materials.
' 2. Less than 15 percent float or elongated particles (long dimension >5 times short
dimension).
3. Less than 0.5 percent passing the No. 200 sieve.
'
I
II
I
' FY972102 03300-3
D. Grading Requirements for Course Aggregates
Sieve Size
or Size in
in Inches
1-1/2" aggregate
I-1/2"
95-100
1 II
3/4"
35 - 70
1/2"
---
3/8"
10 - 30
No. 4
0 - 5
E. Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregates
1" aggregate
3/4" aggregate
90-100
40-85
90-100
10-40
20-55
0-15
0-15
0-5
0-5
Sieve Size
Minimum
Maximum
3/8"
100
No.4
95
100
No.8
:80
100
No.16
50
85
No. 30
60.
No. 50
.25
10
30
No. 100
2
10
2.4 CONCRETE AIR -ENTRAINING ADMIXTURES
A. Manufacturer:
1. Air -Mix or Perma-Air by the Euclid Chemical Co.
2. Sealtight Air Entraining Admixture by W.R. Meadows of Texas.
B. ASTM C260; nontoxic after 30 days.
C. Use only the specified non -corrosive non -chloride accelerator.. Calcium chloride,
thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent ions are not permitted.
D. Provide for concrete exposed to freezing and thawing or required to be watertight. Air
Content: 5 to 6 percent.
FY972102 03300-4
El
I
I
SECTION 03300
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Cast -in -place concrete, including formwork.
' 1.2 RELATED WORK
I
A. Section 03210 - Reinforcing Steel.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute, Box 19150, Redford Station, Detroit, Michigan 48219
(latest revision).
1. ACI 211.1: Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight,
and Mass Concrete.
2. ACI 211.2: Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight
' Concrete.
3. ACI 211.3: Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for No -Slump Concrete.
4. ACI 301: Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
'• 5. ACI 304R: Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.
6. ACI 304.2R: Placing Concrete by Pumping Method.
7. ACI 304.3R: High Density Concrete: Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and
' Placing.
8. ACI 304.4R: Placing Concrete with Belt Conveyors.
' 9. ACI 305R: Hot Weather Concreting.
10. ACI 306R: Cold Weather Concreting.
11. ACI 309: Standard Practice for Consolidating of Concrete.
' 12. ACI 309.1R: Behavior of Fresh Concrete During Vibration.
13. ACI 309.2R: Identification and Control of Consolidation -Related Surface Defects
in Formed Concrete.
14. ACI 318: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
15. ACI 347: Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
1
H
1
' FY972102 03300-1
B. American Society of Testing Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania 19103 (latest revision).
I. ASTM A820: Specifications for Steel Fibers for Fiber Reinforced Concrete.
2. ASTM C33: Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3. ASTM C 150: Specifications for Portland Cement.
4. ASTM C260: Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
5. ASTM C309: Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete.
6. ASTM C494: Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
7. ASTM C618: Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for
Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete.
8. ASTM E329: Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for
Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction.
9. ASTM Eli 55: Standard Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness
Using the "F Number" System (Inch -Pound Units).
1.4
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the following in accordance with Section 01001,
1. Admixture certification; chloride ion content must be included.
2. Concrete mix design.
3. Certification for aggregate quality.
4. Mill tests for cement.
5. Construction and control joints not shown in Drawings.
6. Method of developing bond at joints.
7. Method of adding admixtures.
8. Materials and methods for curing.
9. Testing agency to perform services required in ACI 301, Section 167.
10. Laboratory test on concrete.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection: Engineer shall have access and rights to inspect batch plants, cement mills,
and facilities of suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors providing products
specified.
B. Batch Plant:
1. Certification: Current certification that weighing scales have been tested and are
within tolerances as set forth in National Bureau of Standards Handbook No. 44.
2. Equipment: Semi -automatic or fully automatic.
C. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
D. Obtain materials from same source throughout the work.
I
I
[I
I
LI
I
I
I
I_l
I
FY972102 03300-2
I
I
I
D. Concrete supports: for reinforcing concrete placed on grade.
E. Conform to requirements of "Placing Reinforcing Bars" published by CRSI.
' PART 3. EXECUTION
' 3.1 REINFORCING STEEL
I
I
I
A. Clean metal reinforcement of loose mill scale, oil, earth and other contaminants.
B. Straightening and rebending reinforcing steel:
1. Do not straighten or rebend metal reinforcement.
2. Where construction access through reinforcing is a problem, use bundle or space
bars instead of bending.
3. Submit details and obtain Engineer's review prior to placing.
C. Protection, spacing, and positioning of reinforcing steel: Conform to the current edition
of the ACI Standard Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318),
reviewed placing drawings and design drawings.
D. Location Tolerance: Conform to the current edition of "Placing Reinforcing Bars"
published by Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and to the Details and Notes on the
Drawings.
E. Splicing:
1. Conform to Drawings and current edition of ACI Code 318.
2. Stagger splices in adjacent bars.
F. Tying deformed reinforcing bars: Conform to current edition of "Placing Reinforcing
' Bars" published by Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and to details and notes on
Drawings.
G. Field Bending:
1. Field bending of reinforcing steel bars is not permitted when rebending will later
' be required to straighten bars.
2. Consult with Engineer prior to pouring if there is a need to work out a solution to
prevent field bending.
3.2 REINFORCEMENT AROUND OPENINGS
IA. Place an equivalent area of steel around pipe or opening and extend on each side
sufficiently to develop bond in each bar.
IB. See Drawings for bar extension length each side of opening.
' FY972102
03210-3
I
C. Where welded wire fabric is used, provide extra reinforcement using fabric or deformed
bars.
3.3 WELDING REINFORCEMENT
A. Welding shall not be permitted unless Contractor submits detailed Shop Drawings,
qualifications, and radiographic nondestructive testing procedures for review by
Engineer.
1. Obtain results of this review prior to proceeding.
2. Basis for submittals: Structural Welding Code, Reinforcing Steel, AWS D1.4-79,
published by American Welding Society, and applicable portions of ACI 318,
current edition.
3. Test 10 percent of welds using radiographic, nondestructive testing procedures
referenced codes.
3.4 PLACING WELDED WIRE FABRIC
A. Conform to ACI 318-77 and to current Manual of Standard Practice, Welded Wire
Fabric, by Wire Reinforcement Institute regarding placement, bends, laps, and other
requirements. ,
B. Placing: '
1. Extend fabric to within 2 inches. of edges of slab.
2. Lap splices at least 1-1/2 courses of fabric and a minimum of 6 inches.
3. Tie laps and splices securely at ends and at least every 24 inches with 16 -gage black
annealed steel wire.
4. Place welded wire fabric at the proper distance above bottom of slab.
1
END OF SECTION
1
I
I
I
I
FY972102 0j2-10 - 4
1
I
I
IPART 1. GENERAL
' 1.1 SUMMARY
I
[I
I
I
I
H
B. American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania 19103.
1. ASTM A185 - Specification for Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
2. ASTM A497 - Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcement.
3. ASTM A615 - Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel for Concrete
Reinforcement.
C. American Welding Society, 550 North West LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33126.
'
1. AWS D1.4-79 - Structural Welding Code; Reinforcing Steel.
D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 933 North Plum Grove Road, Scharnburg, Illinois
60195.
1. CRSI-MSP-1-86 - Manual of Standard Practice.
SECTION 03210
REINFORCING STEEL
A. Provide reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric.
B. Conform to "Placing Reinforcing Bars", Recommended Practices, Joint Effort of CRSI-
WCRSI, prepared under the direction of the CRSI Committee on Engineering Practice.
C. Notify Engineer when reinforcing is ready for inspection and allow sufficient time for
this inspection prior to casting concrete.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute, 22400 West Seven Mile Road, Detroit, Michigan 48219.
1. ACI-318-83 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforcing Concrete.
I
IFY972102 03210-I
I
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following.
1. Bending lists.
2. Placing drawings.
3. Shop drawings.
B. Shop Drawings:
I. Bars for footings, including dowels, may be fabricated and shipped without prior
review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer, provided that Drawings are followed
without deviation.
2. Otherwise, Shop and Placing Drawings shall include reinforcing placing plans and
details indicating size,location, arrangement, placing sequence, etc., and shall
conform to ACI 315.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel:
1. Deliver with suitable hauling and handling equipment.
2. Tag for easy identification.
3. Store to prevent contact with the ground.
B. Unloading, storing, and handling of bars shall conform to CRSI publication "Placing
Reinforcing Bars".
PART 2. PRODUCTS
I
I
I
I
C
I
C
2.1 . DEFORMED REINFORCING BARS I
A. Deformed billet -steel bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60.
2.2 WELDED WIRE FABRIC
A. Conform to ASTM A185 or A497.
2.3 ACCESSORIES:
A. Tie wire: 16 -gage, black, soft -annealed wire.
B. Bar supports: proper typefor intended use.
C. Bar supports in beams, columns, walls, and slabs exposed to view after stripping: Small
rectangular concrete blocks of same color and strength of concrete that is being placed
around them.
I
I
L
L
I
[I
FY972102 03210-2
1
I
I
I
I
D. Cure thrust blocks a minimum of 5 days before conducting hydrostatic test.
3.4 LAYING AND JOINTING PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE LINES
A. Conduct test in presence of Engineer.
' B. Provide water into pipeline for testing and flushing, including necessary:
1. Pumps, gages (increment at 10 psi or less), and meters.
2. Plugs and caps.
3. Temporary blowoff piping to discharge water.
4. Reaction blocking to prevent pipe movement during testing.
3.6 HYDROSTATIC AND LEAK TESTING OF PRESSURE LINES
A. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean new pipe.
1. Flush with water to remove dirt, stones, pieces of wood, etc., which may have
entered pipe during construction.
2. Flush pipelines at a minimum rate of 2.5 feet per second for a duration suitable to
Engineer.
' B. Upon completion of installation, pressure test pipelines:
1. Minimum Pressure: 100 psig or 50 percent greater than operating pressure,
whichever is greater; as measured at the lowest elevation of the line.
2. Duration: 2 hours.
3. Repair visible leaks regardless of the amount of leakage.
C. Water source for the pump suction shall be potable water from the Owner's distribution
system; vessel used must be approved by the Engineer.
D. Adequate steps shall be taken to prevent contamination of the Owner's system by the
Contractor's actions.
E. After pipelines or isolated sections of pipelines have been filled with water, increase the
pressure to test pressure by means of a pump.
F. Test pressure shall be 100 psi or 50 percent above normal operating pressure, whichever
is greater.
' G. Duration of hydrostatic leakage test shall be 2 hours, or as specified by Engineer.
I
' 02731-3
I
3.7
H. Open interior valves during tests.
I. After the specified test pressure has been applied, the entire pipeline shall be checked in
the presence of the Engineer giving particular attention to that part of the pipeline and
those appurtenances that are exposed.
J. If leaks are apparent, the Contractor shall, at his expense, perform whatever work and/or
replace whatever material is required to remedy the defect and stop the leaks.
K. If no leaks were apparent or after corrective work has been completed, the pipelines shall
be subjected to a leakage test at the pressure specified with a meter inserted in the test
pump discharge line.
L. The maximum leakage per hour for ductile iron pipe shall be as calculated from the
following formula:.
All rubber gasket or O-ring joints
L = NDVP
7400
I
1]
II
I
I
I
I
I
L = Allowable leakage (gallons per hour) '
N = Number of joints in pipeline tested
D = Nominal diameter (inches)
P = Test pressure (psi)
M. If any test of pipe laid discloses leakage greater than the allowable leakage as calculated
from the above formula, locate the leak or leaks and perform whatever work and/or
replace whatever material is required in order to remedy the defect and stop the leak.
N. Corrective work must be approved by Engineer.
EXTERIOR PROTECTION FOR BURIED OR SUBMERGED PIPING
ACCESSORIES
A. Wrap mechanical joints and valves with 8 mil polywrap. '
END OF SECTION '
C
I
02731-4 '
I
' SECTION 02731
ISEWAGE FORCE MAIN
PART 1. GENERAL
' 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install pressure pipe and fittings for sewage force main.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02225 - Trench Excavation, Backfill, and Compacting.
B. Section 02625 - Ceramic Epoxy Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
1.3 REFERENCES
' A. American Water Works Association, 6666 West Quincy Avenue, Denver, Colorado
80235.
1. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances.
2. AWWA C900 - Standard for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inch
through 12 Inch, for Water Distribution.
' 3. AWWA C905 - Standard for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Water Transmission Pipe,
Nominal Diameters 14 Inch through 36 Inch.
' B. American Society for Testing and Materials, 1961 Race Street, Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania 19103.
1. ASTM D1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Compounds
and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC) Compounds.
2. ASTM D2241 - Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Pressure Rated
Pipe (SDR-Series).
3. ASTM D3139 - Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals.
4. ASTM F477 - Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic
Pipe.
' 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
I1. Pipe materials and manufacturers.
2. Manufacturer's standard installation instructions.
I
' 02731 - I
I
B. Certificate of Compliance: Submit attesting that materials provided are in compliance '
with referenced standards.
C. Test Records:
I. Date of test.
2. Description and identification of piping tested.
3. Test fluid.
4. Test pressure.
5. Remarks to include such items as:
a. Leaks (type, location).
b. Repairs made on leaks. '
6. Certification by Contractor and written approval by Engineer.
PART 2. MATERIALS '
2.1 See Section 02625, Ceramic Epoxy Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. '
2.2 CONCRETE FOR THRUST BLOCKING AND ENCASEMENT
A. Compressive Strength: Minimum 2,500 psi at 28 days.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF TRENCH
A. Bell Holes:
1. Excavate bell holes at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of entire
joint.
2. Bell holes shall be of sufficient depth to preclude direct bearing of bell on bottom
of trench.
3.2 RELATION TO WATER LINE
A. Laying sewer line follow Health Department requirements. Maintain 10 -foot horizontal
separation and 18 -inch vertical separation in crossings.
3.3 THRUST BLOCKING
A. Do not over excavate in areas where thrust blocks are to be poured.
B. Construct suitable forms to obtain shapes that will provide full bearing surfaces against ,
undisturbed earth, as indicated.
C. Pour thrust blocking against undisturbed earth.
02731-2 '
C. Leakage Test by Low Pressure Air Loss:
1. Plug pipe outlets with suitable test plugs.
2. Brace each plug securely.
3. Pipe air supply to pipeline to be tested so that air supply may be shutoff, pressure
observed, and air pressure released from the pipe without entering the manhole.
4. A valved branch should be left in the supply line past the shut-off valve terminating
in a 1/4 -inch female pipe thread for installation of the Owner's test gage.
5. Add air slowly to portion of pipe under test until test gage reads at least 4 psig but
less than 5 psig.
6. Shut air supply valve and allow at least 2 minutes for internal pressure to stabilize.
7. Determine time in seconds for pressure to fall 0.5 psig so that pressure at the end
of time of the test is at least 3.0 psig.
8. Compare observed time with minimum allowable times in the Test Chart for Air
Testing at the end of this Section for pass or fail determination.
9. Where ground water level is above the crown of the pipe being tested, test pressure
should be increased by 0.4333 psi for each foot the ground water level is above the
invert.
10. Do not enter manhole while the line is pressurized.
3.12
1502110001:tau
A. Perform deflection (reduction in vertical inside diameter) tests between successive
manholes on PVC gravity sewer pipe at least 60 days after installation.
B. Perform tests utilizing a sharp edge Mandrel.
C. Deflection shall not exceed 5 percent.
' 3.13 TEST RECORDS
A. Records shall be made of each piping system installation during the test. These records
I
I
TI
shall include:
1. Date of test.
2. Description and identification of piping tested.
3. Test fluid.
4. Test pressure.
5. Remarks, to include such items as:
a. Leaks (type, location).
b. Repairs made on leaks.
6. Certification by Contractor and written approval by Engineer.
3.14 INTERIM CLEANING
A. During fabrication prevent the accumulation of weld rod, weld spatter, pipe cuttings and
filings, gravel, cleaning rags, and other debris within piping sections.
B. Examine pipe to assure removal foreign objects prior to assembly.
I
FY972102
02730-5
I
C. Shop cleaning may employ using a conventional commercial cleaning method if it does
not corrode, deform, swell, or alter the physical properties of the material being cleaned.
3.15 EXTERIOR PROTECTION FOR BURIED OR SUBMERGED PIPING
ACCESSORIES
A. Wrap buried, submerged, or embedded mechanical joint fittings and valves with 8 mil
polywrap.
TEST CHART FOR AIR TESTING SEWERS
LEAKAGE TESTING OF SEWERS BY LOW PRESSURE AIR LOSS --
TIME PRESSURE DROP METHOD
Minimum time in (min:sec) for 0.5 psig drop (3.5 psig to 3.0 psig)
Distance
I
I
I
I
I
I
Between I
Manholes Nominal Pipe Diameter
6 8 10 12 15 18 21 24
100 2:50 3:47 4:43 5:40 7:05 8:30 9:55 11:24
150 2:50 3:47 4:43 5:40 7:05 9:37 13:05 17:57
200 2:50 3:47 4:43 5:42 8:54 12:49 17:27 22:48
250 2:50 3:47 4:57 7:08 11:08 16:01 21:49 28:30
300 2:50 3:48 5:56 8:33 13:21 19:14 26:11 34:11
350 2:50 4:26 6:55 9:58 15:35 22:26 30:32 39:53
400 2:51 5:04 7:54 - 11:24 17:48 25:38 34:54 45:35
450 3:12 5:42 8:54 12:50 20:02 28:51 39:16 51:17
END OF SECTION
C
I
I
I
02730-6
I
3.2 PREPARATION OF TRENCH - LINE AND GRADE
' A. Do not deviate more than 1/2 inch from line or 1/2 inch from grade. Measure for grade
at the pipe invert, not at the top of the pipe, because of permissible variation in pipe wall
thickness.
B. Grade the bottom of the trench by hand to the line and grade to which the pipe is to be
' laid, with proper allowance for pipe thickness and for pipe base when specified or
indicated.
C. Remove hard spots that prevent a uniform thickness of bedding.
D. Before laying each section of the pipe, check the grade with a straightedge and correct
irregularities found.
E. The trench bottom shall form a continuous and uniform bearing and support for the pipe
' at every point between bell holes, grade may be only be disturbed for the removal of
lifting tackle.
' 3.3 BELL (JOINT) HOLES
' A. At the location of each joint, dig bell (joint) holes of ample dimensions in the bottom of
the trench and at the sides where necessary to permit easy visual inspection of the entire
joint.
3.4 REMOVAL OF WATER
A. Remove and dispose of water entering the trench during the process of pipe laying.
B. Keep trench dry until pipe laying and jointing are completed.
C. Removal of water shall be in conformance with specifications in Section 02225.
3.5 PREVENT TRENCH WATER AND ANIMALS FROM ENTERING PIPE
A. When pipe laying is not in progress, including noon hours, open ends of pipe shall be
closed; and no trench water, animals, or foreign material shall be permitted to enter the
pipe.
3.6 PIPE COVER
' A. Minimum Pipe Cover: 2-1/2 feet unless otherwise indicated.
I
' 02730-3
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
LAYING BURIED PIPE•
A. Buried pipe shall be prepared as specified and laid on the prepared base and bedded to
ensure uniform bearing.
B. No pipe shall be laid in water or when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions
are unsuitable.
C. Joints shall be made as specified for the respective types.
D. Prevent uplift and floating of the pipe prior to backfilling:
TESTING - GENERAL
A. Conduct pressure and leakage tests on newly installed pipelines.
B. Provide necessary equipment and material and make taps in the pipe, as required.
C. The Engineer will monitor the tests.
TESTING NEW PIPE WHICH CONNECTS TO EXISTING PIPE
A. New pipelines that
are to be connected to
existing pipelines
shall be
tested by isolating
the new pipe with
grooved end pipe caps,
spectacle blinds,
or blind
flanges.
GRAVITY SEWERS - ALIGNMENT
A. Prior to final acceptance of the Work, the Engineer will test lines for light.
B. Provide assistance to Engineer and lanterns testing.
C. . Should any line deviate more than 1/2 inch from a straight line between manholes, the
line may be rejected by Engineer.
D. Remove and replace lines rejected by Engineer at no additional cost to Owner.
3.11 GRAVITY SEWERS LEAK TEST
A. Sewers shall pass leakage tests as specified.
B. Leakage test shall be performed in the presence of Owner's representative.
1
.1
i
02130-4
SECTION 02730
SEWAGE COLLECTION SYSTEM
PART!. GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide sewage collection system.
B. Perform pressure and leakage testing of piping.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section
02225 -
Trench Excavation, Backfill, and Compacting.
B.
Section
02620 -
Cement -Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
C. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete.
1.3 STANDARDS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND CODES
A. Building drainage (including floor drains) and vent systems shall conform to Arkansas
Plumbing Code.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, pipe used for wastewater conveyance
shall be ductile iron.
B. Like items of material provided shall be the end products of one manufacturer.
C. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in piping systems, fittings
and couplings shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.
FY972102 02730- I
2.2 PIPE ENDS FOR BURIED PIPING
A. Use mechanical joint or push -on joint pipe ends for buried pipe.
B. Within limitations noted above, pipe materials and joints do not necessarily have to be
•the same for all lines in a specific service, except that materials and joints for any
particular building, or between any two buildings, or for any particular buried line, shall
be the same.
C. No change in material or joint selection will be permitted after submittal of shop
drawings and their final review by Engineer.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE PREPARATION AND HANDLING
A. Inspect exposed pipe and fittings prior to installing in trench.
B. Inspect interior and exterior protective coating, repair damaged areas in the field with
material similar to the original.
C. Clean ends of pipe thoroughly.
D. Remove foreign matter and dirt from inside of pipe and keep clean during and after
laying.
E. Use proper implements, tools, and facilities for the safe and proper protection of the pipe.
F. Avoid any physical damage to the pipe.
G. Do not drop or dump pipe into trenches.
02730 -2
2.7 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS
A. Manufacturer: Neenah, Model R-1773, or equal.
B. Lettering on Lid: "Sanitary Sewer."
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Conform to applicable portions of Section 02200.
B. Backfill around manholes shall be of same quality as trench backfill immediately adjacent,
see Section 02225.
3.2 ROCK BASE
A. Remove water from the excavation.
B. Place a minimum of 6 inches of granular foundation stabilization as specified in
Section 02200.
C. Thoroughly compact with mechanical vibrating or power tamper.
3.3 MANHOLE INVERT
A. Grout invert to allow for a smooth transition from one pipe to another.
3.4 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS
A. Install frames and covers on top of manholes to prevent infiltration of surface or
groundwater into manholes.
B. Set frames in bed of mortar with mortar carried over flange of ring as shown on Drawings.
C. Set frames so tops of covers are 6 inches above surface of adjoining ground surface, unless
otherwise shown or directed.
3.5 VACUUM TESTING
A. Plug lift holes with an approved non -shrink grout.
B. Plug pipe entering manholes, take care to securely brace plug from being drawn into the
manhole.
FY972102 02727-3
I
C. Place test head inside top of cone section and inflate seal in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Draw a vacuum of 10 inches of mercury and shut pump off. With valves shut, measure the
time for the vacuum to drop to 9 inches. Test is satisfactory if the time meets or exceeds
the values given in the following table. '
E. If manhole fails initial test, make necessary repairs with non -shrink grout while the vacuum '
is still being drawn. Retest until a satisfactory test is obtained.
MINIMUM TEST TIMES FOR VARIOUS MANHOLE DIAMETERS
Depth - Diameter, Inches
(ft) 30 33 36 42 54 60 66 72
Time(s)
8 11 12 14 17 20 23. 26 29 33
10 14 15 18 21 25 29 33 36 41
12 17 18 21 25 30 35 39 43 49 14 20 21 25 30 35 41 46 51 57 ,
16 22 24 39 34 40 46 52 58 67
18 25 27 32 38 45 52 59 65 73
20 28 30 35 42 50 53 65 72 81
22 31 33 39 46 55 64 72 79 89
24 33 36 42 51 59 64 78 87 97
26 36 39 46 55 64 75 85 94 105
28 39 42 49 59• 69 81 91 101 113
30 42 45 53 63 74 87 98 108 121 '
END OF SECTION '
I
1
I
C
FY972102
02727-4
SECTION 02727
I
1
1
1
MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Construct manholes.
B. Manhole details are shown on Drawings.
A. Section 02225 - Trench Excavation, Backfill, and Compacting.
B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania
19103.
1. ASTM A615 - Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
2. ASTM C94 - Specification for Ready -Mix Concrete.
PART 2. MATERIALS
2.1 BASE ROCK
A. Clean gravel or crushed rock conforming to requirements for granular fill for foundation
stabilization as specified in Section 02225.
2.2 CONCRETE
A. Ready -mixed, conforming to ASTM C94.
B. Compressive field strength for manhole bases: Not less than 3,000 psi at 28 days.
C. Maximum size of aggregate: 1-1/2 inches.
D. Slump: Between 2 and 4 inches.
FY972102
02727- I
2.3 FORMS
A.
Exterior exposed surfaces shall be plywood,
steel,
or fiberglass.
B.
Others shall be matched boards, plywood, or
other
approved material.
C. Form vertical surfaces.
D. Trenchwalls, large rock, or earth shall not be approved form material.
2.4 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Conform to ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed bars.
2.5 CAST -IN -PLACE MANHOLES
A. Cast -in -place type manholes shall be in accordance with details of construction approved
by Engineer and Section 03300.
2.6 MANHOLE STEPS
A. Cast iron or steel encased in PVC and conform to OSHA requirements.
B. Rungs: Neenah Catalog No. R -1982-J or equal, as shown on Drawings.
C.
Space
rungs vertically as shown
on Drawings.
D.
Maximum spacing of rungs: 16
inches.
E. Install steps to provide a continuous ladder with steps equally spaced vertically in
assembled manhole.
F. Steps shall be capable of withstanding a force of 350 pounds, applied at any place on the
step and in any direction which projects from the point of application through a diameter
of the step cross-section at that point, with no permanent deformation resulting.
G. Steps shall be cast into manhole wall.
FY972102 02727-2
I
SECTION 02632
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS - SEWER
PART 1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A. Provide polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings for sewer lines.
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02225 - Trench Excavation, Backfill, and Compacting.
B. Section 02730 - Sewage Collection System.
REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing aqd Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania 19103.
1. ASTM D1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Compounds
and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC) Compounds.
2. ASTM F477 - Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic
Pipe.
IPART 2. PRODUCTS
I
I
I
I
I
2.1 PIPE
A. PVC gravity sewer pipe, SDR-35 in compliance with ASTM D1784 and manufactured
from virgin PVC compound with a cell classification of 12454-B with gasket joints and
integral bell.
B. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Foreign made products shall
be unacceptable.
C. Pipe shall be permanently marked at 5 -foot intervals with the following information:
1. Nominal size.
2. Material code designation.
3. Manufacturer's name or trademark and production record code.
4. ASTM or.AWWA certification.
5. SDR designation.
' 02632-1
D. Warranty:
1. Manufacturer of the pipe shall warrant product for a period of not less than one (1)
year.
2. Forward copies of warranty to the Owner.
3. Replace defective materials at no extra cost to the Owner.
2.2 JOINTS
A. Buried Pipe: Gasketed slip joint.
B. Comply with ASTM D3139.
2.3 GASKETS
A. As recommended by pipe manufacturer to conform to pipe.
B. Comply with ASTM F477.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Rigid PVC pipe shall be cut, made up, and installed in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Offset shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the maximum temperature
variation between time of installation and final use.
3.2 TESTING
A. Gravity sewer line shall be tested in accordance with Section 02730.
B. Engineer and Owner shall observe tests.
END OF SECTION
FY972102
02632 -2
3.6
3.7
D. Bolts shall be tightened so that the pressure on the gasket is uniform.
E. Use torque -limiting wrenches shall be used to ensure uniform bearing insofar.
F. Ifjoints leak when the hydrostatic test is applied, the gaskets shall be removed and
reset and bolts retightened.
TESTING
A. All water and wastewater lines shall be pneumatically or hydrostatically tested. Test
procedures shall be as specified in Sections 02730 and 02731.
POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. Install in accordance with DIPRA Handbook, latest edition.
END OF SECTION
02625 - 5
II
material shall be used for lining which is not indefinitely recoatable with
itself without roughening of the surface.
6. Touch -Up and Repair. Protecto Joint Compound shall be used for touch-up
or repair. Procedures shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
E. Inspection and certification.
I1. Inspection.
' a. All ductile iron pipe and fitting linings shall be checked for thickness
using a magnetic film thickness gauge. The thickness testing shall be
done using the method outlined in SSPC-PA-2 Film Thickness
Rating.
b. The interior lining of all pipe and fittings shall be tested for pinholes
with a nondestructive 2,500 volt test.
c. Each pipe joint and fitting shall be marked with the date of
application of the lining system and with its numerical sequence of
' application on that date.
2. Certification. The pipe or fitting manufacturer must supply a certificate
attesting to the fact that the applicator met the requirements of this
specification, and that the material used was as specified, and that the
material was applied as required by the specification.
' 2.2 JOINTS
IA. Mechanical joint fittings.
B. Slip joint pipe.
C. Flanged fittings.
' 2.3 FITTINGS
A. Gray or ductile iron, 200 psi minimum working pressure, ceramic epoxy lined.
Where taps are shown on fittings, tapping bosses shall be provided.
2.4 BOLTS
A. Use manufacturer's standard.
2.5 GASKETS
A. Gaskets shall be rubber, conforming to ANSI A 21.11, AWWA C 111.
1
1 02625 - 3
I
2.6 LUBRICANT
A. Lubricant for mechanical joint and slip joint end piping shall be manufacturer's
standard.
2.7 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. Encase pipe and fittings with polyethylene film in tube or sheet form.
B. Polyethylene Film: Manufactured of virgin polyethylene material conforming to the '
following requirements of ASTM Standard Specification D-1248-78, Polyethylene
Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials:
1. Minimum thickness: 0.008 inch (8 mil). The minus tolerance on thickness
shall not exceed 10 percent of the nominal thickness.
2. Tube size or sheet width for each pipe diameter shall be as listed in the
DIPRA Handbook, latest edition.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 HANDLING PIPE
A. Care shall be taken not to damage the ceramic epoxy lining when handling the pipe.
3.2 • CUTTING PIPE i
A. Cut pipe in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not flame cut.
3.3 DRESSING CUT ENDS ,
A. Dress cut ends of pipe in accordance with the type of joint to be made.
B. Dress cut ends of push -on joint pipe by beveling, as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
3.4 MECHANICAL AND PUSH ON JOINT
A. Join pipe with mechanical or push -on type joints in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Provide all special tools and devices, such as
special jacks, chokers, and similar items required for proper installation. Lubricant
for the pipe gaskets shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer, and no substitutes
will be permitted under any circumstances.
3.5 JOINTING FLANGED PIPE '
A. Prior to connecting flanged pipe, the faces of the flanges shall be thoroughly cleaned
of oil, grease, and foreign material.
B. The rubber gaskets shall be checked for proper fit and thoroughly cleaned.
C. Care shall be taken to assure proper seating of the flanged gasket. ,
02625- 4 ,
I
SECTION 02625
' CERAMIC EPDXY LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
IPARTI GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This Section covers the work necessary to furnish and install, complete, the ceramic
' epoxy lined ductile iron pipe and ductile iron fittings specified herein.
B. Service shall include ductile iron pipe and fittings used for the force main at
locations designated on the Drawings for ductile iron pipe.
1.2 GENERAL
A. See Section 02731, SEWAGE FORCE MAIN, for additional requirements.
' PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE
A. Centrifugally cast, Grade 60-42-10 iron, ANSI A21.51, AWWA C-151. Buried pipe
shall be Thickness Class 50 minimum, or thicker as specified in ANSI A21.51,
' Tables 51.1 and 51.2 for Type 4 laying condition.
B. Condition of Ductile Iron Prior to Surface Preparation. All Ductile Iron pipe and
' fittings shall have a high build protective lining on the interior and a bituminous
coating on the exterior except for 6 inches back from the spigot end. The bituminous
coating shall not be applied to the first 6 inches of the exterior of the spigot ends. All
ductile pipe and fittings shall be delivered to the application facility without asphalt,
cement lining, or any other lining on the interior surface. Because removal of old
linings may not be possible, the intent of this specification is that the entire interior
' of the ductile iron pipe and fittings shall not have been lined with any substance prior
to the application of the specified lining.
C. Lining Material. The material used for lining the pipe and fittings must have a
'
successful history of protecting pipe lines in sewer service. The material must be a
high build multi -component amine cured Novalac Epoxy lining. The standard of
quality is Protecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy lining. Any request for substitution must
meet the following criteria and be accompanied by:
1. The permeability rating when tested according to Method A of ASTM E-96-
66. Procedure A with a test duration of 42 days as reported by an independent
laboratory.
02625- I
I
D.
A statement from the manufacturer of the submitted material attesting to the
fact that at least 20% of the volume of the lining contains ceramic quartz
pigment.
A laboratory report containing test data for Immersion in Acids, Bases, and
Deionized Water at elevated temperatures using ASTM-D 714-56 (1974) for
the rating method. The report should also contain data on ASTM D-2794
Direct Impact and ASTM-O 53-77 Moisture and Ultraviolet Light Exposure.
A statement concerning recoatability and repair to the lining
Application.
Applicator. The lining shall be applied by a competent firm with a successful
history of applying linings to the interior of ductile iron pipe and fittings.
Surface Preparation. Prior to abrasive blasting, the entire area which will
receive the protective compound shall be inspected for oil, grease, etc. Any
areas where oil, grease, or any substance which can be removed by solvent
is present shall be solvent cleaned using the guidelines outlined in SPPC-1
Solvent Cleaning. After the surface has been made free of grease, oil or other
substances, all areas to receive the protective compounds shall be abrasive
blasted using compressed air nozzles with sand or grit abrasive media. The
entire surface to be lined shall be struck with the blast media so that all rust,
loose oxides, etc., are removed from the surface. Only slight stains and
tightly adhering annealing oxide may be left on the surface. Any area where
rust reappears before coating must be reblasted to remove all rust.
3. Lining. After the surface preparation and within 8 hours of surface
preparation, the interior pipe shall receive 40 mils dry film thickness of the
protective lining. No lining shall take place when the substrate or ambient
temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. The surface also must be dry
and dust free. If flange fittings of pipe are included in the project, the linings
must not be used on the face of the flange; however, fullface gaskets must
be used to protect the ends of the pipe. All fittings shall be lined with 40 mils
of the protective lining.. The 40 mils system shall not be applied in the gasket
grooves.
4. Coating of Gasket and Spigot Ends. Due to the tolerances involved., the
gasket area and spigot end up to 6 inches back from the end of the spigot end
must be coated with 6 mils nominal, 10 mils maximum Protecto Joint
Compound. This coating shall be applied by brush to ensure coverage. Care
should be taken that the coating is smooth without excess buildup in the
gasket groove or on the spigot end. All materials for the gasket groove and
spigot end shall be applied after the application of the lining.
5. Number of Coats. The number of coats of lining material applied shall be as
recommended by the lining manufacturer. However, in no case shall this
material be applied above the. dry thickness per coat recommended by the
lining manufacturer in printed literature. The time between coats shall never
exceed that time recommended by the lining material manufacturer. !No
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
I
H
I
I
71
I
02625 - 2
I
G. If the Engineer determines that the existing material is insufficient or unsuitable at trench
site for selected material for pipe zone in upper portion of pipe zone, provide suitable
material from other trench excavation along pipeline or imported pipe zone material.
3.12 TRENCH BACKFILL ABOVE PIPE ZONE
' A. When backfill is placed mechanically, push backfill material onto slope of backfill
' previously placed and allow to slide down into trench.
B. Do not push backfill into trench in a way to permit free fall of material until at least 2
' feet of cover is provided over top of pipe.
C. Under no circumstances allow sharp, heavy pieces of material to drop directly onto pipe
or tamped material around pipe.
D. Do not use backfill material of consolidated masses larger than %2 cubic foot.
E. Trench (Consolidated) for PVC Gravity Line, and Ductile Iron Force Main.
I . Use for yard piping not to be graveled.
I
2. Backfill the trench above the pipe zone with excavated trench materials. Place in
6 -inch layers and compact each layer by means of a vibratory compactor.
3. Remove boulders and stones 2 inches in diameter and larger from material used for
backfill in the upper 12 inches of trenches.
4. Where topsoil conditions exist, replace topsoil in the top 5 inches of the trench.
5. Rake to match ground surface adjacent to trench.
6. Remove trash, construction debris, materials, brush, and other foreign objects.
7. Maintain surface of backfilled trench level with existing grade until entire Project
' is accepted by Owner.
8. Settlement of finished surface during warranty period shall be considered to be a
result of improper or insufficient compaction and shall be promptly repaired.
I
9. Where graveled areas exist, backfill top 6" with Class 7 base material.
3.13 EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
' A. Dispose of excess excavated material off project site in an approved area.
1 3.14 DRAINAGE CULVERTS
IA. Replace drainage culverts that are removed on near right angles to pipe centerline.
B. If pipe cannot be reused or is damaged during removal, dispose of it and provide new
pipe.
C. Protect culverts from damage or restore to equivalent condition.
' D. Replace culverts to existing lines and grades.
FY972102 02225-7
E. Do not replace culverts until proposed pipeline is installed and backfill of trench has been
completed to subgrade of culvert.
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
PIPE COVER
A. Place select material from excavation over pipe to provide minimum coverage, as shown
on Drawings or as directed by Engineer. .
DRAINAGE DITCH RESTORATION
A. Undercrossings of minor
drainage
ditches not covered in another Specification
Section
shall be backfilled so that
upper 1
foot of material in ditch between ditch banks
is clay.
B. Compact material for full ditch width by 6 passes of vibratory compactor (or equivalent)
C. Where indicated on Drawings, provide concrete arch, or rip rap on ditch banks.
SETTLEMENT
A. Correct settlement noted in backfill, fill, or in structures built over backfill or fill within
warranty period.
IMPORTED TOPSOIL
A. Should regenerative material be present in soil, remove both surface and root that appears
within 1 year following acceptance of Project in a manner satisfactory to Owner.
END OF SECTION
FY972102 02225-8
I
B. Grade the bottom of the trench by hand to the line and grade where the pipe is to be laid,
with proper allowance for pipe thickness and for pipe base when specified or indicated.
C. Remove hard spots that would prevent a uniform thickness of bedding.
D. Check the grade with a straightedge and correct irregularities found.
E. The trench bottom shall form a continuous and uniform bearing and support for the pipe
at every point between bell holes, except that the grade may be disturbed for the removal
of lifting tackle.
3.6 SHORING, SHEETING, AND BRACING OF TRENCHES
A. Sheet and brace trench when necessary to prevent caving during excavation in unstable
material or to protect adjacent structures, property, workers, and the public.
B. Increase trench widths accordingly by the thickness of the sheeting.
C. Maintain sheeting in place until pipe has been placed and backfilled at pipe zone.
D. Remove shoring and sheeting as backfilling is done in a manner that will not damage
pipe or permit voids in backfill.
E. Conform to safety requirements of federal, state, or local public agency having
jurisdiction for sheeting, shoring, and bracing of trenches; the most stringent of these
requirements shall apply.
3.7 LOCATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Place excavated material only within construction easement, right-of-way, or approved
working area.
B. Do not obstruct private or public traveled roadways or streets.
' 3.8 REMOVAL OF WATER
A. Provide and maintain ample means and devices to promptly remove and dispose of water
entering trench during time trench is being prepared for pipe laying, during laying of
pipe, and until backfill at pipe zone is completed.
1. These provisions apply during the noon hour as well as overnight.
2. Provide necessary means and devices, as approved, to positively prevent under
water from entering the construction area of another contractor.
B. Dispose of water in a manner to prevent damage to adjacent property.
C. Drainage of trench water through the pipeline under construction is prohibited.
IFY972102 02225-5
ET
3.9 FOUNDATION STABILIZATION '
A. When existing material in bottom of trench is unsuitable for supporting pipe, excavate I
unsuitable material.
B. Backfill trench to subgrade of pipe base with foundation stabilization material specified.
C. Place foundation stabilization material over the full width of trench and compact in
layers not exceeding 6 inches deep to required grade by making passes with a vibratory
compactor (or equivalent).
D. Material shall be considered unsuitable when it contains more than 5 percent organic
material by volumetric sampling or when it will not support a reading of 1.5 on a hand
penetrometer.
3.10 ROCK IN PIPE TRENCH
A. Where rock is encountered in bottom of trench, support pipe on bedding material.
B. Minimum Bedding Thickness: 4 inches or one eighth of the outside diameter of pipe,
minimum.
C. Extend bedding up pipe sides one sixth of outside diameter of the pipe, minimum. '
D. Backfill over pipe according to pipe zone type.
3.11 PIPE ZONE BACKFILL
A. Depth of the pipe zone above pipe barrel varies with pipe material. ,
B. Particular attention shall be given to area of pipe zone from flow line to centerline of pipe
to ensure firm support is obtained to prevent lateral movement of pipe during final
backfilling of pipe zone.
C. Backfill area of pipe zone from bottom of pipe to horizontal centerline of pipe by hand- ,
placing material around pipe in 4 -inch layers.
D. Achieve continuous support beneath pipe haunches by "walking in" and slicing with
shovel
E. Backfill area of pipe zone from horizontal centerline to top of pipe zone with pipe zone
material as determined by class of backfill.
F. In lieu of selected material for pipe zone in upper portion of pipe zone, imported pipe
zone material approved by Engineer for trench backfill may be substituted.
FY972102 02225-6 1
I
2.6 PVC GRAVITY PIPE TRENCH
A. In conformance with detail on the plans.
2.7 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT
A. Suitable type and adequate to obtain the amount of compaction specified.
B. Operate in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and
maintain conditions so that it delivers manufacturer's rated compactive effort.
' 2.8 IMPORTED TOPSOIL
A. Suitable sandy loam from an approved source.
B. Possess friability and a high degree of fertility.
IC. Free of clods, roots, gravel, and other inert material.
D. Free of quackgrass, horsetail, and other noxious vegetation and seed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
' 3.1 REMOVAL OF OBSTRUCTIONS
A. Remove obstructions within trench area or adjacent to trench area, such as tree roots,
' stumps, abandoned piling, logs, and debris.
B. Engineer may, if requested, make changes in the trench alignment to avoid major
' obstructions, if such alignment changes can be made within the easement or right-of-way
without adversely affecting the intended function of the facility.
C. Dispose of obstructions in accordance with this Section.
' 3.1 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL
A. Where trenches cross lawns, garden areas, pasturelands, cultivated fields, or other areas
Ion which reasonable topsoil conditions exist, remove topsoil for a depth of 6 inches for
full width of trench to be excavated.
B. Use equipment
capable
of removing
a uniform
depth of material, such as a scraper or
motor grader; a
backhoe
shall not be
considered
suitable.
IC. Stockpile removed topsoil at regular intervals, and do not mix with other excavated
material.
IFY972102 02225 - 3
I
D. Locate stockpiles so that material of one ownership is not transported and stockpiled on
property of another ownership.
E. Minimum Finished Depth of Topsoil over Trenches: 5 inches.
F. Imported topsoil may be substituted for stockpiling and replacing topsoil.
G. Maintain finished grade of topsoil level with area adjacent to trench until final acceptance
by Engineer.
H. Repair damage to adjacent topsoil caused by work operations.
I. Remove rock, gravel, clay, and other foreign materials from the surface.
2. Regrade.
3. Add topsoil as required.
3.3 TRENCH WIDTH
A. Minimum width of unsheeted trenches where pipe is to be laid shall be 18 inches greater
than the outside diameter of the pipe, or as approved.
B. Maximum width at top of trench shall not be limited, except where excess width of
excavation would cause damage to adjacent structures or property or cause undue
stresses on the pipe.
C. Confine trench widths to dedicated rights -of -way or construction easements, unless
special written agreements have been made with affected property owner.
3.4 EXCAVATION
A. Material excavated is defined as unclassified excavation regardless of the material
encounted.
B. Excavate trench to lines and grades shown or as established by Engineer with proper
allowance for pipe thickness and for pipe base or special bedding when required.
C. If trench is excavated below required grade, correct with foundation stabilization
material.
D. Place material over fiill width of trench in compacted layers not exceeding 6 inches deep
to established grade with allowance for pipe base or special bedding.
3.5 PREPARATION OF TRENCH - LINE AND GRADE
A. Do not deviate more than Y2 inch from line or /2 inch from grade. Measure for grade at
the pipe invert, not at the top of the pipe, because of permissible variation in pipe wall
thickness.
S
I
I
I
I
C
C
I
I
Li
FY972102
02225-4
I
I
SECTION 02225
TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTING
' PART 1. GENERAL
' 1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
I
I
Li
I
I
A. Work of this Section also includes:
1. Replacing topsoil that contains regenerative material.
2. Imported topsoil.
3. Crush rock backfill required by over -excavation.
4. Imported pipe zone material.
5. Trench settlement repair, including replacing roadway surfacing, sidewalk, or other
structures.
6. Replacing damaged culverts.
B. Trench excavation is classified as common excavation and includes removal of material
of whatever types encountered to depths shown or as directed by Engineer.
C. Pipe zone includes full width of excavated trench from 4 inches below bottom of pipe
to a point 6 inches above top outside surface of pipe barrel.
D. Conform to federal, state, and local codes governing safe loading of trenches with
excavated material.
E. The right is reserved to modify the use, location, and quantities of the various types of
backfill during construction as Engineer considers to be in the best interest of Owner.
F. There shall be no additional payment for rock excavation.
G. Owner will provide site for overburden disposal.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 02625 - Ceramic Epoxy -Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Arkansas Highway and Transportation Department, P.O. Box 2262, Little Rock,
Arkansas 72203
1. AHTD 303 - Aggregate Base Course.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania 19103.
' FY972102 02225 - 1
I
1. ASTM D448 - Classifications for Standard Sizes of Aggregate and Bridge
Construction.
2. ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -
Aggregate
Mixtures, Using 5.5 -lb. (2.49 -kg.) Rammer and 12 -inch (304.8 -mm)
Drop.
3. ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -
Aggregate Mixtures, Using 10 -lb. (4.54 -kg.) Rammer and 18 -inch (457 -mm) Drop.
4. ASTM D2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soils and Soil -Aggregates in Place by
Nuclear Method.
C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standard for Excavation and
Trenches Safety System, 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P = Excavations.
D. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for trench and excavation safety systems in
accordance with Act 291 of 1993.
PART 2. PRODUCTS '
2.1 FOUNDATION STABILIZATION
A. Crushed gravel or crushed rock, free from dirt, clay balls, or organic material, well
graded from coarse to fine, containing sufficient finer material for proper compaction,
and meeting ASTM D448 Size No. 67 (Concrete Aggregate).
2.2 PIPE ZONE MATERIAL '
A. Crushed granular material conforming to ASTM D448, Size No. 67.
2.3 COMMON FILL MATERIALS
A. Material shall not contain pieces larger than 3 inches, and shall be free of roots, debris,
or organic matter.
2.4 BEDDING MATERIAL
A. Crushed granular material conforming to ASTM D448, Size No. 67.
2.5 TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Granular Backfill:
1. AHTD Section 303 Class 7 as specified in this Section. '
I
FY972102 - 02225-2 t
SECTION 02020
DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF FACILITIES
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Labor and material that is necessary for the work associated with the removal of the
existing facilities as shown on the Drawings.
1.2 RELATED SECTION
Not required.
1.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. Work shall be done
in conformance
with federal, state,
and local rules and regulations
pertaining to safety
and as specified
elsewhere in these
Specifications.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Make provisions to prevent the entrance of surface runoff from entering the area of
excavation.
B. Disconnect and cap services before starting demolition.
C. Protect existing structures and underground utilities within the Work area from being
damaged during demolition.
3.2 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL
A. Excavate to the minimum extent necessary.
B. Dispose of demolition debris at a site approved by the Owner. Otherwise, to the nearest
state approved landfill permitted to receive waste.
3.3 BACKFILLING
FY972102 02020- I
A. Begin backfilling excavated areas after receiving approval from Engineer.
B. Backfill in accordance with Section 02225.
C. Material excavated during demolition may be used as backfill.
D. Import backfill as required.
END OF SECTION
FY972102 02020.2
SECTION 01210
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor participation in preconstruction conferences.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01009 - Summary of Work: Administrative provisions.
1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Engineer will schedule conference within 15 days after notice of award.
B. Attendance: Owner, Engineer and Contractor.
C. Agenda
1. Submittal of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
2. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submittal of list of subcontractors, list of products schedule of values, and
progress schedule.
5. Designation of responsible personnel.
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions,
Applications for payments, proposal requests, change orders, and Contract
closeout procedures.
7. Scheduling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
IFY972102 01210 - I
- HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
D. Where approved product substitutions alter the design, space requirements,
electrical requirements, connections, cooling loads, or etc., include all work
necessary to provide a complete installation of quality equal to or better than that
which would have been achieved with products of manufacturers as specified.
2.04 PRODUCT APPLICATION:
' A. Furnish products that are UL listed for their intended use and environment. For
example, use only raintight products suitable for wet locations when installed
outdoors or where indicated on the Drawings to be weatherproof (WP).
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS:
A. Handle, install, connect, test, and operate all products, assemblies, and systems in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. In case of conflicting requirements between the manufacturers directions and the
contract Documents, obtain instructions before proceeding with the work.
3.02 INSPECTIONS:
A. Arrange with the Administrative Authority for inspections of all work. required and
obtain approval prior to concealing or proceeding with the work.
B. Give adequate notice before concealing any work for inspections by the Owner's
representatives. Obtain instructions to proceed before concealing the work.
3.03 CLEANING:
A. Keep the premises clean and free from debris, dirt, and etc.
B. Upon completion of the work, clean and polish all equipment, and etc.
3.04 WORKMANSHIP:
A. No person shall perform electrical work on the contract without possessing an
Arkansas State Master or Journeyman License from the Arkansas State Electrical
Examiners Board. All electrical work and apprentice electricians shall be
supervised by a Master or Journeyman Electrician on a one to one ratio.
' B. Perform all work in accordance with the best practices of the trade and provide a
"neat" installation by technicians skilled in their respective trades and properly
16010-5
I
•HAMESTRING PUMP STATION #7 t
FAYETTEVILLE, AR
licensed.
• C. Accurately install conduit, and other equipment plumb, level, and true to line with '
runs parallel or perpendicular to fence lines. Make bends or offsets uniform.
D. Carefully perform all cutting, drilling, digging, and etc., and patch or refinish the
disturbed area to the condition of adjoining or similar surfaces in an approved '
manner. Do not cut any electrical or mechanical lines that may be concealed.
E. Conceal conduit in chases, furrings, or above ceilings unless indicated otherwise.
Flush mount equipment where shown in finished walls where possible.
3.05 COORDINATION:
A. Coordinate the electrical work with the work of related trades to avoid
interference's. Determine the exact route of conduit prior to fabrication and the
exact location of each outlet and equipment enclosure prior to installation.
B. Study the Civil and Electrical Drawings, and Specifications including Shop I
Drawings and manufacturer's technical data sheets, and compare to actual site
conditions and constraints. In case of conflicts or interference, obtain clarification
or instructions before performing any work. I
C. Piping or equipment requiring slope or specific mounting elevations will generally
have right of way over conduit and other products whose elevations can be
changed.
D. Carefully .plan the sequence of work as required to minimize disruptions and t
installation time. The maximum allowed down time for the lift station will be 2
hours.
3.06 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
A. Make all required electrical connections to each item of equipment shown or
specified including equipment furnished by Owner, and make operational.
3.07 PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS:
A. Locate existing utility lines and adequately identify and protect during the execution
of the work.
B. Protect public and private property against damage.
16610-6